Home

combit Relationship Manager - Manual

1. Contacts ProjectAssignment Projects ID I3 ID m ID Record ID 1 Record ID 1 1 Record ID 3 ContactID a TN N M Global Unique ID ProjectID VN N M Global Unique ID Example A person is assigned to a project and several other people are assigned to the project at the same time In this case you need a link view which in this case is called ProjectAssignment gt Select the target view gt Select the corresponding link field of the target view 190 Relations Important Only fields of the same physical data type and same size can be linked This applies generally to all relation types With a 1 1 relation usually select the primary key field internal field type Record ID The content are set automatically by cRM With a 1 N relation usually select the foreign key field internal field type Globally unique ID Takes the primary key of another record gt An alias name can be set for every relation This relation alias is used in many dialogs e g in the Filter General as the name for the relation gt Place the objects in the Input Form Designer So that the 1 N linked records can be displayed place a container in the input form In 1 1 relations the records can be linked with buttons of the type Select Relational Record and Goto record in the input form Set the parameter for the link in the properties So that the field contents of a 1 1 inked record
2. Settings for database search Suppress country code of own country Always add country code of own country Search without question a Con Logging incoming calls If you cannot accept a call because you are not at your workstation the phone manager tries to log it Requirement for this is the transmission of the caller s number e g with an ISDN phone The incoming number the date and the time are recorded If you wish you can also deactivate this function 127 Telephoning and call list Search for a number If you receive a call for which the numberis being transmitted the phone manager asks if the number should be searched for in the configured views You can add a sound alert to this event If you select YES the configured views that is the contained phone and mobile phone fields are searched for matching entries If the number is not found cRM reduces the number automatically from behind to try and find other records of the firm Tip By using a sort order on all phone fields the search speed can normally be increased Alternatively you can create an index of these fields directly in the server 8 4 Sending an SMS You have the option of sending SMS messages directly from a record To do this right click in a field of type Mobile Phone and select Send SMS from the context menu Requirement for this is a dialing unit with TAPI driver that allows a data connection These requirements
3. Luna Aventuras DE 78467 Konstanz e amp Master Data Salutation Herr Company Company2 MatchCode Cou ZIP City Street Custom AccountMngr co ney sni ENTE CE Name Sch Albatros Flug OHG DE 78464 Zeppeinstr 33 F10003 User2 Alpenverein Edelwei Alpenverein Edetwei BRIDE 82467 Garmisch Partenkin Enzianstr 44 F10017 User3 Firstname Mari Pronounc Anwaltskanziei Reci Anwaltskanziei Reci SIDE 12307 Berlin Falckensteinstr 17 F10042 Useri j M A M MatchCode M lk eFind Text gt Company vl GBF Posi By clicking on the button e g link with firm you open the overview list of the records that can be allocated gt First select the desired field from the list of searchable fields e g Firm Now you must only type in the words to be searched no need to type into a search field which are displayed while typing in the bottom left corner of the window gt Therelevant fieldis then searched for the word and the filtered records are displayed in the overview list v To go back to the complete list click on the button Restore last filter v If you should require a more complex search or filter the dialogs for quick and normal search are of course also available More information about these at the start of this chapter 4 3 Global Search With the global search Project navigation Window gt Toolbar gt Global Search you can search field contents in all views in the order of naviga
4. ssssss 189 Delete nete end 184 Family Nannies s act ttes 207 Field alias i deett 186 Field types 181 186 ODeti i ou eee been ets 48 User management 178 Webview sssssssese 206 Visualization of data 150 W WDACCESS ssssssssseee 28 ACCESS aai t t torte 30 Web Element sssssssss 300 Index WODBDVIQW2 ic ettet ed 49 206 Wildcard i etr ee ta 76 Windows Authentication 22 25 Windows Scripting Host 272 WindowsPhone 16 ACCESS A bead m it 30 Wizard Formula actitud acd 215 OU etio n do tos 226 Print template sss 226 Workflows Field Change 248 Pim Outi act sem m ttt rte 248 348 Workflow Designer 255 Workflow Server sss 245 Working simultaneously 52 Workspace sss See Input form X XING connection 82 Z ZIP code directory inten 61 Internal directories sss 62
5. User Guide combit J Relationship Manager 7 Intelligent CRM as unique as you are Information in this document is without guarantee and subject to change without notice The software described in this documentation is provided on the basis of the combit GmbH license agreement Companies names and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted The availability of functions described in this manual depends on the version the release level the installed service packs and other features of your system e g operating system word processing software e mail software etc as well as the general configuration No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of combit GmbH This application uses Visual Basic Scripting Edition and JScript from Microsoft Corporation Scintilla and SciTE copyright 1998 2003 by Neil Hodgson lt neilh scintilla org gt Regular expression support is provided by the PCRE library package which is open source software written by Philip Hazel and copyright by the University of Cambridge England JPEG coding and encoding is made with help of the JPEG Library of the IJG Independent JPEG Group Uses linked_map class by Fernando Lagos 2006 Copyright combit GmbH 1988 2013 Rev 7 001 EN http Awww combit net All rights reserved Table of content
6. sss 45 LiStboX68 2 duce dede loa exe 297 LISTS ec titi o tem ts 234 GUSTOMIZE ecce te dido 234 PRIA O dioe cce emere eben 139 Locking behavior sss 52 OO odes ef i an obf 197 LOJN See User management Lotus NOTOS ute et 109 M Mails ce eres See E mail Mail merge See Output Management sss 306 Manual filter ssssssssssss 98 MAPI interface s s s 130 344 Master datant ctim 309 Memberships sse 310 Merging records sssssssssss 66 Migration from address manager 35 MigratiOFi XtO0l s tte 35 Mobile Access 16 30 MOGI stan ise ea ette 71 Modify field contents 71 Mozilla Thunderbird add on 115 Thunderbird message archive 115 Mozilla Thunderbird 212 MSDE zvn 5 8 2 toutes 23 Multiple window technology 48 N N yvigatiOnzas iini tesc tabes 39 180 Network See User management Newsletter 132 211 Number recognition s s s 126 O OBJGGLIS ics ertet ient 292 CHECKBOX inso tees 298 D eTaultSs c o ect 280 ListboXocet deae Rayos 297 ODBC ctore dre 155 162 Online directory Seatreh Ires n oe et 82 SocilalMedia nepa 82 Online registration sss 34 Operator Skenen i tetra die 89 Organize Add relational records 72 EX DOM ccrte eed a 161 ImiportosscdedpuenasPIA RE 154 Mdi t imme petes 71 Outlook Appointments and
7. Do not transfer view at all 177 Configuration of projects 13 The f you select a view with 1 N linked views you can select these linked views automatically as well 8 Project properties project configuration can be opened under File gt Information gt Properties Properties Select the Properties tab for the database configuration The project properties are generally saved in the combit Relationship Manager project file file ending crm Project Settings EJ Properties Settings Project file Solutions Medium English Medium English crm Database combit_Medium v Name Medium English ID 3fa5d46bc8404a16b1dd7b6a43120dc3 Number of views 66 Description cRM Solution Medium English Version 7 000 Extras Create views of the user management 178 Cancel In the Database field select the database on which the project should be based In the Name field the name of the project is set The ID of the project will be created automatically In the Description you can enter any information you feel is relevant If you work with several projects this is a way of telling the difference between them Create views of the user management By clicking this button database views that refer to the cRM user management are generated in the database Views that are based on these database views are also created in the current project These views can only be used in read only mode
8. Further information about this can be found in the List amp Label Designer documentation In addition you can also insert fields in the Subject field Add attachments Links can be added to attachments via Start gt Attachment or by right clicking in the window File Since the template only contains the link to a file this file must be found in the specified path at the time of the sending 133 E mail You can select any file via the context menu entry New File You can access the Formula Wizard via the entry New Formula These way attachments for example depending on the records can be omitted or attachments can be saved by using the cRM variable cRM Project Path relative to the project directory Links can be edited by double clicking on an entry The file link is removed from the template by selecting Delete in the context menu Note The template only contains a reference to the file not the file itself At the time of sending the file for the required attachment must therefore still be under the directory given in the template Options text e mail only Under File gt Options you will open a dialog in which the following settings are available Transform German Umlauts before sending changes the sometimes problematic German umlauts becomes ae becomes ue etc Encrypt mail text before sending encrypts the mail text before sending it Enter the desired password after activation
9. Text Forma Text Forma Text Forma Text Forma Text Forma Text Forma Text Forma Text Forma Text Forma Text Forma Text Forma Text Forma Text Forma Paste gt Table Start gt Message gt Send achment gt File achment gt Formular Paste gt Fields New Table V Paste gt Table gt Insert Row Paste gt Table gt Insert Column Paste gt Table gt Insert Cell Paste gt Table gt Delete Row Paste gt Table gt Delete Column Paste gt Table gt Delete Cell Paste gt Table gt Link Cells o e gt Split Cells ure Paste gt Hyperlink ing gt Style ing gt Font ing gt Bold ing gt Italic ing gt Underlined ing gt Lef ing gt Centered ing gt Right ing gt Numbering ing gt Bullet Character ing gt Decrease Indent ing gt Increase Indent ing gt Background Format gt Text Format gt HTML Settings gt E mail Settings gt Help Ribbon and toolbars File gt Options File gt Help Position in the ribbon alphabetically to position in toolbar Project Command in Ribbon Context Menu on view in Project window Delete Context Menu on view in Project window New e gt Exi eH eH e gt anage eH eH eH eH e gt Session e gt H e e gt gt H H e e r e e a SS CE TD GE p p gt Contact Help gt Info About combit Relationship
10. View contains the view object that the event is regarding if available for the event Data contains any additional information about the event Example Event Record is being saved of the view Companies to show a message window to the user stating that he has only rights to read the current record 249 Workflows and Events Dim oEvent Set oEvent WScript Event Dim DoCancel DoCancel false Dim Value Value oEvent Recordl GetContentsByName ABC If Value A Then DoCancel True MsgBox You only have read rights for this record vbInformation combit Relationship Manager End If oEvent Cancel DoCancel Limits of these event scripts The right Run Scripts is not effective so any application logic configured with event scripts will always be carried out There is no status display animation in the status bar All events for views that no longer exist are deleted when saving the project file Further information in the OLE additional documentation Important For complicated scripts with long running time it is recommended to use asynchronous scripts for the events because otherwise cRM will be blocked for too long Excepted are the events Project is being closed and View is being closed for these a synchronous script must be used Generally for asynchronous scripts you must remember that the user can continue working during the process and can change the active record for example
11. gt If you want to output values of logical fields checkboxes use a formula with a condition Example Cond lt FieldName gt true Yes No gt If you want to print comment fields onto the file cards with long comments it can happen that the text does not have enough space You can change the page layout here so that you use a whole A4 page per file card You can then enlarge the text object by dragging it If this is still not enough alot of text does fit into a comment field you can continue the comment field on a new page To do this right click in the text object and select Properties Activate the option Page Break True Please note that on every new page that is started for the comment field the other text objects on the file card are repeated If this is not desired you can define different page layouts for the first and following pages with various display layers and object links An example of this can be found in the included print template examples Note Detailed information regarding the creation of print templates can be found in the List amp Label Designer documentation Customizing a list or report Lists and reports are no different in construction than file cards with a report container which can contain tables charts For this reason only the differences to file cards are discussed here 234 General To create or edit a list proceed as follows gt gt Start the list wiz
12. sssssen eeeeaeeeeaeeeeees 137 Ouiput ot labels te ite heec eet e ren e n e rota 138 Output otFlists and reports rrr t t t 139 Outputot flle cal ds ve detained be e eee 139 Output of single and mail merge letters 140 Output Settlngs nm ci etn Ev pe UR RE DRE CRT ERR 141 Printing Withithe DEeVIQWE aun icit ee en rte rd Rr HR Ete 142 Output to other formats PDF RTF Excel sss 144 Signing documents digitally sss 145 10 3 Printing a mail merge letter with the word processor 145 10 4 Instant Reports sess nemen nnne nenne sess nnn 147 Display inistant tepOLtss hoe c a e M 147 Contigureanstant reports jules e aere ee d re RE T 147 10 5 Statistics functions nemen 148 Display statiStiGS 3 metre eae PCESEIB CE SIE ende 148 Creating statlstics 3 n e a e oli ente a rc E ER 149 10 6 Visualization Of data ccccccccceccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeseeneeseeneenees 150 Fax cose ean See rx idees de E brum inrer oak IDEE 151 11 General information on faxing sese 151 11 Faxing with List amp Label templates cccececnececeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 151 Customizing th Tax templates mca tatnen te ibat det tta dels 151 Import export and synchronization sess 153 12 1 Replication iiit ot o mr ex et Rr EY UR ER Erria ESN 153 12 2 Importing Hat data structure sssesese 154 12 3 Importof records eec Reden
13. t The validity errors are also displayed with the respective property in the form of a red call up character in addition to the yellow database symbol in the properties list 2l El Activity Name New Workflow Activated True Base Class combit cRM Workflow Client Workflow Description El Misc NewsletterField so Session 53 combit cRM COM cRMApplication Variables B Collection Name Please specify name of the activity used to generate associated type Workflow with loops and branches The activities ForEachRecord and CustomlfElse are available for branches and loops If you add the activity ForEachRecord to the workflow all activities within this activity are repeated for all records in the current record selection If you add the activity CustomlfElse to the workflow a normal if then branch is created For each branch a container IffhenBranch is automatically inserted in which the activities to be executed for this case are positioned Any number of branches can be added at the same level This is done by right clicking on the CustomlfElse activity and selection of Add branch in the context menu The clarity in the Designer is improved if you use the function Collapse in the context menu The first branch the condition of which is met is executed If an empty branch without a completed operator is present it is executed if no other branch has been executed 263 Workflow Designer If you se
14. Example GetFieldFromZIP Country ZIP CITY GetlnfoFromCountry Retrieves further information on provided country code e g the country name Example GetlnfoFromCountry Country EURO GetCurrencyCode EURO GetCurrencyName EURO GetDecimals EU RO GetlSONames Returns the code the localized name the number of decimals ort he ISO name of the currency given as ISO name standard name or currency code 215 General configuration EURO IBAN EURO IPI Calculate IBAN and IPI Text EURO Verify IBAN EURO Verify VAT Checks IBAN or tax ID for validity Inserting conditions In the Cond tab you can insert any IF THEN ELSE conditions into the row of the transfer template currently being edited This is done in a simple dialog gt Inthe first input field enter the desired condition expression This expression must be logical i e the output must be either TRUE or FALSE This is the IF argument of the condition gt In the second input field enter what is to be written during the transfer if the expression in the IF argument is TRUE This is the THEN argument of the condition gt In the third input field set what is to be written during the transfer if the expression in the IF argument is FALSE This is the ELSE argument of the condition In the expressions for the IF THEN and ELSE arguments of the condition you can use any variables functions or operators by entering them
15. Gradient with 3 colors Appearance condition In the Tab area enter a name for the tab Also If this tab is empty no tab is displayed e g when the view only consists of one tab When you enter a as the first character this tab and the following tabs are brought forward by a layer With this the amount of space on the tabs is reduced So that the available space is displayed you must close the input form designer and open it again To make the interface more clear different colors and icons can be assigned to the strips of each tab With clicking the combobox Color you can set the color In the Icon field various pictures are available With the fixed file item you can select an image file you can change the background You have different possibilities Insert or embed a picture Select the intensity doesn t work with all file types 279 Input form designer Placement indicates where the picture is to be placed On input form page stretched fill input form page tile picture if necessary left right and or above down Filling You can select a gradient with up to three colours or select the system standard Appearance condition You can specify a condition for the visibility of a tab This can be used for example to display a whole group of fields only to certain users or only if a field within a record has a certain value 19 4 Inserting fields and buttons In the inp
16. The technical requirements for sending e mail are dependent on the format you choose for the e mail You have the choice between text and HTML formats With the HTML format you have the option of formatting the e mail contents for example To send e mails in text format three services are available Simple MAPI the standard interface for most e mail programs such as Thunderbird Lotus Notes David etc The e mails will be sent through your e mail program Extended MAPI this service uses an advanced functionality of the interface with Outlook 2000 2013 With this e mails can be sent through Outlook without the user having to confirm the sending of every e mail SMTP When sending with SMTP the e mails are not sent through an e mail program but directly through an SMTP server To send e mails in HTML format two services are available Extended MAPI Outlook 2000 2013 only see above SMTP see above Further information regarding the configuration of e mail services can be found under General configuration in chapter Configuring the sending of mail 9 2 Sending e mail Note To be able to mail directly from the context menu of a field it must be set up in the view as an e mail field See also chapter Configuration of views Single e mail There are various methods of sending a single e mail gt From e mail fields an e mail can be sent directly through the MAPI mail client e g Outlook by selectin
17. ei e eb e Shade tienda 283 ALIGNING OBIE CIS nren ma c aa edo a e o T tes 284 Using the g lde grid ura c Ro deo rre ER 284 Input OFGGF e i esed te edet EA 284 19 5 Shared object properties cccc cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeaeeeaeaeees 285 BIGSOb c oim opea AU e Teide divo ee Hid cade an a e Ne PPAR 286 Display format of input fields 286 Appearance Condition etre 286 TOOltlpS3sci iit Pudet a ed edet Ehe pd d rp 287 ADPEArAN CO xe tetto er la de efl Ri E tts 287 AULOtEX tia viii adn 287 Settingcontentlin kS anesan a cdi atthe a Muar E ETE 288 Input ValidatiOri uei cm d ER e Ae 289 BR n extermnal programi e e ti ote rer tae dv ir e 291 19 6 Object Settings 5 ite eee pe eremo tr mete UR RETE epe See ee 292 19 7 Specific object properties sssssssseee e 292 cue cx 292 IU TICLE eT 294 CombobOoxX c Resa e a adh ed dde iD 295 EIStDOX 9 ct E EE tdm tian nl a a E ul ato ON be 297 ChieckDOXeciserssas it tte tarot RR ORE TOS VER DERE SO CHOR E 298 x o1 CUN 299 GROUPING sis iere aes ane e paese er a d C OR EUR E SER Ee eth eene 299 Ee 300 Web Elermient io PR e e te e dee de ede ae 300 Contain iarasi eea a cete run c i e iom tese Ciel Dr ied 301 BUttOTU sieben tbe edd qe ERE ester eee 302 20 User and rights mManageMeNt cece cece cc ceee eee e ee eeeeeeenenees 306 20 1 User management ccccccececec ce
18. 194 PES a Re d ta s 194 Running a program sssr 194 Transiter edet eerie 194 G General Filter Global Search Group membership ss 310 Group variable sssssss 310 Guide grid eate tends 284 H FIStOIVaca ecd eae hes 56 Configuration 212 FRM 5 5 tiit pae ten nd 300 HT ME esmialli sit tnc 134 ICaletTdar e iem ted 109 UA 109 IMPOR eat Ser 153 Including projects ssssss 229 Index FaVONl6 S ce ee eet 57 InTO Center caso oe ndn 179 Input trelds amete 294 BUE LOEO resepna 275 Ad UStSIZG Nasi ene 206 AlGhttrent s s cdit tete ass 284 Appearance sssssssene 206 BUTON arrsa eani tita 302 COMBOBOX aee ee cenre aonde 295 Container oire deed 301 CUSTOMIZE ona sen eter re 275 Deleting objects 282 Formata e erede iere teda 286 Gereral layout sss 277 CILOUD zat hem tte ttn 299 GEOUDIfig iit quen t PESE 299 Guide grid 284 Input field ee 294 Input Order tec 284 Insert objects s es 282 ODbJG ES db eee etes 292 PIGEUTO x x b aec aE 299 SAV Or certet bot ag ts 275 Selecting Objects 283 Status Dara cte de 277 Tabs nica 275 276 277 TeXtObJGGES creta 292 Web Element ssssssssss 300 Workspace nt ett eroe 275 Input order Iniput rules s Input validation 289 Installation aite tits 15 GILGEN m eo rS 24 Copying program files locally 25 Database connection
19. A synchronous script stops the host until it has been worked through completely If however you carry out longer operations within a script you cannot work with the program for the entire time Synchronous scripts are therefore useful for processes that are in context to the work currently being undertaken such as the automation of several smaller routine procedures like a filter with a subsequent export Every script that is not marked differently is automatically a synchronous script Asynchronous scripts This type of script is run in parallel to the host so you can work with it at the same time For this a so called Thread is opened In this way the host is not blocked while the script is being executed We recommend the use of asynchronous scripts for longer asting scripts that are not directly in context with the work being undertaken such as the control of another application 273 Scripts and programming reference For a script to be carried out asynchronously it must contain the following instruction in the first line lt pragma asynchronous gt Longer asynchronous scripts should take care of being able to be interrupted and for this they should regularly check the value of the terminate property Further information regarding this can be found with the help function in the object reference Scripts and the edit mode If a script is to be started on the click of a button in the input form without a save
20. Nachtclub Saturday Night zinaa z press RETURN E Sofortlieferungen GmbH amp Co VEN E Druckerei NicePrint AG Organizing Favorites 3 H tel le Premier When your list of favorites starts to grow you can create folders to keep it organized The structure can be adapted freely and new hierarchies can be added as i desired through the context menu The items can be tap Views arranged by drag amp drop and can be named as required we gt Right click on the list of favourites and select New History Folder Enter a name for the folder and press ij Instant Reports RETURN Nf Filter gt You can move the records and folders in the list Es Watch Results with drag amp drop QB Active Users gt Through the context menu you can also delete rename and copy favourites and folders 3 9 Categorizations with codes Within a view you can separate the individual records further by category For this you can use special fields for code attributes These are special list fields Each of these items stands for a particular category or an attribute of the corresponding record With these categorizations it is possible to create filters with the desired selection groups quickly 57 Entering and editing data Because of the large number of possible categories and the clear layout of the lists code fields can especially be recommended when you are working with many different attributes categories They also help to prevent th
21. Then save the new record 7 3 Insert an existing document Through drag amp drop gt Drag the document e g from the explorer or Outlook Exchange into the document container The document is stored according to the field type gt If you hold the CrRL key while dragging a copy of the document is created and a shortcut to this copy is entered in the document field for the File link field type The name of the copy follows the rules defined in the document management The target directory is the one set for the first documenttype with the same ending If no 113 Activities and Document management file with this ending exists the copy is created in the target directory for the file type Note If you insertan existing document in a DMS document or Embedded file field the original file is not automatically deleted You should carry out this deletion manually to avoid duplicate files being stored By context menu gt Right click in the document container and select New Document gt Existing file from the context menu Select the required document gt Alternatively create a new record in the Documents or Activities view Then right click in the document field and select Insert Document from the context menu You must of course then link this record with a person or firm Scanning in a document You can scan in documents directly from a scanner TWAIN connected to a workstation The documents are created
22. Windows gt Toolbars gt Status Bar Windows gt Show gt Status Bar Windows gt Toolbars gt Customize No equivalent Windows gt Navigation Windows gt Show gt Navigation Area Windows gt Dupes Windows gt Show gt Dupes Windows gt Global Search Result Windows gt Show gt Search Results Windows gt Tabs No equivalent Windows gt Cascade No equivalent Windows gt Tile Horizontally No equivalent Windows gt Arrange Icons No equivalent Windows gt Close All Windows gt Window gt Close All Windows gt Windows Windows gt Window gt Switch Window 318 Settings gt General Settings gt Project gt Properties Settings gt Project gt Events Settings gt Project gt Navigation Structure Settings gt Project gt Company Master Data Settings gt Project gt Import Settings gt Sounds Settings gt Database gt Database Connection Settings gt Database gt Database Structure Settings gt Administration gt Users Settings gt Administration gt Auto Counter Settings gt Change User Password Settings gt DMS Login Information gt Help Topics gt Contact gt Online Registration gt Online Support gt Knowledgebase gt Online Support gt Forums gt Online Support gt Support Area gt Online Support gt Check for Updates Internet gt Online Support gt Participate in Online Session gt Tools gt address pick up gt Tools g
23. as a result By clicking on the button a selection dialog with all available print destinations is provided by clicking on another button in the connection dialog In order for the PDF file to be created enter a file name incl file extension and directory path for the property Output file Start the workflow in the view via Start gt Script amp Workflows gt Execute Workflow Connect property to the result of a previous activity A result of an activity can be transferred to a subsequent activity the property of an activity can result from the result of a previous activity When adding or changing an activity you usually try to make a correct automatic link between the result and value of a parameter However the links can also be made manually Proceed as follows 260 Select the respective property in the property list and open the connection dialog by clicking on the button gt cRM Workflow Bind Value to an activity s property Bind to an existing member E 1 New Workflow For each record zi E Open curent record CH Read field Email ST Description T Type 3 227 Record AT FieldName T Value ST Name i Then regular expression Sf Description SP Type M The selected property of type System String can be assigned to the target property of type System String It has description Value Result Gets the readout value after execution V
24. ya These settings are no substitute for database rights Their purpose is the visual support of entering and editing the data a Select Document Type Ea Advanced O Ask user for document type Availability Always create a document of the following type v Description Word Letter Example Word Survey Example Preview New standard lette Lo Lene el 305 User and rights management 20 User and rights management With the menu item File gt Options gt User Administration you will reach the user and rights management These settings are generally controlled by the system administrator Enter the different users here and define their individual rights User management is available in read only mode in the form of virtual views This way all of the users set up can be used as records directly within the project e g to be able to assign a cRM user as a support person to each customer You create these virtual views by clicking on a buttonin the dialog File gt Information gt Properties More information can be found in the chapter Configuration of projects Users and Groups Active Directory Rights Management set modify password Master Data General Project Views Records Fields 4 User Login name User2 j Specify edit DMS amp Administrator login information Useri i m Windows Login Specify Windows login Qj User3 Login automatically d Users Title
25. 11 21 Select Rectangle Dummy rectangle for size adjustments of following 1220mm 28 0m 100 e Option 2 So that the letter text starts at the top of the page on the next side the position top height of the Formatted Text object is set with a condition that pushes the text field up and increases it in height on the following pages Note that the condition can be lost if the object size is changed Properties x i tn Py Layout Appearance Always Show gt Index Level 0 Pagebreak Be No 4 Position 10 00 120 00 190 00 240 00 mm Left 10 00 mm Top Cond PageQ 1 120 20 120 00 mm Width 180 00 mm Height Cond Page 1 120 220 120 00 mm 233 General configuration Note Detailed information regarding the creation of print templates can be found in the List amp Label Designer documentation Customizing file cards File cards file ending crd are no different in construction that complex labels For this reason only the differences are discussed here gt File cards tend to contain more text objects To make the alignment of field descriptions and field contents easier it is best to build up a file card so that one text object only contains the description and an adjacent one contains the related contents gt With the contents you should give all the rows of the text object the Inerasable property Otherwise the contents may move relative to the field description if some fields are empty
26. Activate phone manager on startup 123 Conftigureinterface s ie Eesti e RH WERE DURO ua ER EORR qe 124 Configuring the telephone sss 125 Gontigure a log TUE CHOR erro eo oU c dun 126 8 3 Search for records on incoming calls eseeeees esses 126 Setting up number recognition and logging sse 126 Search Tol Ai DER xcti a e ee eed tratta ns 128 8 4 Sending an SMS sere enne doa de Re EAR ea dence 128 CORIIQUEFALOTD ir reete eee ces e eser oed ce estado d tained 128 Sending SMS messages in the network 129 Logging the sending of SMS messages sssssssssseeenes 129 PAECSGEDPEE E 130 9 1 Technical requireMent ccccceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaeaes 130 9 2 Sending email aei cede we en A eds Be dee Teu tempu 130 Single mall 4a ecrit Rd ee ertet e te eto be pee c debes 130 Multipl amp estmall zt e e etd 131 9 3 Working with e mail templates or standard e mails 132 Creating e mail templates ecco eet e ee d 133 Formatting options of an HTML e mail 134 Import of an HTML e mail into the template 135 9 4 Automatic e mail archiving essem 135 9 5 EmailAutopilot ccce oe deer dunes EI SIM ee Ed e EITI 135 10 O utp Ut Of data cs eee x sick eene Rh doo Rx x deed REPRE 136 11 12 10 1 Single transfer to other programs sse 136 10 2 Output with print templates
27. As opposed to normal file references these references point to the document archived in the DMS Selectthe internal field type DMS Dokument for the document field The Physical Field type is character e g varchar field length 255 Configure the field links for the documentinformation see below Select the DMS in the project settings Further information can be found under Settings in chapter Configuration of projects In the user management set the user specific DMS log in 199 Configuration of views information Further information can be found in chapter User and rights management Note If you configure several document fields the priority sequence is DMS document gt Embedded File gt File Link The mixed use of several fields can lead to problems in particular with the file path It is only one reference field possible File Link or DMS Document Connect a DMS Document Management System If the files are managed in a document management system DMS the following settings are required T 200 Select DMS Select the DMS for the active project in the project settings under File gt Information gt Properties gt Settings gt Document Management System For information on the supported DMS see the chapter Preparation and Installation Deposit DMS login information Enter the login information username and password for the selected DMS in the project settings under File gt Options
28. Click the objects in the order in which they should be displayed The first object that you click on will be given position 1 in the display order the second will be given position 2 etc gt Save the order by selecting Object gt Arrange gt Input Order for a second time or by clicking somewhere outside the fields in the workspace If you have clicked all the objects in a tab the order is saved automatically gj Input Form Designer Contacts dli 56NEH Input Form Edit Object Page Settings eu xt 9 22 Select Fields 3 33 Gir Edit Control 3 D AccountMngr D Bank C BankAccountNo O Bankcode D Bic Birthday D Birthplace O BusinessRelation O CCEXP M O CC EXP Y 3 D City Private B i 3 Company iaecececeececeecenid i cse i O ComPreference D Country Private D CreatedBy D CreatedOn D CreditCard C CreditCardNo Hu LL amp wusrik btt e Select Fields Input C Tabs 88 x E Input form 7 Tabbed pages TJ Communication T Account TJ Address DJ Private 7 Main tabbed pages TJ Activities CJ SalesOpportunities C Sales CJ Sales Documents DJ Products C Campaigns TJ Complaints C Projects C Relations 7 Tabbed pages L to Contacts Tj to Companies 2 v lt gt 18 Picture Company Icon 3 3 14 14 11 11 19 5 Shared object properties The pro
29. Configuration of views Dupe check While entering data you can already let this check for double items A description of how you can set this function can be found in the chapter Configuration of views Through Filter Dupe Check you can find double items at a later point Over time you will discover more and more ways of saving time while working with your data 60 Supporting automatisms ZIP Area code directory A database is available for several countries D CH AT USA including postcodes and area codes if available are stored If you make an input into a field of type Zip code City or Phone and then move on with the lt Return gt or lt Tab gt key the other inputs into the fields of type Zip code City or Phone are made automatically E Directory of streets 80539 M nchen StraBenname PLZ Typ von bis Kainacher Str 81249 Kainzenbadstr 81671 Kaiser Ludwig Platz 80336 E Kaiserh lzlstr 80995 Kaisermantelstr 80939 Kaiserplatz 80803 odd 1 9 Kaiserplatz 80803 odd T Kaiserplatz 80803 odd 13 13a v Kaiserplatz 80803 even 2 8 Kaiserplatz 80803 even 10 12 Kaiserslauterner Platz 81541 y OK Cancel gt Enter 78462 in the field for the ZIP code gt As soon as you jump to the next field Konstanz as the city and with content links the according area code 07531 will be entered As well as the zip code directory a road and post office box directory is i
30. ContactID from Activities where datepart year Activities Activities ContactID Contacts DateTime ID 2012 and 2013 and Note A saved general filter can also be loaded into the dialog A saved free SQL query cannot however be loaded as a general filter Free SOL queries do not respect field rights or record rights of relationally linked views Therefore the availability of free SOL queries can be limited to specific users In the rights administration the rights Edit 94 Saving a filter direct SOL query and Edit filter expressions directly are available for this Further information regarding this can be found in the chapter Limits when working with field rights 5 3 Saving a filter f you wish to use a filter again at a later date you can save it after creating the expression using the button Save Decide whether the saved filter will be available to all users or just yourself Global ilters are also available in the Filter toolbar Whether you switch to the list view when this is executed depends on the corresponding setting in the General Filter dialog n the Description column enter a descriptive text Activate the checkbox in the Container filter column if this filter is also to be available for filtering a container Further information can be found under Filtering containers Activate In Navigation if the filter should also be available for quic
31. If you have accidentally opened the configuration leave the dialog with Cancel To change something in the current configuration select File gt Options gt Dial Device in the phone manager First select the dialing unit The most common and recommended dialing interface is TAPI The corresponding drivers are included with most telephones Otherwise please refer to the manufacturer for a driver Type of Dial Device x Select the type of dialing unit you want to use and which notifies you of incoming calls CAPI 2 0 ISDN c D ISDN telephone with serial port gt or terminal adapter CO ISDN terminal adapter gt O Modem with serial port gt Phoneware ISDN Skype Hint Configuring a device always creates a new device which will replace the old Thus all configuration entries will be filled with this device s default value 124 Configure the phone manager With TAPI the system is automatically checked for the availability of these interfaces If they are not available they cannot be selected in the configuration dialog To be able to configure a deactivated interface here it must first be installed You can also call directly through Skype For this you need Skype running with online status When you first start you need to allow access to the cuph13 ovl on Skype TAPI Windows Telephony API TAPI supports dialing from a telephone field as well as number
32. Prompt text E AccountMngr A AccountMngr begins with Wich category g Activities A Bank not equal to Eg BusinessRelation A BankAccountNo less Default value CampaignAssignments AJ Bankcode greater A E Company A BIC less equal cl CompanyRelations H BusinessRelation greater equal Case Sensitive amp Complaints A RusineccSectori V is empty E ComPreference Gs 2 Lie net emnt d a tostacieispone cl DITAN Nor OR v x ContactRelations2 E Gender 1 upper Companies ABC upper N AskStringS Wich category A7 E LeadSource E MaritalStatus E PaymentTerm V lt gt e The expressions of the different views will be concatenated with AND Include current filter 2 Other options v Load Save Execute Cancel pti This is useful if very similar filters are used often in which only the comparative value changes If you wish to create a filter with a query click on the button field next to the Value field and select Prompt User Input You can then enter some text to request the information and a suggested value Input Wich category i Load recently used filter With the Load recently used filter button the last nine recently used filter expressions are available even if these were not saved by the user directly The recently used filter expressions are user specific and view specific 5 2 Free SQL Query The function Free SOL query gives experts the option t
33. TEXT fyou wish to use fixed text together with variables text and variable must always be connected with the link operator Example FIXED TEXT VARIABLE Outside of expressions no inverted commas or operators are necessary Example FIXED TEXT VARIABLE Expressions and breaks dates tabulators and special characters Breaks or date information may not occur within expressions i e within double angle brackets With the Linefeed button on the Text tab you can insert any number of breaks into the row currently being edited Breaks are shown by the lt gt symbol Each of these breaks triggers a text wrapping break Inthe Date tab you can insert the current date into a row with a double click Byinserting the control character Chr 9 you can create a tabulator Example Name Chr 9 lt Salutation gt lt Firstname gt lt Name gt By inserting the control character Chr 149 you can create a point or any other desired special characters To do this enter the ANSI code of the character into the brackets Example lt COMPANY gt Chr 149 STREET Chr 149 ZIP CITY 15 7 Configuring transfer templates You can transfer data into another program using a transfer template e g Word This output is suitable for individual letters for example so you can edit the contents in the corresponding program before printing If these documents are to
34. Underthe Fields tab all available fields for this view are listed Here you have the ability to set the Field alias and the Internal field type a View Settings Companies Ea Name Companies Database table view Companies vO v Fields Relations Codes Dupes Function Definitions Auto No Auto Log Document Management Docum E Properties Bm x No Field name Field alias External field type Field size Decimal plac Internal field type Key field 1 ID ID Bytes 16 Record ID IV 2 Company Company Character 100 Character r 3 Company2 Company2 Character 100 Character r 4 Company3 Company3 Character 100 Character r 5 MatchCode MatchCode Character 50 Character r 6 Country Country Character 3 Country r 7 ZIP ZIP Character 9 Zip Code r 8 City City Character 50 City E 9 Street Street Character 50 Street r 10 ZIPPOBox ZIPPOBox Character 9 ZIP P O Box Li n POBox POBox Character 30 P O Box r 12 Phone Phone Character 30 Phone LH 13 Fax Fax Character 30 Fax r 14 Email Email Character 60 E mail n 15 ComPreference ComPreference Integer Long 4 Numeric pr x lt gt 185 Configuration of views Create New Change andDelete Fields By using the corresponding buttons you can open the dialog for editing the database structure gt Select the button New above the table Fields to create a new field With Delete you can remove fields from the database table Click into a field to ed
35. Windows Login is empty Synchronize users from following Active Directory groups Actions in the cRM user administration v Automatically create CRM users based on Active Directory Assign following standard groups thereby Administrators D Users Update cRM user master data based on Active Directory Appointments and tasks of this user are irrevocably deleted Automatically create cRM users based on Active Directory Is this option is set a user who was found in Active Directory but is not yet available in cRM newly created Assign following standard groups thereby If a new user to set it is automatically added to the selected groups Update cRM user master data based on Active Directory If a cRM user is found in the Active Directory the user master data will be updated with the data from the Active Directory Already defined cRM user master data won t be overwritten with empty data from the Active Directory If an existing cRM user is de activated in the Active Directory during the synchronization he will be de activated in the cRM as well 308 User management Users that do not exist in the cRM user administration and whose account is deactivated in the Active Directory will be ignored during the synchronization and won t be transferred to the cRM user administration Following users are excluded from the synchronization Guest and German Gast
36. With this it is possible to analyze the e mail Further information can be found in the programming reference Object model COM You can define more applications to be available as objects in the scripts with the New button e g combit Relationship Manager The objects can be activated with the checkbox With this it would be possible to access cRM to create a new record or amend field contents for example When you select other application the type ProglD can be defined The script objects defined here are primarily for improved performance when editing several e mails since the defined object is only added once and is transferred every time the script is run With combit Relationship Manager and address manager type the application object is available The sample script eMailAutopilot vbs stores an email recognized by the Email Autopilot as an eml file in the Activities view Encryption In the Password field a password can be entered with which received e mails can be decoded This is relevant when you are sending address information over the internet and must encrypt for data protection reasons Further information can be found under Options text e mail only in this chapter 254 E mail autopilot 17 Workflow Designer With the help of the integrated Workflow Designers sequential corresponding to a normal flow diagram workflows in progress can be created visually For System Requirements refer to chapter Prep
37. further information see chapter Single transfer to other programs If these documents are to be automatically stored and managed in the document container configure this single data transfer in the document management For further information see chapter Activities and Document management Another option is the direct output through print templates For this print templates are used which can be adapted in the integrated List amp Label designer This output is especially suitable for standardized outputs such as standard letters mail merge letters address labels name signs lists and reports For this output the contents cannot be changed after the selection of the print template exception interactive user input through the AskString field function The output can occur on the printer as well as other formats such as PDF Excel RTF and HTML For further information see chapter Output with print templates If you want to create mail merge letters in a word processor e g Word you can find further information in chapter Printing a mail merge letter with the word processor The direct output through print templates is generally quicker If you wish to export data to another application for further processing you can find further information in chapter Import export and synchronization With the statistics function you can analyze field contents statistically For further information see chapter Statistics functio
38. gt Text Formatting gt Style Nn nn non Dna HHA HHA HHA HH HD HD Oo HD CO 1 art gt Text Formatting gt Underlined 21 6 Data types able gt able gt Split Cells Link Cells Background narac narac narac narac narac narac narac narac narac narac yle Oo DA AQ CY Qv Qe e Ou Or cC 1o 7763 narac er er er er er er er er gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Data types Delete Cell Delete Column Delete Row nsert Cell nsert Column nsert Row ew Table er gt Bold Bullet Character Centered Decrease Indent Font ncrease Indent talic Left umbering Right Underlined This chapter describes the most important data types in PostgreSQL and MS SQL This information is provided without any guarantees of being correct Advice for the selection of a numerical data type For whole numbers the int type is the most common choice since it provides the best balance between range memory size and efficiency The smallint type is normally only used when storage space is limited The bigint type should only be used when the int range is not sufficient since the latter is faster The numeric type can be recommended for saving monetary values and other values where accuracy is required The numeric type is very slow in comparison to the floating point types The mon
39. in chapter Getting started Start combit address pick up With this function you can transfer an address straight from the clipboard and let the data be entered into the relevant fields of a new record Further information can be found under Data entry with address pick up in chapter Entering and editing data Synchronize clock with database server This function requires the corresponding Windows user rights Restore last opened views Opening the last views can be prevented to speed up the program start Openinfo center at start This option opens the info center when the program is started Check for new version Requires internet connection 208 User Interface 15 2 User Interface Select File gt Options gt General gt User Interface General Settings EJ Settings User Interface Sending Mail Telephony Appointments amp Tasks F 4 Language Reactivate messages Minimize window when closing to the info area of the task bar Add internal views to the navigation Recycle view windows automatically Always show total record count in status bar Use standard window scroll bar in container list view All tabs have close button Open new tabs left v Use Ribbon IK A S Maximum number of open view windows 10 Q2 OK Cancel Language Select the language of the user interface By doing so the user interface e g
40. information about the installation and the necessary requirements Please note that releases with differing features are possible among the third party product versions specified 1 1 System Requirements The following are the requirements for the use of this software File Server Processor Pentium 500 processor or higher Memory RAM Minimum 256 MB Around 600 MB hard drive space is required for a typical CRM installation Operating System An MS Windows supported network is required on the server such as Windows XP 8 Windows Server 2003 2012 Novell Linux Samba The reference projects provided require the support of long file names in the project directory Supported Database Servers Microsoft SOL Server 2005 2012 Information regarding the configuration and system requirements can be taken from the relevant Microsoft sources e g microsoft com sgl You will find an overview of the differences between Express Edition and the other Editions for SOL Server 2008 R2 here http msdn microsoft com en us library cc6459939628v sgl 1059629 aspx PostgreSQL 8 3 9 2 Open Source Database System Information regarding the configuration can be taken from the relevant PostgreSOL sources e g WWN postgresgl org Minimum requirement for server side field changes and the Monitor dataset function Microsoft SOL Server 2005 or PostgreSQL 8 4 The name of the user who made the change is only available in versions PostgreSQL
41. krbtgt Kerberos Service Account The Active Directory does not disable delete existing cRM users If this option is set it is checked whether the cRM users in Active Directory is present Should he not be found it is possible to delete the user cRM either on or off Memberships When you select a group all users currently assigned to that group are displayed in the Memberships tab When you select a user all groups to which the user is assigned are displayed on the Memberships tab To assign a user to a group click on the New button Select the user from the list of all available users To assign a user to a group click on the New button Select the group s from the list of all available user groups User master data user login After selecting a user the user login and master data e g name department telephone number e mail can be saved under the Master Data tab These are also available as variables when printing In the field Signature you can place an image file With the Open button select the path of the file or enter the path directly Login name Enter the name for the user login and an active directory synchronisation This cannot be changed later Account deactivated This option prevents the user from logging in to the cRM A password for the login can be set by clicking on the button Password The password can be changed by the users themselves under the menu item Settings gt Cha
42. request the following instruction must be contained in it lt pragma keepeditmode In this way the save request Is Suppressed and you stay in the edit mode Encryption of scripts If a script contains the command lt pragma encrypted gt itis encrypted from this point until the end Select Tools gt Scripts gt Encrypt to encrypt the script code from this line onwards With this part of the script can remain editable so that certain parameters or variables can be changed but the rest of the script is protected User rights There are user rights that set whether a user may run scripts More about this can be found in the chapter System management External access With the exception of the WScript object the range of functions of the object model is available outside cRM scripts too For example you can code an application that takes your files from cRM and edits them in some way then replaces them in the same location For access you require only one instance of the application object The so called ProgID of the application object is called cRM Application More about this can be found in the additional object model information mentioned previously The instancing is generally done with a CreateObject command Late Binding The available options as well as the exact syntax depend on the programming language used Corresponding advice can be found in the respective documentation 274 Editing input form
43. the central P file is copied and used In this way printer specific settings can be saved centrally To do this the administrator copies their local P file into the central print template directory The P file is automatically distributed to the clients be means of its newer date Export Media In the tab Export Media you can mark one of the target formats to be printed later There are two buttons v ny Select the format in the list and click on the options button You can select a target format as default for the later print 227 General configuration Templates A previously or manually defined label format can be loaded in the tab Templates in the page layout for labels Using Pre Defined Label Formats You can select from a range of pre defined label formats in the Templates register in the page setup for labels Now you won t have to figure out the size of a particular label and how many labels are on one page gt Confirm the selected layout with OK The chosen format will be displayed in the workspace Defining Your Own Label Formats It is also possible to define your own label layout if the one you require is not available Use the following values for the property Layout Definition Offset The offset provides the horizontal and or vertical distance of the top left hand label to the edge of the workspace depending on the physical page size switch this is relative to the paper edge or the printable
44. 0 3 17 0 4850 Defining Print Order In addition to the printer and paper format in a label project you can also define the print order of the labels on a label sheet Labels are normally printed in lines from top left to bottom right With partly used sheets of labels you may have already used the first line of labels for example which could cause the sheet to lose its stability at the top Some printers have problems taking such sheets and react with a paper jam Here you have the option of printing sheets of labels from the bottom up In this way the top line of labels will be printed last and the sheet remains stable even when the critical area on the sheet is reached Note Detailed information regarding the creation of print templates can be found in the List amp Label Designer documentation Including Projects When often using similar projects it is practical not to design repeating elements over and over again but to include other existing projects in your current projects El Project Includes and Report Sections Includes Report Sections ee x Name A Visible Yes 4 Dat File Name ProjectPath Templates io Appearance Condition Show Move the files into the desired order by using the Design buttons or drag amp drop 2 OK Cancel 229 General configuration This way e g a letter head can easily be included In addition changes Just need to be edited in one place if e g the
45. 1 relation evolves you can select a certain foreign key value by simply clicking on a button For all other fields you specify the field content or the formula that is to be appended to or overwritten in the Text field Note Please note that the data format of the selected field and the entered text must match You can only append or replace a numerical field with numbers 71 Entering and editing data Example for Modify by formula Assuming you have imported data where name and firstname are in the same field but you want to transfer the first name into a separate field gt Create a filter with the mentioned addresses and choose Data gt Modify gt Choose the field Firstname from the list and open the formula wizard gt To transfer everything from the left of the combined name to the first space character into to the field Firstname use following formula LEFT NAME if StrPos NAME gt 0 StrPos NAME LEN NAME gt After the confirmation of the formula with OK choose the option Overwrite content and start the process with Execute The first names will be entered in the field First name gt Now they only have to be deleted from the field Name Therefore in the second pass select the field Name and enter the following expression in the formula wizard if StrPos NAME gt 0 LTRIM MID NAME StrPos NAME 4 1 gt Choose again the option Overwrite content and start the proces
46. 25 S SOL SEN ER ce titre 22 SDEs ios atesoco etate mod 23 Rights in the network 22 SONG hi asd ndi n Nee 19 System Requirements 15 D riristal l2 tne eee 28 User Setup sace Ua st 22 Windows Authentication 22 InstatitirepOrtSs sees oret tcs 147 Interface Route planning 84 Interfaces EXDOFE icio htt Pte tta 161 iCalendar Ji sas 109 Apor niee n N 154 Synchronization saii 165 Task and appointment manager 109 IRtGrneE i audience denne ae 62 206 Connectivity aoa dt 62 WODVIOW oi cst temet 206 IPOs 16 110 ACCESS T ee A folate 30 J JSGFItu ict rtm tette 272 L Labels CUSTOMIZE ae ER ett 230 Define Format 228 Predefined Formats 228 Print Orde inr aaa 229 Index PRIN UM Grace etico tet ns 138 L aStTItGE asics er es 97 EDAP SEVO seres 239 Letter Envelope inei ee 38 Mail rerge iu cem Dee 40 Single letter sss 40 Transfer template 36 Word processing 45 Letters Mail merge 231 Mail merge letter ss 136 Single letter 136 231 LICENSE ona ie ee em 33 License extension ssssuss 33 Rental license 33 Serlaln fm Der oci 33 TeSENVOrSIOT voi ie des 33 Validity Checks ood cte te 33 License extension 33 License upgrade sssssssssss 33 List view Col rmn UTE Sissi ness tette 44 GonfIgUratlODe e ree mes 42 FOr atM Goisernin 43 Saving the layout
47. 3 73 2 qp Favorites 21112002143000 3j 21412012142400 3j amp e History 25 10 2012 15 36 10 5j 3 2 Nachgehakt wegen Angebot zu Produkt Z 20 Usert 15092012 114543 gj amp 3 Nicht erreicht 3 Usert y PLS 23 10 2012 10 25 12 8j amp 3 Hatte Fragen zu Produkt Z 15 Usert Y Filter 04 02 2011 09 28 00 8j amp 1 Verhandlung wegen weiteren 10 Exemplaren von Produkt X Son 30 Usert 0502201082000 fl 6e 1 Bestellung 10 weitere Exemplare von Produkt X ohne Erweiterun 45 Usert x Gi Matese 5 BR Active sers narn L9 0406203 19 Administrator CMBTTRAINING SQLSERVER2912 Navigation Container status bar with date time username filtered records and name of the database server total records of view Gestures are supported in various places e g input form swipe left right list view container swipe up down report view Swipe up down Zoom 2 2 Ribbon The Ribbon contains tabs that can be clicked to get to the commands The commands are sorted in groups as they will be used Note The classic menu and toolbars are available alternatively You can change that in the general options File gt Options gt General gt User Interface Further information about the assignment of menu commands to the commands in the Ribbon can be found under Ribbon and Toolbars in the appendix 37 Getting started General Frequently used commands are available quickly less frequently used commands are less highlighted in the
48. 7 Route Planning and Directions With Start gt Route Planning you have the option of using a route planner to plan routes or visualize addresses Tip If you use Microsoft MapPoint you can visualize data on a map More information can be found in the chapter Visualization of data Configuration With Settings Directories RoutePlanners you can select which route planner to use on the Route Planner tab Take note of the different particularities and limits of the various route planners gt Onthe tab Home Address set an address to be used as the start address for Route Planning gt Inthe Fields tab you are given a list with the possible search and target fields and the fields in your view linked with them Configuration of Phone Online Directories and Route Planner EJ Directory Fields Address Enrichment Route Planner Home Address Please assign the search fields to the database fields To do this just click on the respective list item Fields a x Search fields Database fields Company Company Name First name City City ZIP ZIP Street Street Phone Phone Fax Fax Internet Internet e mail ad As standard all fields with the same name are linked If you wish to change this in the row being changed click twice in the database field column and the list with all available fields in your view opens from which you can select another 84 Route Planning and Directions Route Planni
49. Appointment List ar View gt Day ar View gt Month ar View gt Tasks gt View gt Week S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S Star S art gt View gt Working Week Window gt View gt Refresh Appointment gt Edit gt Delegate Appointment gt Edit gt Delete Appointment gt Edit gt Edit Output gt Output gt Calendar phone manager Command in Ribbon File gt Exit File gt Help File gt Options gt General gt Activate Network Functionality File gt Options gt General gt Dial Device File gt Options gt General gt Dial Device Properties gt File gt Options gt General Detection Incoming Call Ribbon and toolbars Settings gt General Settings gt Resources Organize gt Sort Orders for Appointments Organize gt Sort Orders for Tasks Record gt Delete All gt Appointments Record gt Delete All gt Tasks Organize gt Export Organize gt Import Filter gt Appointments Filter gt Tasks Filter gt Users Record gt Go to Record View gt Go to Today Record gt New Appointment Record gt New Task View gt Appointment List View gt Day View View gt Month View View gt Task List View gt Week View View gt Working Week View View gt Refresh Record gt Delegate Record gt Delete Record gt Edit Output gt Calendar View Command in Toolbar File gt Exit gt Help Tools gt Activate Net
50. Binary functions lt Insert StrSubst Salutation Title Firstname Name m lt gt o Mr James Ford rh OK Cancel Example on the Variables and Functions tab double click on the variable SALUTATION Since this line is to contain several variables enter a space with your keyboard Then select the second variable FIRSTNAME In the same way insert the third variable NAME To differentiate from normal text which can be entered with the keyboard variables are contained in angle brackets lt gt Further information about the formula editor can be found under Using the formula editor gt Continue in the same way with the other transfer lines 220 Configuring transfer templates Line properties In the left area you can assign properties to every transfer line Line properties v Blank Optimization Non Removable V Manual linefeed C No carriage return Bookmark Salutation v Blank optimization With space optimization you can remove undesired spaces leading enclosed and leftover spaces from rows in transfer templates Consider a situation in which you are printing a line with the variables lt SALUTATION gt lt FIRSTNAME gt lt NAME gt ina letterhead where the individual variables are separated by spaces If a record does not have a title this variable will remain empty but the space that follows it is printe
51. Cancel In the Colors area you can make various changes to color settings The option Like Windows uses the same color scheme and theme as Windows 43 Getting started In the Customized mode you can select the type of row for which you wish to change the color and then click on the Edit button With the sliding controller Zebra pattern you can define the intensity of the zebra pattern and with the Color button you can define the color of the zebra pattern Inthe Display area you can set font attributes display effects and the line height of the data lines Note To enable word wrapping in a list with several lines the internal field type long character is required Horizontal scrolling In the Options tab you can set how horizontal scrolling is to be carried out For horizontal scrolling choose between column by column distance in pixels or scroll distance in percentage of the visible frame A scroll distance of 5096 means that half a visible frame will be scrolled Theoption Beep informs you when you reach the record limit or if you are trying to edit a field directly in the overview list or container for which you have no write permission Definition of the column properties To change the individual column properties right click on the column title and select Settings gt Column Properties In the following dialog you can change the name of the field displayed within it to
52. Display order later in this chapter In the display order the grouping object should always be placed before objects on top of it i e it should be inserted first Otherwise it will not be in the background and will cover up objects contained in it The grouping object may not be placed around or behind the file cards object Properties In the Text tab in the Groupbox text field you can enter a label for the frame The display always starts at the top left corner of the frame and runs along the top edge After this the text is cut off In the Frame tab you can set the frame type or the background of the group object This option is available to you if the groupbox text is empty 299 Input form designer Tabs Both the input form and the main tabs can contain multiple tabs This way data can be arranged in an even clearer manner 5 Luna Aventuras DE 78467 Konstanz es amp we eben oom a Communication Account Addres Pe S Salut letter Sehr geehrter Herr Phone 07531 999999 1 e IM X Name Solel Phone2 07531 888888 B Facebook jean solei G Firstname Jean MobilePhone 0170 9999991 B Twitter Pronounce ole MobilePrivate XING Jean Solei x MatchCode Solea Fax 07531 999997 amp Position Emai solei relationship manager net Preference E mail GS i Department Vertriebsleitung Emai2 You create copy delete and move the main tabs via the tool window Tabs All additional tabs can be posi
53. Instant Repor Output gt Analysis gt Statistics Output gt Current Record gt Print Output gt Current Record gt Print Letter Output gt Current Record gt Print List Report for Record Output gt Current Record gt Print Single Card Output gt Current Record gt Print Single Label Output gt Current Record gt Send E mail Output gt Current Record gt Transfer to Word Processor Output gt Current Record gt Transfer to Word Processor Settings gt Manage gt Directories Route Planners Settings gt Manage gt Filter Expressions Settings gt Manage gt Instant Reports Settings gt Manage gt Scripts gt Edit Settings gt Manage gt Scripts gt Encrypt Settings gt Manage gt Scripts gt New Settings gt Manage gt Sort Orders Settings gt Manage gt Workflows gt Edit Settings gt Manage gt Workflows gt New Settings gt Templates gt Cards Letters Settings gt Templates gt Direct Single Multiple Letters Settings gt Templates gt E mails Settings gt Templates gt Labels Settings gt Templates gt Lists Reports Settings gt Templates gt Relational Appending 330 Record gt Go Output gt Mai Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu ai To gt Next Merge Letter gt Word Processor e Print gt General e Print gt Cards e Print gt Labels e Print gt List Merge Letter gt Direct Ou gt Mu pu put gt Ins put gt
54. Mr amp Workflow Last name Maier 4 Groups 2 Administrators i Users Shortname Account is deactivated First name Harald Department Marketing Phone Phone2 Mobile Mobile2 Fax E mail maier relationship manager net E mail2 User defined User defined2 Signature Picture 20 1 User management In the left hand area the existing users and groups are displayed To simplify management you can create groups and assign users to those groups In this way you 306 User management do not need to define the rights for every user individually You can save time by defining the rights for several users at once Users and groups The users and groups are edited using the following buttons With the New buttons you can create a new user or group With the Delete button the selected user or group can be deleted With the Copy button you can duplicate a user or group e g when several users or groups have similar rights Note The Administrator user is a pre defined account with all access rights The Administrators group is the same Neither accounts can be deleted their names cannot be changed and their rights cannot be limited It is therefore very important that you assign a password to the Administrator account By clicking on the button Transfer rights from user group rights can be taken over by users or groups from other users and groups In
55. Record gt Extended gt Watch Record Record gt Reference gt Add to Favourites Record gt Reference gt Copy to Clipboard Record gt Reference gt Save as Record gt Reference gt Send To Show gt View gt Input Form Show gt View gt List View Show gt View gt Report Show gt View gt Web Window gt Customize gt Ribbon Window Window Window Window Window Window gt Show gt Status Bar gt Switch to gt Appointments and Tasks gt Switch to gt Calls gt Switch to gt Info Center gt Switch to gt View gt View gt Refresh Appointments Tasks Command in Ribbon Appointment gt Edit gt Delegate Appointment gt Edit gt Delete Appointment gt Edit gt Edit Output gt Output gt Calendar Output gt Output gt Cards gt Appointments Output gt Output gt Cards gt Tasks Output gt Output gt Lists gt Appointments Output gt Output gt Lists gt Tasks Settings gt Print Templates gt Calendar Settings gt Print Templates gt Cards Appointments ings gt Print Templa Se Se Se Se 332 ings Appointments ings gt Print Templa es gt Cards gt Tasks gt Print Templates gt Lists es gt Lists gt Tasks ings gt Settings gt Categories gt gt Record Record Record Record Record Record Record gt gt Delete All erge gt Watch gt Reference gt Add to Favorites gt Reference g
56. Ribbon The view menu contains all view specific commands combi Relationship Manager Large Femen Fe Outpt Appointments Tack Qa N Dnon gt ind Qu m R PET Gd D Ai View Wem tar tatendea i Replace Filler Fema File menu The File menu contains all user specific configurations and global commands for use with the project Start Filter Output Appointments Tasks Data Settings Window Save As Project Settings Project Administration us Open roperties reate New View Properti Create New Vi D New Configure the project properties here Er Create new views for your project here ez ca Hel Events ep The events for automation can be configured here Project Import Transfer views and data from another project here tj Options Reorganize a FEE Company Master Data a HF Reorganizes and optimizes the current T E bit Provide the data of your company here project Navigation Structure Change the order of the views in the navigation tree here Auto Counter Manage the values of auto counters like customer no etc Provide for WebAccess Prepare the current project for use with WebAccess Database Structure Change the structure of the underlying database W e Context Sensitive Ribbons Several other commands will only be displayed as a reaction to an executed action when you probably will need them Edit When you edit record
57. Select Output gt Multiple Print gt Print Labels gt Choose a print template for the label Print templates can normally be found in the Print templates folder in the project directory gt Define the print settings see chapter Output Settings and place labels in your printer gt Click on Start 138 Output with print templates Output of lists and reports With Output gt Print you can print a report for the active record e g print out of company details including all contacts or the print out of a person s details including all contact entries gt Select Output gt Print gt Print List Report for Record gt Select the print template for the list file ending Ist Print templates can normally be found in the Print templates folder in the project directory gt Define the print settings see chapter Output Settings gt Click on Start With Output gt Multiple Print you can print out all records in the active filter as a list e g list of companies including all contacts or a complaints list If no filter is active all records are printed The order of the output of the records corresponds to the active sort order gt Create a filter with Filter gt Select Output gt Multiple Print gt Print Lists Reports gt Select the print template for the list Print templates can normally be found in the Print templates folder in the project directory gt Define the print se
58. Sta put gt Sing put gt Sing put gt Sing Output gt Sing Output gt Sing Output gt Sing Outpu Output gt Sing Settings gt Ph an gt Tran iple E mail Report istics e Print gt General e Letter gt Direct Print gt List Print gt Card e Print gt Label e E mail sfer Record e Letter gt Word Processor one amp Online Directories Route Planning Filter gt Manage Filter Expressions Settings gt Ins ools gt Scrip ools gt Scrip Tools gt Scrip Tools gt Worki Tools gt Worki Settings gt Pri Settings gt Pri Settings Settings gt Pri Settings gt Pri tant Reports gt Edit gt Encrypt gt New Organize gt Sort Orders low gt Edit low gt New nt gt Cards nt gt Direct Letters Mail Merge gt E mail Template nt gt Labels nt gt Lists Organize gt Append Relationally gt Mange Templates Settings gt Templates gt Transfer Templates gt Edit Settings gt Templates gt Transfer Templates gt Select Settings gt View gt Input Form Settings gt View gt Webaccess Settings gt View gt Properties Input Form gt Input Form Start gt Actions gt Dial Start gt Actions gt Route Planning gt Get Directions o Current Record Start gt Actions gt Route Planning gt Remove Al Waypoints Start gt Actions gt Route Planning gt Route Plann
59. With this a new empty page is added to the end of the tab list Newly created pages at first carry the name Page and a consecutive number The new tab inherits the properties of the selected page or the previous tab Deletetab Click the tab in the tab overview and then press the Delete button After confirming a dialog the tab will be deleted from the input form Move tab The created tabs appear in a certain order in the input form This order corresponds to the sequence in the tab overview To move a tab to another position within the sequence click on the corresponding tab In the tab overview and move it to the desired location with the two arrows in the same window Position tabs on tabs In order to position tabs on main tabs or multiple tabs next to one anotherin the inputform use the object Tab For more information see section Specific object properties Tab properties Click the tab in the tab overview and then press the Properties button or double click on the Tab Color of the corresponding tab in the tab overview to open the properties dialog 278 Tabs 2 Properties of Tabbed Page EJ Tab OK Activities Cancel Color V Like background S Ss Icon v Background Picture Intensity 8 only with supported transparent opaque formats Placement stretched to whole page Filling System default O Single color BEER v Gradient with 2 colors v
60. a dialog you can explicitly specify which rights are to be taken over from whom Active Directory Connection With the Active Directory connection you can import users from the Active Directory or synchronize the user administration with the Active Directory of a domain server The domains of the current user are automatically recognized and cannot be changed Note This function requires the Enterprise Edition gt Click on the Active Directory Connection button Choose between the following options Import users from the Active Directory A standard Windows dialog to select a user will open Synchronize the user administration with the Active Directory Starts the synchronization according to the settings Configure Active Directory synchronization Identification of cRM users in Active Directory By Windows Login field the Windows login name is used to determine whether the user exists or not This option cannot be changed Define whether the cRM users in the Active Directory should be identified based on the cRM Login Name when the Windows Login is not found 307 User and rights management Synchronize users from following Active Directory groups Only new users from the selected group will be added to the cRM Actions in the CRM user administration Domains MEITE Identification of cRM users in Active Directory V by Windows Login field by cRM Login Name field in case
61. activities and documents eese 112 7 2 Create a new document ssssssssssseeeen eene eene 113 7 3 Insert an existing document sssssssseseseeeee nennen 113 Through drag drops ties t SEO den Byscontextt ehlus eco eee pe e roe a ertet Scanning in a document 7 4 Archiving messages from eMail Client ceeeeeesse sees 115 Archive message and Show address sss 115 R g lretments cei ent te S eo ef etie aei 116 SetilfigSic udis cag eee e EU YO UR TR er e Y e drea a e 116 De Activating the Outlook Add In oo ccc ceccsecsecsecseeteccsetseeseeseseeeeneeees 118 De Activating the Thunderbird Add On see 118 De Activating the David Add On sss 118 8 Telephoning and call list sss 120 8 1 Functions of the phone manager sesesI 120 Dialing direetly trom a Tlelg as srt ttt tratte e t 120 Dialingitromstheseall lS ui t er i erae 120 TOCA SOMEONE marye HM ette pert eec erts 121 Phone lISETmiTOFmatlonsc eee eee le det 121 PHOMENISETUNCHONS 25 A et cete e RE ER rad POE 122 Printing thephone lStccccoe ata etl e tee ot 122 Man al dialingss ccm etr e e a e e pa etes 122 Gall Simulat ri e ne etr te bla ne 122 Transfer phone numbers to the phone manager 123 Powerdialligoza eet tt roit e e ep Oe E Meet e d 123 8 2 Configure the phone manager ssssesessen 123
62. added will be shown in the tree view of the main window Setting server actions In the toolbar in the main window you can set the status of the LDAP application Start Starts the server and waits for queries 242 combit LDAP server Pause Switches the server to pause Active connections to LDAP clients are upheld but no new ones are accepted Stop Ends all connections and frees the port Starting a query from an LDAP client If the server is started and all settings have been completed a query can be started from any LDAP client For the server to be able to interpret the inputs correctly the following format must be adhered to LDAP lt servername gt lt Base gt lt Filter gt In the following the parameters and the according functions are listed Servername Attempts to create a connection to this LDAP server normally the IP address of the LDAP server Base Here the basic information is provided The base information is used for every further search of the connection Arguments are separated by commas app Sets which application is to be started Value cRM combit Relationship Manager project A project that is configured on the server e g cRM Solution EN crm view A view that is configured on the server e g Addresses uid When entering the UID U niqueldentifier the record with this ID is searched and returned This field is linked with the primary key of cRM Filter With this the a
63. adds prefix If your telephony system adds the prefix of outside line for external incoming calls you should specify this here This prefix will be removed then Local calls gt telephony systems suppresses area code Some switches suppress the area code for local calls If this is the case for your switch the area code has to be added for the address manager to find the correct record This also happens with internal calls 125 Telephoning and call list Specific device recognition if necessary Recognition of internal numbers you can assign internal numbers a prefix to identify them explicity as internal numbers e g Maximal length of internal numbers numbers that have as many or fewer digits than the given number are assumed to be internal e g when no O is dialed to get an outside line when this is normally necessary Prefix to get an outside line if necessary Prefix for an internal number if necessary Options for incoming calls Suppress internal calls or prepend number by telephony system ID if available Telephony system adds prefix for external calls Telephony system suppresses the area code for local calls Configure a log function You have the option to let calls be logged automatically More about this can be found in chapter Configuration of views 8 3 Search for records on incoming calls Please note that number recognition can only work if
64. an external query within an activity has not provided the desired result and the workflow can there not be executed further at that point For this there is the activity System Throw This allows the entry of the exception type to be triggered as with the activity described above System FaultHandler 270 Support for scripting functionalities 18 Scripts and programming reference A powerful object model is available to you which allows access to the views telephony appointment management and much more With the help of scripts you can activate this object model and with it automate many routine procedures Note A detailed description of the properties and methods of the object model can be found in the program group of the cRM under Programming reference This additional information also includes some application examples for scripts Even special functions that are not already built in can be easily integrated like this Scripts can also communicate with other programs and use their functionality as long as they offer the correct interface Note A script is a series of instructions that are undertaken sequentially when the script is run The instructions are from the Vocabulary of a particular script language This instruction set defines which possibilities are offered by the language and how a script must be composed Scripts are generally not very large and can produce impressive results with few commands An average script
65. and programming reference Assignment of multiple records to one record containers All 1 n relationally linked records e g contacts activities documents are displayed in containers If a new record is created through the container in the linked view the new record will automatically be relationally linked with the active record There are buttons available for many of the functions in the container s context menu By double clicking an item or by right clicking an item and selecting Edit the associated record will be displayed and can be edited When right clicking an item various field type specific menu items are available e g dial number send e mail new document open document with associated application edit Byright clicking an item and selecting Delete you can delete linked records 53 Entering and editing data By right clicking in the container and selecting New you can create new records in a linked view The created record is automatically relationally linked to the active record The fields can be edited directly After closing the input field by clicking another location the changes to the record are saved immediately If a field of the Characters long type is longer than 256 characters it cannot be edited directly Please note if the list is sorted by the field being edited the record will not be re sorted automatically If a field with multiple lines can not be displayed completely a
66. are available 168 Synchronization of records Rule SlaveDB if not empty If differences between the main and secondary database are found for the field the contents in the secondary database automatically overwrite those in the main database The only exception if the field in the secondary database is empty that of the main database is not cleared Rule SlaveDB If differences between the main and secondary database are found for the field the contents in the secondary database automatically overwrite those in the main database Rule MasterDB No field changes essentially a blank rule setting Rule Additive Changes found in the secondary database are automatically added to the field in the main database appended The contents of the target field will remain intact The data can only be appended if there is still space in the target field This option therefore is particularly useful for comment fields In fields that are synchronized with this rule you should avoid deleting or inserting new passages in the field appending new text however is allowed When synchronizing both contents in the main and secondary databases are compared From the first difference found that would be the place where you deleted something the contents of the secondary database are added to the main database so that all entries after such a modification would then be duplicated Rule Prompt When there are differences between the f
67. are fulfilled by modems and also many ISDN devices If in doubt contact the manufacturer of your telephone whether data connections under TAPI are supported Configuration If you have not made any settings yet you can also choose one of the default settings for modem or ISDN use A corresponding selection dialog is started gt Select Sending of SMS Messages in the Settings you will reach a dialog in which you can make the following settings gt Click on the New button to make a new entry v Under Provider enter which mobile phone operator the settings apply to gt UnderNumber Prefix you can select all the prefixes separated by commas that are reserved for the selected operator e g 0170 0171 0175 for the T Mobile network The SMSC Number is the dial in number to the SMS centre of the operator The number can be found out from the operator if it is not preconfigured Some mobile phone operators support the transmission of a numerical sender identification i e you can give a sender number that should appear on the receiver s display gt Which protocol UCP TAP is used by your mobile phone operator should be found ut directly from the operator o 128 Sending an SMS Note combit cannot take any responsibility for the dial in numbers especially regarding their availability The mobile phone operators are responsible for these A successful delivery notification is also no guarantee that the message h
68. area edge The top left corner of the workspace always begins on the screen display with the coordinate 0 0 independent of the selected page size and offset The effects of the offset can however be seen in the full page preview or when you print Setting the Size This provides the size horizontal width vertical height of the label in inch or mm Setting the Distance This option defines the distance from one label to the next the space between two labels For labels with only one column only the vertical distance needs to be entered Setting the Number This option defines the number of labels per page horizontal value number of columns per page vertical value numbers of lines per page You can check the layout by selecting Options gt Preview gt Page Preview Store user defined Label formats in the Label template list To save user defined label you can use the file cmll1400 inf Composition of a Label all units are in 1 1000 mm lt A gt lt B gt lt C gt D E F G H l J lt K gt A product code B product description C product size D label size width E label size height F space size between labels horizontally G space size between labels 228 Customizing print templates vertically H number of labels per column number of labels per row J margin size left right K margin size top bottom E g 3420 Universal Labels 70 x 16 9mm 70000 16900 0
69. be saved in the primary record Rules Relations Delete Extended Display Memo fields Discard secondary record Append to field content Attach from first difference on Replace field content V Show different field contents as conflict Code fields Discard secondary record Merge any set attribute of primary and secondary record Merge only commonly set attributes V Show different field contents as conflict Other fields V Fill empty primary record fields with secondary record V Show different field contents as conflict 2 Cancel Code fields Discard secondary record Only the field contents from the primary record are used in the resulting record Merge any set attribute of primary and secondary record All code entries of both code fields are used in the resulting record Merge only commonly set attributes Only code entries set in both code fields are used in the resulting record Other fields 68 By default the field contents of the primary record are used in the resulting record With the option Fill empty primary record fields with secondary record any empty fields in the primary record are filled with the contents of the secondary record The option Show different field contents as conflict is available for all field types With this option a row is highlighted red in the case of differing field Merging records contents conf
70. button In the field selection for the button object all functions for which a button is available are displayed Buttons for the creation editing and filtering of relationally linked records Buttons for in the view defined function definitions Buttons for running a script Buttons for running a workflow Many menu functions are available in the forlders Edit Find Organize Output Record Schedule Settings Tools View With the buttons Delete Edit Filter New of the Container category and Append existing Append new and Scanning of the Container Document category the corresponding container context menu functions for a container can be carried out With the Filter button a combobox can be placed over a container to filter the records in it Properties On the Properties tab various functions are available The button text can be set as desired Optionally you can set whether a right click on the button is also allowed and whether this has a particular effect when running a script through the button Inthe Bitmap list you can select the desired bitmap from a large selection which is to be displayed on the button With the fixed file item you can select an image file For buttons for the allocation and display of relational records With the button Go to Relational Record you can go to the corresponding 1 1 relational record With the button Select Relat
71. can also be by industry and any possible particularities gt Inthe Fields tab you are given alist with the possible search and target fields and the fields in your view linked with them gt As standard all fields with the same name are linked If you wish to change this in the row being changed click twice in the database field column and the list with all available fields in your view opens from which you can select another 82 Search in phone directory Searching in phone directories gt Select the command Start gt In Directories gt Find Record in Phone Directory The media whose interface you should already have configured is automatically accessed gt You now have the choice between two variants either you carry out the search based on the current record or you select the manual transfer Find current record Before the phone directory is started you are shown a dialog for setting the search parameter i e Company Name City etc If you mark all parameters only those supported by the selected phone directory are respected The phone directory now searches for the data of the record you are currently in If no matching data is found you are shown a corresponding notification If the record is found it is displayed gt For some telephone CDs the transfer window opens immediately for others only after double clicking the search result You have the choice between transferring or creating ne
72. can be sensible to define different layout setting page size orientation In the field Active Design Area of the project properties define the visible area within the working area of the Designer A new area can be defined over the new button and then define its corresponding properties A condition has to be defined when the Layout setting is used e g Page 2 1 when it should be used only for page 1 The first area will be used for valid for the set conditions The default region Standard layout is always the last region and the condition is set to True The format of the region that includes the condition Lastpage should not vary from the page layout which will be used when the condition Lastpage is not true This is due to List amp Label not knowing at the start of a page if itis intended to be the last page hence cannot select a region with the condition Lastpage is true Only after completing the page the printer can be assigned to this region 226 Customizing print templates Should the page size or orientation change this can lead to a scale change or data being cut off Printer settings and page size By setting the properties it is possible to define for the region the printer settings paper size orientation copies duplex sort and paper bin e g first page on paper with company header following pages on standard paper Force Paper Size If no printer definition file exists and this option is se
73. can open a single appointment by double clicking the required task appointment in this dialog Note Please note that not all functions of the integrated task manager are available in external programs For example when displaying all appointments for the current record only the current users records will be displayed Hints on using Outlook as appointment manager When displaying all appointments for the current record not all properties of the tasks appointments are displayed in the list Double click the required element to see all properties 110 Link to external task and appointment manager Hints on using Tobit David as appointment manager New tasks and appointments are saved with default values at creation If you want to discard the task or appointment it is not sufficient to just close the window without saving You need to delete the element explicitly in the corresponding archive When displaying all appointments for the current record not all properties of the tasks appointments are displayed in the list Double click the required elementto see all properties The menu commands Task List Appointment List and Show Appointments Tasks simply change to the current view in David InfoCenter It is not possible to explicitly force a task or appointment overview Hints on using IBM Lotus Notes as task and appointment manager The link is based on the standard Mail data base of Lotus Notes The following standard Views of Lo
74. deleting and updating sss 191 14 5 Defining Codes core e ve Teg oe ei t eed Feuer ER 192 14 6 D pe che ck 2 i ecards do nas egere shoes ea aua deno ded 192 14 7 Function definitions esses 194 14 8 Automatic nUMbETING cece cee eee e eee eect m 194 Global and view specific counter configuration 194 Configuring a global counter 195 Creating view specific automatic counters sss 195 Necessary rights assignment 196 14 9 Auto l gica eia yi ndilerisdied e i ai Ean dde 197 14 10 Document management sssssssssssseseene nennen nennen nene 199 Type of document storage field types 199 Connect a DMS Document Management System sss 200 Create document Type ient eee tite eer a e ERE R EO aes 201 A tomatic e mallarchivIfigas cu t er A e dts 203 14 11 Document information cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeneeneenees 204 14 12 Record reference 35 5 5 1 5 rete HE M eR Ou een udo 205 Gen ralusz aset ect eet RU He mE 205 Linking to appointments amp tasks and phone calls phone manager 206 I E ECI IICUMP E 206 General configuration ccc ccc eeee cece eee eee sees eee 208 15 1 Settings for the program start sssssss ee 208 152 User Interface oo eet pea EEE 209 15 3 Configuring the sending of mail seen 210 Mall SEVICE srt etd nbn bate ee ttp ea esee dec ot bdo atas 210 15 4 Confi
75. design needs to be adapted A change of address has to be made only in one single project instead of different projects Using Project gt Include you can include existing projects in current projects The objects of these included projects will be visible but are locked against editing Also included are sum and user variables of the original project Please notice not to generate duplicate identifiers when designing e g including an existing project that is using a sum variable which is already used within the current project The sequence in which the projects are included can be defined here as well Working with User Variables To avoid having to re enter formulas that are required often it is possible to store them in user variables These are effectively formula building blocks User variables are labeled with lt Name gt e g User01 These are defined in Project gt User Variables E Edit User Variables Available user variables B x 4 Name Formula Companies Cou Cond not CompanylD Companies ID Country DE or IsNullOrEmpty Cc Companies ZIP_ Cond CompanylD Companies ID Country DE or IsNullOrEmpty Compar Companies Stree Cond IsNullOrEmpty CompanylD Companies ID ZIPPOBox or IsNullOrEmp GContacts Salutat Cond not IsNullOrEmpty Salutation Salutation SCond MailingAddress F Contacts Countr Cond not Country Private DE or Country Private HUpper Getlr GContacts ZIP Cit Cond C
76. ee FI0034 Autohaus Wiese Eichhomstr 5a BEDE 81377 M nchen o Y Fiter F10035 Touristinformation Bem Neubr ckstr 75 ECH 30 22 Bem o F10036 B robedarf Schr der GmbH Laubweidstr 67 MDE 78224 Singen o Gig Watch Results aoe iini asl aw lt gt E B Active Users Maj 49 49 Input form view Administrator SRVDB In the input form view all information is grouped by subject You can enter data into a record here With the input form designer you can design the input form of any view Further information can be found in chapter Input form designer Web View In the Web View you have the option to display websites or yourown HTML pages You can set a different page for each view The website to be displayed is set in the view configuration Further information can be found under General in chapter Configuration 49 Entering and editing data of views Report View In the Report view you can display a report preview Use the buttons on the toolbar you can scroll through the records here if you chose current record as Data The window contains a tool bar on the various functions of the preview can be controlled E combit Relationship Manager Medium English Companies o Start Filter Output Appointments Tasks Data Settings Window Report Global Search Aa fomno gt eo e ARAH One Report Forward x rs x e Previous Net gt 100 lq Print Export Export Save as Sendper Close Page Pag One Re
77. eee tenete 245 271 Symbol in taskbar sss 209 Email Autopilot e 254 Synchronization 153 165 EnGtyDEtlOT au cma 274 Database Server 165 EVODSu iere d t o ura 247 Field workers Branches 165 External access 274 Synchronous SCHIPtS esses 273 Integration of scripts ss 272 Syntex rules eem ttes 216 Languages per nes 272 System management 306 Scripts AIiSGEDLES citrate 272 Rights management 310 OOBEGC iccirco See Find User management s 306 Contains Search zie 76 System requirements 15 E mail 2 5 nette rs GlobBaliSearebi sore eet in Social Media sss Telephone number S6lectioncs e tette Serial ri mbDer iecit pr ctia Server side Workflows Setup etatis A eos Ss Share PONT sette ien Sigri digitally e 144 145 Teleph Nye ain 120 Single letter See Output Appointment sss 104 SKYDGt act ore aequi 19 CallliStazzi SAO Md 120 SMS Configuration 123 Appointment 104 Conversation log 121 346 Customizations Synneren a 28 Dialing automatically 20 FUllCtlODSa ott e e tt ees 20 Logging calls sss 27 Number recognition 26 Powerdialing sss 23 Print phone list ssse 22 Protocol 23 d e meta 26 Sending an SMS ssas 28 Text blocks 60 287 Text objects sss 292 Thunderbird erallarclylVe
78. entry After confirming the language setting the program guides you through the uninstallation of all components in the combit Relationship Manager client to be removed 1 8 WebAccess installation In this chapter you will find information on setting up the web server and creating a Solution for accessing the cRM via browser CRM WebAccess Note This function requires either the Professional or Enterprise Edition Notes In the IIS manager in Web Service Extensions the extension ASP NET v must be allowed The SSL encryption is supported Please note All of the content sent over SSL is not cached The encryption of request and response means extra load on the server 28 WebAccess installation Encrypted content is greater than the original content and thus requires more bandwidth Also a port other than the default http port is supported To open a project by WebAccess the corresponding user right Open project per WebAccess is required Please note that Auto Logs with Prompt active are NOT triggered in WebAccess Remark fields with text content greater than 4 MB can only be displayed but not changed or saved After the changes you should empty the browser cache and possibly also empty the cache in IIS Open Internet Information Manager gt Select Application Pools gt Stop and restart Features WebAccess Following features of the Windows client are supported List view Form view limited applying qui
79. file are available in the field selection Properties In the Properties tab you can open a selection dialog with the Select file button and set the desired picture file if you have inserted the graphics object as fixed file Many formats can be used for this If a field of your view was placed as a picture object however the picture will be defined by the field s content and cannot be selected here With the option Keep proportions you can set that the original proportions of width to height of the picture remain constant If the option Keep proportions is turned off the inserted picture will adjust to fit the aspect ratio of the picture object In the Program tab you can set which program is opened from this object field with the Program button This function can only be selected if the picture was inserted as a field If it was places as a fixed file the function is hidden Further information about running external programs can be found later in this chapter Grouping Grouping or group objects consist of a rectangular frame or area which can contain text in the top left corner They have the main purpose of visually grouping associated fields in the input form Grouping objects can also be used as background surfaces onto which other objects are placed In the field selection all fields in the active view are available for the grouping object When working with grouping objects the display order is important see
80. fixed length with a maximum length of 10485760 characters Character data of variable length with up to 8000 characters Character data of variable length with up to 10485760 characters Character data of variable length with up to 2 31 1 characters Unicode data of fixed length with a maximum length of 4000 characters Unicode data of variable length with a maximum length of 4000 characters Unicode data of variable length with a maximum length of 2 30 1 characters Binary data of fixed length with a maximum length of 8000 bytes Binary data of variable length with a maximum length of 8000 337 Appendix Category 338 Data type Data type MS SQL PostgreSQL image sql_variant uniqueidentifier bool boolean Description bytes Image data Can be used in functions and supports values and other data types A globally unique identifier GUID True or false or unknown if NULL 22 Index OGIXPPIDIRBS 6 etit eite 273 SoPRJDIRSO ict tte 273 QU SOR c ER REGE 230 A Active Directory 307 Activity management 112 Add to systray sss 209 Add on David add on minacan 115 Thunderbird add on 115 Address enrichment sss 74 address manager 35 address pick up 62 Address visualization 150 Addresses Transferen Sen ee A 62 Alphabetic Filter sss 48 Android cue uror dat 16 110 AC
81. gt DMS Login for the currently logged in user You can also set the login information directly in the user administration For more information see the chapter User and rights management Define a field of type DMS Document Open the view configuration of the document view e g Activities and switch to the tab Fields Select a field from the external field type Character and define the internal field type DMS Document In this field the path of the archive is stored so a field size of at least 255 should be defined for this field Configure document info The document information contained in documents such as modification date title or subject can be viewed in the input form For this you must have defined the appropriate fields in your view to be able to store this information On the tab Document Info in the view configuration you can define the link between document property and field see the section Document information Specify the archive path On the tab Document Management in the view configuration you define the desired archive path in the DMS in the field File Path for each document type see the following section Defined indexing For certain DMS indexing is available In the tab Document Management in the view properties you can define the available fields for every document type by using the button DMS Indexing if supported For information on the supported DMS see the chapter Preparation and I
82. gt Ifyou want to customize an existing template select it Tip Various examples of templates are included in the package which you can adjust to your needs gt Ifyou wish to create a new template enter a name for it in the file name field and select Open The different output formats have different file extensions Ibl label crd file card letter Ist list Dateiname Contacts Address label 1x7 endles v Labels IbI v ffnen Abbrechen gt The List amp Label Designer is opened and you can make the desired changes to the template 225 General configuration Page layout If you create a new template the project wizard will open after the above steps for the creation of a new print template This will lead you through the required settings step by step If you have used an existing file as a template select Project gt Page Setup for the composition of the page layout Regions Export Media Templates B x Be 8j cna Standard Layout E eoo ei Description Lastpage 4 Layout gt Layout Definition 209 97 mm x 296 96 mm 4 Printer Settings Printer Name HP LaserJet P2055dn UPD PCL 6 4 Paper Size A4 210 00 mm x 297 00 mm Orientation Portrait Duplex Use Printer Setting Force Paper Size Yes Number of Copies 1 Paper Bin Default Size Adjustment Keep Scale Condition The first region with a matching condition will be used at print time For multi page projects it
83. gt Transfer Template gt Edit Settings gt Transfer Template gt Select Settings gt Input Form Settings gt Input Form WebAccess Settings gt View Record gt Dia Find gt Route Planning gt Get Directions to Current Record Find gt Route Planning gt Remove All Waypoints Find gt Route Planning gt Route Planning Find gt Route Planning gt Set All Records in Filter as Waypoints Find gt Route Planning gt Set Current Record as Endpoint Find gt Route Planning gt Set Current Record as Starting Point Find gt Route Planning gt Set Current Record as Stopover Tools gt nn Application Script Workflow Tools gt Script gt Execute Tools gt Workflow gt Execute Find Find Find Find Find Record Record Record Record Record gt Rep gt gt gt V Record gt Send E mail Filter gt Last Filter Filter gt General Find gt Find gt Current Record in Online Directories gt Phone Directory gt Find Current Record gt Phone Directory gt Transfer Manually gt Quickfind ace Find gt Phone Number or E mail Edit Edit in New Window New Duplicate Delete 331 Appendix ar ar ar ar ar ar ar ar ar ar Nn co OC DHA HHA Oo CO Oo CO ar gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Record gt Delete gt Delete All Record gt Extended gt Merge Records
84. i Record Filter Organize Output View Settings 5 Info Center iq msl ea omaan Pe lt etended gt All Appointments All Tasks 3 GI Appointments Tasks 4 Aap 4 201 cats 18 22 April 2011 m Views MTWTFSS Companies 18 Montag 19 Dienstag 20 Mittwoch n Donnerstag 22 Freitag aa 2 3 12 3 Cp Activities f SalesOpportunities 97 1s 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 P Campaigns 1618 19 Hy 22 23 24 D Pares 25 26 27 28 25 36 6 8 ProductAssignment 0899 17 E EF SalesDocuments 30 182 3 H A Projects exu T 6 Products 4 Others 5 er C x zx re Completion Project C 00 Meeting Marketing Presentation Product i x B Luna Aventuras Jean Soleil 3 E 169 qp Favorites 3 i nam TE uu Instant Reports Nf Filter i Watch Results 19_ 30 ec re BR Active Users Appointments 12 Tasks 2 29042011 1530 Administrator COMBITSQLEXPRESS i 6 1 Scheduling appointments and tasks Appointments are activities scheduled in your calendar to which other contacts are invited or for which resources are reserved You can schedule reoccurring appointments display appointments according to day week or month and set reminders for appointments Tasks are considered long term occurrences As opposed to an appointment a task entails a start date as well as due date and a status is indicated 101 Appointmentand task management Creating appointment or task You have different options for creating tasks appointments Righ
85. in chapter Configuration of views f Activities ss SalesOpportunities E Sales he Sales Documents e Products HE Campaigns HA Complaints HE Projects il Relations 3l Additional Y al records By x DateTime DirectonType Duration Comment Pmony Document a 12 05 2010 14 30 00 Jubilumsangebot Aschenbahn 12 05 2010 14 25 00 Sommer Special 06 032010 11 45 43 3 Nicht erreicht a a 15 04 2010 15 36 10 f 20 Nachgehakt wegen Angebot zu Produkt Z 13 04 2010 10 25 12 A 15 Hatte Fragen zu Produkt Z EI 21 02 2010 11 23 01 e 15 Woltte wissen ob es Produkt X auch in Englisch gibt 2 gt The easiest and at the same time most efficient way to insert containers is by drag amp drop from the variable list Simply select the desired variable and drag it to an empty section of the work area You define the properties via the context menu gt By clicking on the button Filter a combo box can be positioned over the container to filter the records in the container For more information see section Button gt You can place the same container a maximum of two times on different tabs It is not possible to place it on the input form basic and a tab at the same time 301 Input form designer Button Buttons can be linked with almost any function In the field selection for the button object type you can see a selection of the available functions that can be linked with a user defined
86. in the example a content link can fill in one or more associated fields using the contents of another field Content links are available for the field types Edit Control Combobox and Checkbox They are not limited to a link between two fields a field can be assigned many content links They also have the ability to link several fields after another i e field1 gt field2 gt field3 etc Content links are useful for the form of address like in the previous example For this you define a content link from the field Salutation to the field SalutationLetter and set up an If Then content link ftitle empty then form of address Dear Sir Madam f title Mrs then form of address Dear Mrs f you now enter Mrs as the title the corresponding form of address is entered in the corresponding field You can create as many of these links as necessary They are defined in the input form designer Further information regarding this can be found in the corresponding chapter 59 Entering and editing data Working with comboboxes Comboboxes are particularly useful for fields for which there are usually only a set of possible entries One example for this would be titles Mr Mrs etc which are kept in their own field If the combobox contains editable text an automatic completion mechanism helps to speed up data entry While you are typing the first fitting item in the combobox is searched
87. is displayed in dialog units rather than pixels The value in front of the comma is the distance from the left edge of the workspace and the value after the comma is the distance from the top edge of the workspace In the right section of the status bar you will find further information regarding the selected objects From left to right you will find the object type object name object coordinates and object size If several objects are selected you will be shown the number of selected objects as well as the coordinates and the size of the frame that surrounds the objects 19 3 Tabs Use several tabs to keep a better overview of your input form You can create a tab for master data and e g one for sales and one for contacts The Main tabbed pages are managed in the tool window Tabs Each main tab can also contain objects of the type Tabbed pages All fields and buttons whose functions are to be independent of the individual tabs e g the master data can be positioned outside of the tabs entry Input form in the tool window Tabs Objects of the type Tab can also be positioned outside of the main tabs Define Main tab Before you define the individual tabs for the input form and fill these with fields you should decide on the general layout size and position of the tabs of the input form on the screen The screen area available for the input form corresponds to the workspace available in the input form designer G
88. isset rem the t tortis 317 Base address ijinenn arnai 84 Blackberry ii Lec to ets 16 110 Index ACCESS s i ote esie tenue ER eens 30 Bookmarks etm 222 BUttOES c ete vaca 302 C Calculating in fields ss 289 GCampalgpis i desee 132 211 Cascaded deleting 191 Change position ss 283 284 ClhidrtS si o acte datis 148 149 Check for updates sss 34 CHECKBOXES ii ee dux 298 CHOOSING cocotte na See Filter Clienit GXe acreage 24 Codes DENN asientos 192 GOIDIE UD Wizard seeren 47 Comboboxes sss 60 295 Company master data 181 Configuration Appointments and tasks 08 Clock ede ape eee 208 GColu rn titles oz 44 CONTAING hee is ac eee tes 42 Create fields tes 81 Create table sssssssssss 81 Database structure s 81 Document management 199 Field alias mes 186 Field types ees 181 186 Filescardsza stet dana Stele ness 234 Function definitions 94 Generalis etna erit 209 In pt TOF ieee eas 275 list vi Lis N rnbering see ee 194 Projects ee rrt rere 173 Record reference 206 FUbbOicss e dtm tas 45 Sending riall n e 210 340 SMTP ii ttt ttes 211 Symbol in taskbar 209 System management 306 Telephony sss 123 Transfer record sessies 136 Transfer temp
89. may have around 20 to 40 lines of instructions This is one reason why script languages are usually very easy to learn Although very similar on the surface there are many important differences between scripts and executable programs Scripts are not capable of running on their own but always require an environment to run in These hosts are responsible for managing the scripts and often extend the possibilities of the language in the form of additional objects In our case cRM is the host an extension is made through its object model Another important difference is the missing possibility of implementing dialogs yourself For this external objects are required 18 1 Support for scripting functionalities The possibilities of the scripting technology are very far reaching and their description could easily fill its own book We therefore hope you understand that we cannot offer a description of the script languages Books on these can be bought from many large specialist publishers 271 Scripts and programming reference Microsoft offers a detailed reference on VBScript and Jscript in the internet http msdn microsoft com scripting Individual questions can be exchanged on one of the many Microsoft newsgroups news msnews microsoft com Of course we want to help and support you with your questions and requests to allow you to use our product to its full potential however we hope for your understanding that we can only respond
90. meaningful name This name will also be displayed in the properties dialogs Activated Specify whether the workflow is activated If it is not activated it will not be executed Basic class Specifies the basic class of the workflow This can not be changed Description Description for the workflow Session This information is necessary to be able to access the COM object No changes can be made at this point G2 El Activity Name Newsletter Activated True Base Class combit cRM Workflow Client Workflow Description E Misc Session 3 combit cRM COM cRMApplication Variables 3 Collection Name Please specify name of the activity used to generate associated type Variables You can define global variables that are available in the overall workflow These global variables can be used to temporarily park values that change and are to be used in the workflow later To connect these workflow variables to the result of an activity click directly on the yellow database symbol in the properties list Validity check The Workflow Designer tries to check the validity and marks errors and missing values with a red circle with an exclamation mark to the corresponding activity However no syntax check is performed in other words the correct spelling or the existence of a field name for example is not checked 262 cRM Workflow Q Y ov c oe Please set a value for the property E mail template
91. menu items dialogs messages manuals online helps etc is completely localized The provided standard solution is available both in English and in German combit cRM Solution EN and combit cRM Solution DE which are based on the same database You can open the desired one by executing File gt Open Note Individually customized toolbars and menu layouts will be reset when you change the language as their texts menu items and tooltips are language dependent Instances of add ins conduits and the address pickup which are already running will have to be restarted If you prefer a mixed language solution German and English at the same time for different clients we recommend to use two solutions within separate project directories which are based on the same database Thus they can have localized view names formulas filter expressions statistics and code attributes etc As field names use the field alias for the physical name in the database table however a common shared naming must be found Reactivate messages The program supports you in many activities with notices containing hints and tips You always have the option of deactivating each notice for the future If you wish to reactivate all notices select File gt Options gt General gt Settings and press the button Reactivate messages Minimize window when closing to the info area of the task bar When this option is activated the application is not ended when Cl
92. object With the button Default you can use one of the options set under Object gt Defaults With 3 D Text you can set the display type If the option like dialog is turned on the background of the object will take on the color of the tab In this case you can set a special background color Autotext With the Autotext function you can define text blocks for every input field If you enter a key the respective autotext is automatically entered During data entry your typing can be limited to a few keys Tip Autotext can also contain formulas With these you have many options to automate the data entry e g for the automatic entry of username and date in the comments field Autotext can also be used for automatic typo correction enter a usual typo as the key if you even make mistakes and as text for the text block enter the correct spelling To set autotext carry out the following steps gt Inthe window Autotext you will find a double list with Replace With items in which the defined text blocks are displayed The cursor automatically jumps to the Replace input field under the list in which you first enter the key for the text block Next enter the text block in the With input field which is to be inserted automatically when the key is entered If you want to enter a formula click on the corresponding button to the right of the input field If you select an item in the autotext list e g by clicking i
93. or select Window gt Info Center Internet Explorer version 6 or above is required to display the Info Center The path to this HTML file can be defined under File gt Information gt Properties gt Settings Further information can be found in chapter Configuration of projects 40 Customizing the user interface 2 5 Customizing the user interface You can change certain elements of the user interface to better fit your working style Customizing program windows These customizations are independent of the views that are open Display of windows To show hide the navigation select Windows gt Navigation To show hide the window displaying dupes select Windows gt Dupes The tabs can be placed at the top bottom left or right through the context menu To change the display order of the views drag the corresponding tab to the desired location by holding the left mouse button Through Windows gt Close All you can close all windows Through Windows windows all open views are shown You can select which view to bring to the front here Auto Hide The global windows navigation and dupes can be hidden automatically in the background so you can use the entire main window Click in the title of the win dow on the button Auto Hide Project aX If you liked to let the window indicate again move the mouse over the appropriate switching surface at the lefthand side of the main window Docking and Floati
94. or tasks select Output then the desired format You can define how the lists and file cards should look under Settings gt Print gt File Cards More information can be found in the additional documentation List amp Label Designer Manual 6 2 Navigation in the calendar Changing the number of days displayed In the day view or week view the separating line between the right and left areas can be moved as desired Depending on the width of the right hand area and the monitor one or two months will be displayed in the top right Select Day View Working week view Week View Month View or Appointment Tasklist from the toolbar 106 Navigation in the calendar To sort the appointment or task list by certain criteria left click on the corresponding column title For every appointment some symbols are displayed that give more information Sort appointments and tasks If you have not yet configured any sort criteria select Settings gt Sort Orders gt Appointments orTasks gt With New create a new sort criterion First give it a sensible name and then select the field from the list by which to sort By clicking the Direction column you can set whether the sort order is to be ascending or descending gt If you wish to sort by several fields you can add more fields with the New button gt After pressing OK you will be taken back to the dialog with the overview of the sort criteria If you now si
95. pgAdmin of PostgreSQL To create a new database right click on Databases in the Object Explorer of the SOL Server and select New database from the context menu Enter a new name in the field Database name that is not used yet e g combit MyCompany To copy an existing database you also need a database configuration tool Further information about copying a database can be found in paragraph Copy Project in this chapter In the following dialog MS SOL Server only you can select how to proceed Predefine views automatically based on the existing structure of the database For all existing database tables views are created and possible constraints are converted to relations This function is of use if you transfer the database of another application Project import Transfer views from another project Starts the assistant for the project import See the next paragraph Create views manually 13 7 Project import Go to File gt Information gt Project Import to import views instant reports filters sort orders input forms events and so on from another project Certain corrections might be necessary e g creating relations in the linked views or several settings on the database server constraints special indices etc 2j Import Project Import project This assistant helps you to import views sort orders filter expression and the like from another project Please no
96. recognition Requirement is at least one installed TAPI device in the operating system which is normally a phone but can also be an ISDN card with TAPI drivers These devices are installed under Control Panel Phone and Modem Options in your operating system or with the drivers belonging to the modem phone Setting up a dialing unit If the dialing unit can be communicated with one or more windows are displayed for configuration The settings depend on the dialing unit type and can therefore not be described in detail Please follow the instructions on screen and look at the dialing unit s documentation if necessary Configuring the telephone Select File gt Options gt Telephony System for settings if your device is connected to a telephony system Switch Settings EJ If your dial device is connected to a telephony system you should answer following questions Telephony system II mostly empty must only be specified when using huge telephony syste internal number prefix i Character that should precede the number Maximal length of internal numbers 2 Digits Numbers consisting of maximal the entered digits or beginning with the selected prefix are regarded as internal Prefix for outward line Hl Prefix for internal numbers o Settings for incomings calls at telephony systems suppress internal calls complement number by telephony system ID if available External calls gt telephony systems
97. selection of records i e all filtered records are removed from the filter while all records not contained in the filter are added Note that fields with no content NULL value are not automatically included in the inverted filter and will therefore not appear in the filter automatically 5 9 Transfer to phone manager Select Data gt Transfer Filter to phone manager to transfer all records in the active filter to the call list 5 10 Filtering all records of a relationally linked view The function Last Filter can also be usedto selectall records of a relationally linked view that are assigned to the current record With this you can for example select all addresses assigned to a project in order to send a mail merge to them 97 Filtering Records Selection gt In a view double click an entry in a relational container e g in the view Projects double click an item in the table Participants gt The record will be displayed in a separate view At this time a filter is automatically added to all the records previously shown in the container gt Select this filter with Filter gt Last Filter gt All records are selected that were originally shown in the container 5 11 Manual filter A manual filter allows the selection of single records for which there is no common attribute Single records are explicitly included in or excluded from the manual filter with a checkbox in the first column of the list view All funct
98. similar also with other top level domains such as meier combit com Finds all e mail addresses with the same domain as long as it is not a domain of an e mail provider gmail t online etc such as info combit de Finds all e mail addresses with the same domain as long as it is not a domain of an e mail provider gmail t online etc incl other top level domains such as schmidt combit net A fuzzy search for a telephone number also finds numbers of telephone extensions since it is cut off up to 4 places from the right in order to find a match A search for the telephone number 07531 906010 also finds for example 07531 906020 and 07531 90601234 v Find Phone Number E mail x Search type C Find phone number Alt 1 Find E mail address Alt 2 Search criteria miller combit net v ivi Itipl Its then switch to list view e This fuzzy find also finds numbers from extensions or E mail addresses of the same domain if there is no direct hit Start Special Find opens the corresponding search dialog Select the search type and enter the search criteria Enter exceptions for a fuzzy match search or general e mail domains by clicking the button 4 2 Searching in relations In the selection list for 1 1 relations there is also a search option so that you can link contacts companies and projects quickly and easily 79 Searching for records
99. tasks 109 GrOUpWOal6 edita eei 239 OUTPUT starter trate t etiem 36 CUSTOMIZE ated 225 Envelope eee eet n ee 38 Fileseard z ud ent M ned 139 Formats PDF Excel 144 Labels teur 38 LISTS ee eee A s 139 234 Mail merge 140 231 Mail merge word processor 45 PreVIGW ascen ct epe 42 Print optlonsi e 141 144 REPOS dinna eh unn 139 Sigridigitally u eer tetas tt 145 Single letter 136 140 231 Transfer record s s s 136 P POS boxditectofy ure 61 ParentRecordDescription 202 PasSWOEQ nct rep 309 AdtrmilllSttatOriss ee rr 307 PDE f rmatan di ead ian 144 Phone directories 82 Address enrichment 74 Seal CD uns itte rst tt 83 Settligssiii dece ee d 82 Phone manager See Telephony Phonetic Tind ucc tem 77 PICK UP uices See address pick up Picture objects ssssssssssss 299 Porting with cRMsShip 175 Position dialog teen 284 Postcode directory s s s 61 PostgnesQli Jes 15 Powerdialing sss 123 Prin Instant reports 47 RE DOM S ace pei reto rase 47 PEEL ac iR RE e up id 38 FOLITiatSz ciet e mS dod des 44 Prilit ODHOHS s e 41 Index Project Attach database 0 0 0 ec 175 Company master data 181 Configuration 173 ChE ALOR r e A 178 DiStribUtiI nz genenana 175 Include s e 229 INaVIga
100. that they will later be printed workflow 235 General configuration Report structure x 85 4 Report Container FE Crosstab Contacts 4 5 Table Persons Company Name E Table Contacts Persons ID Contacts PersonID Jit Chart ContactTypes Objects Report struc Preview To insert the report container select Objects gt Insert gt Report Container Tables charts and crosstabs can be inserted in any order also as sub elements of tables In this way sub reports with almost any relation between tables can be defined To edit the report structure a toolbar is available Table chart and crosstab objects are inserted into the project using buttons in this toolbar Using the buttons in the tool window you can also attach a new sub element delete cut copy paste elements and change the sequence of the elements of the same hierarchical level Inserting a new element gt Select the button Add an element or Add a sub element gt In the following dialog choose the object type that you want to insert into the report container Table Crosstab or Chart gt Inthe following dialog choose the Source Table Path a Choose Source Table Path Please choose the source table here Free content 4 Companies Base table 4 Contacts Companies ID Contacts CompanylD Activities Contacts ID Activities ContactlD CampaignAssignment Contacts ID CampaignAssignment Con Complaints Contacts ID Complaints
101. the chapter General configuration fyou want to save a project under a different name select File gt Save as Tostart a new project select File gt New The structure of the database tables of the basic SQL database must correspond to the structure of the views Via File Information gt Reorganize all of the configuration files belonging to the project are released from old no long necessary entries This accelerates the opening of the views Please note When replicating the synchronization of the project configuration settings is not supported e g activated code field entries new code field entries navigation structure project filter 13 2 Separate data sets The cRM supports a mandatory oriented data storage that means you can manage multiple mandates e g customers or company departments without giving them an insight of each others data According to the requirements different scenarios are possible 1 Completely separated data Separated solutions with shared database Mandator assignment by field and access control by project and record rights Completely separated customer data by separared solutions with different tables in the same database Lookup tables like DirectionTypes etc can be shared 2 Shared customer data 173 Configuration of projects 3 Separated solutions with shared database Mandator assignment by field and access control by project and record rights A share
102. the phone manager is active and number recognition is turned on Setting up number recognition and logging gt Toactivate numberrecognition select File gt Information gt Properties gt Settings and then activate both views for which number recognition is to be activated in the Telephony area The view selected under 1 is searched through by the view selected in 2 126 Search for records on incoming calls Project Settings EJ Properties Settings General Code description for print and export Code description for transfer and e mail templates Info Center cRM Project Path InfoCentenindex html ya Telephony Activate incoming call detection for following views 1 Contacts v 2 Companies v Document Management System Integrated document management v Select File gt Options gt Incoming Call Detection in the phone manager ribbon and activate the option Identification of incoming calls Detection of Incoming Calls Ea MSN selection desired MSN f If you want incoming calls being only processed if a specific number MSN has been called then enter this number here If you leave this field empty then every call will be processed Clock synchronization only for CAPI Synchronize PC s clock to the ISDN time if available Incoming call Identification of incoming calls if possible Incoming calls in absence will be added to call list
103. the word processor The direct print is therefore especially suitable for standardized outputs such as standard and mail merge letters since the contents cannot generally be changed after the selection of the print template exception interactive user input with the AskString field function The advantage of the word processor lies mainly the more extensive formatting options and the option of reworking individual letters Further information can be found in chapter Printing a mail merge letter with the word processor Through the menuitem Output gt Print Letter you can print a standard letter for the active record e g product information catalogue request gt Select Output gt Print Letter gt Choose the print template for the single letter file ending crd Print templates can normally be found in the Print templates folder in the project directory Define the print settings see chapter Output Settings gt Click on Start Through Output gt Print Multiple Letters you can print a mail merge letter for all records in the active filter If no filter is active all records are printed The print order of the records corresponds to the currently active sort order gt Create a filter with Filter gt Select Output gt Print Multiple Letters gt Choose the print template for the mail merge letter Print templates can normally be found in the Print templates folder in the project directory Def
104. them may not be seen by the user Limits when working with field rights 316 Sort orders do not respect viewing rights i e you can sort by columns whose contents cannot be seen The phone number recognition does not respect field rights but this is not relevant in practice for incoming calls because the number is already being displayed The general filter and free SOL queries do not respect field rights i e in theory with a corresponding WHERE query it would be possible to guess field contents without viewing rights The field contents are of course not displayed If these are critical records the rights Edit direct SQL query and Edit filter expressions directly can be taken away from the user Predefined SOL queries and filtering generally are still possible but no query can be created with which the field contents can be guessed If no editing rights exist for the field in which an auto protocol is to write or if the option Append was selected but not viewing rights exist for the field the auto protocol is not created and an error message is displayed This error message can be avoided e g with a condition in a formula an empty content is created for this field This can be done with a formula which only creates an entry if the user is a member of a certain group e g users Cond Contains CRM User Groups Users Action TemplateDescription Support 21 Appendix 21 1 Support You can reach th
105. to define for example relationships of customers to cRM users or to print out users and their rights On the database server side you must have the right to generate database views on the database Note Under PostgreSQL the database views have access to the combit system database via DBLINK Project properties Settings Select the Settings tab for further project configuration If the option Code description for print and export is activated the descriptions are output in clear text such as Christmas card during printing and text export If the option is not selected the code number will be output instead of the description for example 0010101 In addition here you can later set for which views contained in the project the Call detection should be active In the section Document management system DMS you have the option of managing the files of the document manager in cRM through a DMS With this the files are saved as references in a file archived in the DMS Select the corresponding Document Management System Requirements see System Requirements Further information regarding connection see Document management in chapter Configuration of views Project Settings EJ Properties Settings General V Code description for print and export Code description for transfer and e mail templates nfo Center cRM Project Path InfoCentenindex html ya Telephony Activate incoming call detectio
106. to undertake data synchronization The different forms of synchronization are described here Synchronization with applications databases text files Excel files Outlook contacts etc A database or cRM view acts as source and normally remains unchanged Synchronization with Outlook contacts The synchronization is carried out in the form of an export with an automatic import afterwards Synchronization with smartphones through Outlook or import export 12 1 Replication For the synchronization of databases use the replication mechanisms provided in the database system Example A sales representative is taking a part of the central database on his travel While he is visiting the customers he is working with the data is correcting addresses and is entering new notes In the headquarters it also will meanwhile be worked with the data After the return of the sales representative both databases should be synchronized In this way a freely configurable and powerful synchronization is possible For more information about replication with MS SQL Server see our Knowledge Base at http support combit net in the article Replikation mit SOL Server german only and the documentation of the database system used Please note When replicating the synchronization of the project configuration settings is not supported e g activated code field entries new code field entries navigation structure project filter 153 Impor
107. v C E mail client is Mozilla Thunderbird Multiple e mails wait aft 0 amp mail s 0 second s Specifies after how many e mails and for which time the sending of multiple e mails should be paused 0 for no pause 2 OK Cancel Configuring SMTP gt With the button SMTP settings you will open the mail setting dialog gt Inthe SMTP Server tab enter the URL or IP address of your SMTP server gt In the SMTP user options enter your usual user and sender data Usually you can transfer the data from the corresponding configuration dialogs of your e mail program gt Ifyou have set the option POP3 authentication required under SMTP server you must enter the data for the POPS server and the corresponding POPS user data in the last two tabs Option Mail per context menu by You can send e mails to the corresponding address using the context menu of the e mail field types You have the following options MAPI mail client e mails are always sent through your default MAPI client e g Outlook ntegrated mail editor Use the mail templates see Working with e mail templates or standard e mails in chapter E mail 211 General configuration Mail client registered to mailto as MAPI mail client but the CRM window continues to use and Outlook automatically uses the default template with signature etc Option E Mail client is Mozilla Thunderbird When using Mozilla Thunderbird as MAPI cli
108. vaa a 28 Uninstall eret us Ae eet rero eer ee ef ioo oo rete n en qr edet 28 Uninstall client 1 8 WebAccess installation esses mme 28 Features WebACCGSS s ture a de t de ERROR T EODD OT 29 WebAccess installation essent 29 Access of CRM WebAccess on a solution sss 30 Create a solution for WEDACCESS sssssssssssseeeeeneeeeee nenne 30 1 9 License amp License extension cccceceeceeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 33 1 10 Online registration essen mmn 34 1 11 Check for Updates ysis cries ed n Tee tee ee cere da tema odi ce e Ee e 34 1 12 Migration from combit address manager sseeee 35 Getting started ec og oe vero ER ux E TNNT EE NEP EERREYS 37 2 4 serint rfaceZ uU RCRUM HE 37 2 2 RIDDOMY ore exped ia reei dete ser ED E EROR Raed AXE EROS C ter CHR 37 General te a D ERE OE E Ola aen etn en 38 Context Sensitive RIDBOnS ice ettet tenti dei dns 38 Minimizing the Ribbon eerie edes 39 2 3 NavigatioD sce eose keedan t eoe RR a ERUNT aaa 39 2 4 Info Genter iore Te eee ot re rud aede d beiee rene ens eda ive 40 2 5 Customizing the user interface ssssssssssne nne 41 Customizing program windoOws ssssssssssssseeeeeeeeennnen n 41 Customizing the list view and container view 42 Customizing rIBDOn us cero acne ee e t E OG PEE Re ed 45 2 6 Sources of help eue ote ooo ete oT ERAN e
109. very occasionally occur that a number is created twice The stored procedure is if not available installed when creating a new automatic counter File gt Information gt Auto Counter For this CREATE PROCEDURE rights for the active cRM user are required 14 9 Auto log With this function you can automatically log a variety of processes Available are the transfer of a record to another application print e mail saving export enrichment appointment and call processes With the New button you create a new auto protocol gt Click in the Action column to select the process to be logged The actions Data transfer Print E mail Save Export Enrich Appointment and Phone call are available An auto log is only executed for output on printer PDF RTF XPS and TTY Printing e g on the preview therefore does not execute an auto log The multiple print of a list also does not execute an auto log due to the lack of personalization When printing exporting multiple times within the report view the auto log is only executed once No auto logs are executed for detail reports of a Drilldown report Only for the main report gt Inthe column Target View select in which view the entry is to be made Note If you select a different view from the current one a new record is always created in this view e g a contact entry in the Contacts view gt To activate the auto log activate the checkbox Acti
110. which columns are visible in the list view or container To mark several columns at once hold down the CTRL key while making your selections Through the two buttons in the middle the fields can be transferred into the opposing list E Settings ES Columns Appearance Options Preview Title Title Title Visible Hidden Feld Fed Fed Symbol ID Field Field Field KundenNr Firma3 Field Field Field Firma MatchCode Field Field Field Firma2 KomPraferenz Stra e IMProvider te uw Dre Land IM Field Field Field PLZ Facebook Field Field Field Ort Twitter PostfachPLZ XING ret Fe pied Postfach VKGebiet Fed ee ped Telefon Branchel Field Field Field Telefax Branche2 Field Field Field eMail Gesch ftsbeziehung Field Field Field Internet Leadquelle Kontaktart Bemerkung Field Field Field ABC Kategorie Field Field Fied Y Geschaftsbeziehung Bonit tAnfrageDatum Field Field Field UmsatzSoll Bonit tinfoDatum Betreuer Bonitatindex AL AL LL BonitatLimit Field Field Field BonitatKapital Field Field Field Bonit tUmsatzlahr Field Field Field v Bonit tZahlungsverhalten Fictt Fiai Fictt lt gt lt tt Cancel 42 Customizing the user interface By default only the columns contained in the view are displayed and no fields of relationally linked views In addition the column arrangement can be configured through the arrow buttons Column arrangement can also be carried out directly with the mouse by cli
111. 1 day today s and yesterday s records are displayed 212 Sound For 2 days today s yesterday s and the day before yesterday s records are displayed etc The length of stay sets the time after which the record is automatically recorded in the history O to turn this off gt With the button delete history the history can be deleted The changes become visible when the dialog is closed 15 5 Sound To configure the audio signals select File gt Options gt Sounds In this dialog you can assign sounds to program events e g Reminder or Dupe Found 15 6 Using the formula editor Fixed text variables formulas and functions can all be inserted and combined via the same dialog This dialog contains an assistant who supports you in selecting the correct syntax provides explanations and help Note This is only a small introduction to this subject More detailed information can be found in the additional documentation List amp Label Designer All options and functions are described in detail there Inserting variables The variables are placeholders which will later be filled from the application when configuring projects The value type String Text Number Date Boolean logical values Drawing RTF and Barcode is important as soon as you want to use variables as parameters in functions because usually only certain value types can be used as parameters You can for example only multiply a num
112. 3 Publisher E Outlook t4 PDF E RTF H Shipment w Word E WordPro E WordStar C vee Delete 8 Export to Microsoft Excel Back Next Cancel You will see these formats listed in the export wizard among which are the following options Direct export to Excel Word Outlook OpenOffice XML With Datasources ODBC the export to data sources for which an ODBC driver is installed is possible e g SOL Server Oracle Sybase SOL Access When exporting text files fixed or variable column widths you can define the format which columns as well as column and row separators yourself Pre defined text formats for the export to shipping software such as EASY LOG UPS OnLine WorldShip etc Select the desired export format or the application and confirm with Next gt Special case text file Under Text you have the possibility of exporting your data in a universally useable text format If you select this format several dialogs will follow in which you can set up the format of the text file very flexibly The following parameters are configurable columns separators column frames row separators date format field sequence and separators decimal point or comma character set ANSI ASCII Unicode or HTML 3 2 with or without header 1 62 Export of records Field selection and field linking In the same way as when importing the fields that are linked must be d
113. 512 MB Recommended 1 GB or more Operating System Microsoft Windows XP 8 Screen resolution 1024 x 768 or higher We recommend a color depth of 24 bit or higher for the display Microsoft Internet Explorer 8 Windows Installer Version 3 The version number of the latest browser version can change frequently combit tries to provide the required changes for new versions so that the latest version is supported however combit does not assure that 16 System Requirements The Workflow Designer requires the NET Framework 3 5 SP1 Microsoft Office Microsoft Office Version 2000 2013 32bit Edition Direct export to import from Excel requires Microsoft Excel Due to its functional limitations Excel Starter 2010 is not supported Alternatively use import export via ODBC or export via List amp Label via Output gt Mail merge Import of a single record or export via script to Word Starter 2010 or Excel Starter 2010 is only supported by Office Starter 2010 via the clipboard due its limited functionality External appointment and task planners For Tobit David Requires Tobit David 10 David fx12 For Microsoft Outlook Requires Microsoft Outlook 2000 2013 ForIBM Lotus Notes Requires IBM Lotus Notes Version 7 Message archiving Outlook Addin Requires MS Outlook Version 2000 2013 32bit Edition David Addln Requires Tobit David 10 David fx12 Thunderbird Addin Requires Thunderbird Vers
114. 9 and later WebAccess Server Windows Web Server 2003 2012 Windows 7 8 Requires Microsoft Internet Information Services IIS 6 8 1 GB hard drive space 15 Preparation and Installation Requires NET Framework 3 5 SP1 Requires printer driver Minimum requirements if the server is running on another server and related to the complexity of the combit reference solution and up to 10 concurrent users Processor Dual Core Processor 2 Ghz Memory 1 GB of RAM 20 MB of RAM per concurrent user We recommend that if the server is running on another server and related to the complexity of the combit Reference Solution and up to 30 simultaneous users Processor Quad Core Processor at least 2 GHz Memory 2 GB of RAM 50 MB of RAM per concurrent user Access to the WebAccess Supported Browser Chrome 26 Internet Explorer 8 10 Firefox 20 Safari 5 Active components ActiveX Flash are not required JavaScript and session cookies must be enabled Supported Smartphones Tables Operating systems Apple iPhone and iPad iOS 5 1 6 1 Android Smartphones and Tablets Android 2 3 3 4 2 2 Windows Phone 7 1 7 5 Blackberry Blackberry OS 7 10 Every operating system where before mentioned browsers are available Windows Client Processor type Pentium Ill compatible processor or higher Processor speed Minimum 1 MHz Recommended 2 GHz or more E Memory RAM Minimum
115. Append Relationally gt General Organize gt Enrich Records From Phone Directory Organize gt Modify Organize gt Export Organize gt Import Organize gt Synchronize Filter gt Transfer Filter to phone manager Filter gt Dupes Filter gt Execute Filter Expression Filter gt Free SOL Query Filter gt Full Text Query Filter gt Invert Filter Filter gt Query by Example Filter gt Undo Filter Filter gt Save Filter as Manual Filter Filter gt Manual gt Apply Cancel Filter gt Manual gt Cancel Record Selection Filter gt Manual gt Compose Filter gt Manual gt Exclude All Records Filter gt Manual gt Exclude Record Filter gt Manual gt Include All Records Filter gt Manual gt Include Record Filter gt Manual gt Load Record Selection Filter gt Manual gt Save Record Selection Record gt Go To gt First Record gt Go To gt Last Record gt Go To gt Previous Appendix Go To gt Previous Record Output gt All Records gt Multiple Letter via Word Processor Output gt All Records gt Multiple Print Output gt All Records gt Multiple Print gt Print Cards Output gt All Records gt Multiple Print gt Print Labels Output gt All Records gt Multiple Print gt Print Lists Reports Output gt All Records gt Print Multiple Letters Output gt All Records gt Send Multiple E mail Output gt Analysis gt
116. BHDE 82467 Garmisch Partenkirche T SalesDocumentitems 4 E Projects F10018 Museum of Contemporary Art London 255 Royal College Street EIGB NW19LU London o 68 ProjectTasks Fons Sorgios Versicherungen Limmatstr 15 ECH 8005 Z rch o a Produts g F10020 Hammer Baumarkt File Radolfzell Mezgerwsidring 147 GME 78315 Radoitzel o Knowledgebase F10021 Susis Neon Nasenringe oHG Solider Bogen 4 GIDE 24944 Flensburg o ProductGroupCompetitors F10022 Reiseb ro Single Tours Faberstr 11 GIDE 88045 Friedrichshafen o amp ProductGroups F10023 Weberei Seitenmann und Sohn Stoffe aler Art seit 18 Webersteig 4 GEE 78462 Konstanz 78441 50 o Others We Fr0024 Caf zum Roten Haus Zegelhofstr 104 Sat 1220 Wien 0 E Users F10025 Sicherheitsdienst SecureServices Liechtensteinstr 256 Sat 1090 Wien o F10026 H tel le Premier 12 all e Gambetta EHFR 13001 Marseille 0 F10027 Herrenbekdeidung Schneider Landwehrplatz 13 IDE 66111 Saarbr cken o F Views F10028 W scherei Schneeweis Westerstr 99 BDE 28199 Bremen o F10029 M belhaus Stuhier M wenstr 6 GIDE 88045 Friedrichshafen o w Favorites Qj F10020 Caf Mozart seit 1899 Sch nbrunnerstr 149 Sat nzo Wien 5555555555 0 History A r8 Park Apotheke Friedrichstr 4 DE 78464 Konstanz o F10032 Fahrradverleih Bodensee Tours Seepromenade 34 GIDE 88709 Meersburg 0 qgj Instant Reports F10033 Weinhandlung Biau Weine amp mehr seit 19 Schottenstr 45 GME 78462 Konstanz o
117. CESS Hilde Au c e oes 30 Appendirigs ciet tens 72 Appointments and tasks 101 Calendar overview 106 Configuratio Nse 108 Control of conflicts 104 Daie WS iate mex etes 106 Delete e ae eae 106 Delegates tct mt 106 Elise cedet tate 106 EXDOEE c c ettari rrt 09 FIGrSus eee ades eds 07 iCalendar 09 MDO menn 09 LOTUS NOTES eas 09 Index Month Iw uos te eos 106 Outlook eet a dunte d US 109 PHD imanoma r e 106 Private appointments 103 Reminders ede cree acter NR arenes 105 SNOOZE ta pe Hed 105 SOLE OIdGT d s 107 Tobit David Client 109 WOeekVleW iet es 106 Area code directory s s s 61 Asynchronous scripts 273 Audio signals 213 AUtOoHId8 zt ettet eta 41 AUtO lOg i e t d pee 60 197 Automatic counters 195 Automatic login 309 Automatic numbering 194 AUtOrmatstis eu pad t epe 59 Activity management 112 Auto Lgs iie en oett 197 Content Kate 288 Customer number 194 Document management 199 E mail archiving 203 Function definitions 194 P O box directory 6 Run external program 62 SCIHDEPQ i eiae 27 Telephony ii imet 120 Workflow Designer 255 MVOTKTIOMIS E scit tt rte tlt 245 ZIP OdG8S iac hn etes 61 ANUTODIIOEU 5r c E botes 250 AULOTEX see e ehe 60 287 B Backup
118. ContactlD ContactsCompaniesRelations Contacts ID ContactsCompanies ContactsRelations Contacts ID ContactsRelations ContactlD1 ContactsRelations Contacts ID ContactsRelations ContactlD2 ProductAssignment Contacts ID ProductAssignment Contactl ProjectAssignment Contacts D ProjectAssignment ContactID ProjectTaskAssignment Contacts ID ProjectTaskAssignment Cq SalesDocuments Contacts ID SalesDocuments ContactlD SalesOpportunities Contacts ID SalesOpportunities ContactlD Ok Cancel 236 Customizing print templates In the Choose Source Table Path dialog all available tables are displayed hierarchically i e you will find the respective relationally linked tables under the tables Free content can also be selected as the data source provided this is supported by the application This means that data lines with fixed content or variables can be created and thus e g texts letters images or barcodes can be integrated into the Report Script gt Ifyou create a new template the dialog Pre selection of fields for a line definition will open after the above step Select the columns for the last table Customizing table contents A table is made up of different row types which can be defined independently of one another There are headers data lines footers group headers and group footers Marker if at least one Linetypes line definition exists Line or column properties amp Tablg Contents SalesDocum
119. David server script directory 119 Telephoning and call list 8 Telephoning and call list Note Requirement for phoning is a supported phone interface and or a corresponding telephone We recommend using TAPI For the phone functions to be used properly the creation of special phone fields is necessary More on this under Configuration of views The phone manager offers the following CTI Computer Integrated Telephony functions Automatic dialing Compilation of call lists Quick calling these lists Powerdialing Printing telephone lists Number recognition for incoming calls Logging unanswered calls Sending of SMS messages 8 1 Functions of the phone manager Dialing directly from a field Select Start Dial and selecta number or right click the phone field and select Dial gt The number you stored in a Telephone or Mobile Phone field is dialed automatically Dialing from the call list The phone manager allows the compilation of a telephone to do list i e an overview of records that should be called in the near future With this you can for example if the line is engaged carry on working in this view without having to find the person to call again later E combit phone manager oa Start i ATT 4 EX amp EB amp Dial P Next Manual Powerdialing Move Delete Switchto Add Log List of Item Item Application to Record Calls D Edit Output VO Info Status Number Last Fir
120. Dial Dial gt Manual Dial gt Next Dial gt Pause Dial gt Powerdialing Edit gt Add Log to Record Edit gt Delete Item Edit gt Delete All Items Edit gt Move Item Edit gt Switch to Application Output gt List of Calls Command in Toolbar File gt Exit gt Help File gt Import File gt New File gt Open Settings gt E mail Settings File gt Save File gt Save As Format gt HTML Format gt Text File gt Send Paste gt Attachment gt File Paste gt Attachment gt Formular Paste gt Fields Paste gt Hyperlink Paste gt Picture art gt Paste gt Table gt Delete Cell art gt Paste gt Table gt Delete Column art gt Paste gt Table gt Delete Row art gt Paste gt Table gt Insert Cell art gt Paste gt Table gt Insert Column art gt Paste gt Table gt Insert Row art gt Paste gt Table gt Link Cells art gt Paste gt Table gt New Table art gt Paste gt Table gt Split Cells art gt Tex ing gt Background art gt Text Formatting gt Bold art gt Text Formatting gt Bullet Character art gt Text Formatting gt Centered art gt Text Formatting gt Decrease Indent art gt Text Formatting gt Font art gt Text Formatting gt Increase Indent art gt Text Formatting gt Italic art gt Text Formatting gt Left art gt Text Formatting gt Numbering art gt Text Formatting gt Right art
121. Edit gt Append Relationally gt General Data gt Edit gt Data Enrichment Data gt Edit gt Modify Data gt External Data gt Export Data gt External Data gt Import Data gt Externa Data gt Synchronization Data gt Transfer manager Filter gt Compose gt Import gt Transfer Dupe Check Filter gt Compose gt Execute Filter Expression Filter gt Compose gt Free SOL Query Filter gt Compose gt Full Text Query Filter gt Compose gt Invert Filter Filter gt Compose gt Query By Example Filter gt Compose gt Undo Filter Filter gt Manually gt Record Selection gt Current Filter as Manual Filter ilter Manually gt Apply Filter gt Manually gt Cancel Selection Filter gt Manually gt Compose Filter Manually gt Exclude All Filter gt Manually gt Exclude Record Filter Manually gt Include All Filter gt Manually gt Include Record Filter gt anual Filter Filter Manually gt Record Selection anual Filter Go To gt First Record gt Go To gt Last Record Go To gt Next Record a gt Edit gt Append Relationally gt Execute With Filter to phone Save Manually gt Record Selection gt Load Save Ribbon and toolbars Edit gt Cut Edit gt Paste Record gt Save Record gt Save and Close View Edit gt Undo Organize gt Append Relationally gt Execute Template Organize gt
122. Either condition 1 or condition2 or both should apply Union If you want to create such a selection first define a condition and use the corresponding operator before every other condition With the arrow buttons above the input control you can undo or redo changes v General Filter EJ Views Fields Operators Value a gt ts Contacts 8 MaritalStatus equal to Miller E AccountMngr A MatchCode begins with E Activities A MobilePhone not equal to Eg BusinessRelation A MobilePhone Private less E CampaignAssignments A ModifiedBy greater Ed Company EA ModifiedOn less equal cl CompanyRelations A Name greater equal Case Sensitive Complaints Al MameProninciation Y is em a lt gt ie hd Add E ComPreference Ba ET ContactRelations1 cD AND NoT OR 0 x E ContactRelations2 E Gender 1 upper Contacts Department upper N Gesch ftsf hrung OR upper Contacts Ed LeadSource Department upper N Personal AND upper Contacts Name upper N M ller E MaritalStatus E PaymentTerm v lt gt The expressions of the different views will be concatenated with AND Include current filter Q Other options v Load Save Execute Cancel 89 Filtering Records Selection Example You search for all customers who either work in the management or in the personnel department However only t
123. Find and Replace Modif 7 BusinessSector1 Configure Sort Orders BusinessSector2 Configure Filter Expressio V CampaignAssignment Customize Transfer Temp J Campaigns Customize Input Form Iv Companies Customize E mail Temple CompaniesRelations Edit Phone Directory Rou M CompaniesRelationTypes Customize Print Template M Complaints Data Transfer ComplaintStatus L Imnat o M Contacts Iv ContactsCompaniesRelations Iv ContactsCompaniesRelationTypes W ContactsRelations Iv ContactsRelationTypes I 9 Cmn l gt Select the right to be defined By clicking in the right hand column and then clicking the arrow on the right hand side you can open the selection dialog Choose between Yes No and See Groups When defining group rights the option See Groups is not available SEs s Open View No Show View in Navigation Window Edit Record Create Record Delete Record Delete All Records Byright clicking all rights can be set at once through the context menu 311 User and rights management General Open View No Show View in Navigation Window No Edit Record No Set All to Yes z Create Record No Delete Record No l Delete All Records No SOSUL ASGD gt If you have selected See Groups the right that results from the user s group membership is displayed Note If you wish to assign the rights through the groups and do not wish to assign them to each user individually you must take car
124. Formatting options of an HTML e mail If you have HTML activated in the Format ribbon the following formatting options are available to you Style Various format templates are available These are pre set headings for example Characters You can set the font whether the font is bold or italic right left center aligned etc You can also insert bullets or change indentions in your e mail Background A certain background color can be set for an HTML e mail nsert table Select Start Table to insert a table in your e mail text Through the dialog that follows you can define how many columns and rows the table has and what color it should be After creating the table further options are available where you can add merge or delete rows and columns Insert picture To add a picture to an e mail select Start gt Picture In the dialog that opens select the required file The picture file must be available at the time of sending as itis only inserted in the e mail at that time nsert hyperlink To insert a hyperlink select Start gt Hyperlink In the dialog that opens you can define the link and set the desired type http mailto etc 134 Automatic e mail archiving Import of an HTML e mail into the template If you have already formatted an HTML e mail in another editor it is not necessary to edit the e mail again With File gt Import you can insert an existing HTML file into the e mail templat
125. General Sending Mail You can e mail from a David archive a record in the CRM assigned Further information about this topic see Archiving messages from in the chapter Activities and Document management 15 10 combit LDAP server The combit LDAP server gives you access to the cRM views from anywhere in the world The files can be accessed over the internet intranet or locally All that is required is an LDAP client which is available in every Microsoft Windows version With the LDAP protocol you can also access your data from a Linux system for example 239 General configuration Note When first starting the LDAP server the view Addresses is preconfigured You therefore only have to start the serverwith Commands gt Start Server and can then access your data in your view directly from a client General settings With a click on File gt Settings a dialog opens in which you can choose the basic settings for the LDAP server Port Search requests are anticipated on the port set here As standard the LDAP port according to RFC 2255 is set to 389 For this reason changing the port is not recommended Status The status sets to what mode the LDAP server should be switched being started There are three different modes Started The server waits for search requests after starting Paused The server opens to defined port but does not yet permit search requests This mode is advantageous if you want to reserve the po
126. K Cancel In the dialog Automatic counter settings you can create a new global counter using the New button Enter a name starting value current value and step size of the counter increment With the step size you define which number is to be given next in each case In the case of a customer number the step change 1 is usual so after 1000 would come 1001 Within a view these global counters can now be recalled Creating view specific automatic counters The view specific numbers are configured on the Auto No tab of the view configuration gt gt All fields of internal field type Auto number are automatically available in the Field Name column At the appropriate field name click in the Counter column and select the global counter If no global counter has been defined you can reach the configuration dialog of the global counters directly with the Edit counter settings button see above If required you can also define a new formula for this with the formula button The formula editor will provide assistance Further information regarding the formula wizard can be found in the List amp Label Designer documentation 195 Configuration of views 3 View Settings Companies EJ Name Companies Database table view Companies vO v Fields Relations Codes Dupes Function Definitions Auto No Auto Log Document Management Docum Automatic numbers Field name Counter For
127. Manager Medium English Companies a ED Start Filter Output Appointments Tasks Data Settings Window Global Search al fa a X Delete Q Ja Special Find id Search Companies 4 amp E 3 Iri D E Reference In Directories lt All Records gt Ne T WD View New Edi Quick Find Create Activat Dial Send Scipts amp Route x Extended fupe Filter Last Filter CustomerNo A E mail Workflows Planning Show Record Filter Direct Find Filter Actions Project NE ES x Sl Appointments Tasks x TX Info Center CustomerNo Company Company2 Street Country ZIP ZIPPOBox POBox Fa I Appointments Tasks 10 UK Import Cars 35 Chobham Road GI ET a GR RR B calls G F108 Druckerei NicePrint AG Schneckenburgst 23 MIDE Konstanz Views F10009 Smith Real Estate 132 E 23rd St HEUS 10000 NewYork 000 m 2 4 ff Companies Fomo Combit GmbH Untere Laube 30 GME 78462 Konstanz 0 4 f Contacts F10011 Paitxept Cwonewcras nnowag A 7 WERU 101000 Mocxsa 4 y Activities F10012 Le H tel du Pont Deux 14 quai Louvre LIFR 75001 Pans o ft SalesOpportunities F10013 Gas und Wasserinstallationen Wasst Opelstr 15 PIDE 78467 Konstanz 0 P Campaigns i F10014 Fotograf Johannes Knipser Bieichstr 16 MDE 55130 Mainz Sa Complaints F 10015 Schilemachhitfe Graz e V M nzgrabenstr 34 Sat 8000 Graz o ProductAssignment Fone Immobilien Hauser Karisruherstr 34 IDE 78048 Vilingen Schwenninger 0 7 pede F10017 Alpenverein Edelweit e V Enzienstr 44 I
128. SOL versions Therefore first download PostgreSQL and install it Documentation on installation and administration can be found under www postgresgl org docs Please also note the information in our Knowledgebase under www combit net de support kb in Administration tools for PostgreSQL and Replication solutions for PostgreSQL PostgreSOL does not support Windows Authentication For PostgreSOL Server authentication the cRM setup creates a new definable server user which can be used for login This user is automatically given the necessary access rights to the combit cRM System and the combit project database by the setup Client access is carried out through the library libpq which is made accessible to the clients centrally through the cRM server setup in the cRM installation directory For most solutions included an activedblink module is required For client access it is necessary to activate the option Accept connections on all addresses not just localhost in the Initialize database cluster dialog If you did not 23 Preparation and Installation activate this option during the PostgreSOL installation you have to re install PostgreSOL and activate it Additionally the IP addresses of the clients must be entered in the file Postgres Data pg_hba conf This can be done in the following way PostgreSQL Client Authentication Configuration File This file controls which hosts are allowed to connect how clie
129. Same as Character Allows the display of country flags in the list view when using the two character country codes of ISO 3166 ALPHA 2 A list of country codes is available here http www iso org iso en prods services iso3 166ma 02iso 3166 code lists index html Country flags are also displayed when using the IATA country codes the international car country codes and the internationally written country names In the input form the written name can be displayed in a static field with the GetlnfoFromCountry Land formula Auto Number Same as Character Allows the automatic allocation of consecutive numbers E mail Same as Character but also allows the automatic transfer of e mail addresses Internet Same as Character but allows navigation to internet addresses Boolean Checkboxes with only the states TRUE FALSE File Link Same as Character Allows the automatic and manual allocation of documents These are saved as references to the original file in the file system Note physical field length must be able to accommodate path and file name Embedded File Any binary files e g documents pictures charts can be stored directly in the database system 187 Configuration of views 188 DMS Document Same as Character Allows the automatic and manual allocation of documents that are saved in a supported document management system DMS These are then saved as references to the DMS Document Reference FM Same as C
130. Save As dialog either select an existing Excel file or enter a new Excel file name in the File Name field e g persons gt Inthe Select Data source dialog enter a name for the worksheet in the Worksheet field into which the data is to be exported e g Table1 If you have selected an existing Excel file all available workbooks are displayed and you can select the one you want by double clicking it 164 Synchronization of records Select Data Source EJ File name C Users Admin Documents data xls e Worksheet Table Available Worksheets E OK Cancel Save the target file in the template Afterwards you can choose whether this file name should be saved with the template or whether a selection dialog for the name of the export file should always appear Starting the export In the following dialog you are given a summary If you confirm this the export will begin As soon as it is finished you will be given a confirmation of successful completion You will reach this page directly if you select one of your own formats in User defined formats in the format selection on the first page of the wizard and click the Execute button Global templates can be found under User defined formats Global 12 5 Synchronization of records The synchronization function is useful for avoiding dupes when importing data from external sources e g from an Excel file For synchronization of cRM SQL Server databases see cha
131. The record created is automatically linked with the active record A button is also available for this function Sorting records 3 6 Sorting records With this function you can define different sort orders or view criteria that are then available to you to order the records The records can also be displayed unsorted gt To change the sort order of the list view or of a container left click on the column title gt To change the sort order of the input form view select the required sort criteria in the Direct Find Filter Group Search Companies M Ry lt All Records gt X Company 712 Z Direct Find Filter gt With the adjacent buttons you can set whether the sort order is to be Ascending or Descending Define a new sort order To define a sort order all fields in the current view and all fields from views linked with a direct 1 1 relation are available gt Select Settings gt Sort Orders Sort Orders EJ Sort orders Ba Fx 95 Name Fields lt unsorted gt Company Company Phone Phone ZIP ZIP CustomerNo CustomerNo TurnoverLY ID SalesTurnoverCompaniesLY Compz TurnoverCY ID SalesTurnoverCompaniesCY Compi BusinessSector BusinessSector1 BusinessSector1 Busir 2 OK Cancel gt With New a new search criterion is created Firstly give it a suitable name and then select the field by which the data is to be sorted By clicking the Direction column you can set whe
132. This can lead to unexpected effects 16 3 E mail autopilot Note This function requires the Professional or Enterprise Edition The E mail Autopilot runs as an application or a service on a server and watches your inbox It can start a workflow that will be triggered by an e mail with a certain subject You can realize e g a bounce management a double opt in process for newsletter registration or automatic processing of internet e mail queries or orders from an online shop The E mail Autopilot starts a script triggered by an e mail with a certain subject Concerning the licensing the E mail Autopilot will be handled as one workstation 250 E mail autopilot meaning that if on one workstation one or more program instances are running with the same user name login they use exactly one user license together The E mail Autopilot periodically checks a defined e mail account for new messages If a message with the desired subject exists a script defined for this subject will be executed to process the e mail All required objects as the current project and the current mail are available in the script Start the e mail autopilot Select File gt Help gt Tools and start the e mail autopilot i amp combit E mail Autopilot C Users Admin AppData Roaming combit cuep04 default cfg 7 7 EN File Action Settings D Stat Stop ul Statistics 8 Current Status Processed operations 0 Next cycle Deleted e mails 0 Started on Mon
133. View View View ools ools ools ools ools Tools Tools ools gt Toolbars gt Route Planning gt Toolbars gt Alphabetical Filter gt Toolbars gt Status Bar gt Toolbars gt Customize gt Swtich to gt Open View gt Swtich to gt Info Center gt Swtich to gt Appointments and Tasks gt Swtich to gt Calls gt Refresh gt Script gt Execute gt Script gt Edit gt Script gt New gt Script gt Encrypt gt Workflow gt Execute gt Workflow gt Edit gt Workflow gt New gt nn Application Script Workflow Settings gt View Settings gt Input Form Settings gt Input Form WebAccess Settings gt Transfer Template gt Select Setting o gt Transfer Template gt Edit Settings gt E mail Template Settings gt Phone amp Online Directories Route Plann ing Settings gt Print gt Labels Settings gt Print gt Cards Settings gt Print gt Lists Settings gt Print gt Direct Letters Mail Merge Settings gt Instant Reports Appointments Tasks Com mand in Toolbar Record gt New Appointment Record gt New Task Ribbon and toolbars No equivalent No equivalent Window Window Window Window Window Window Window Start gt Settings Settings Settings Settings Start gt Settings Settings Settings gt Show gt Status Bar gt Customize gt Ribbon gt Switch to g
134. a vCard simply double click it 62 gt Data entry with address pick up Note This function is only possible if the vcf file extension is connected to cRM Make this setting when carrying out the work station installation client exe If Clipboard monitoring is activated address pick up will now notify you of a possible address Possible address found Geiertours GmbH Rosa Ungeheuer Seestr 3 D 78464 Konstanz Tel 07531 90 60 10 Fax 07531 90 60 18 Mail ungeheuer relationship manager net vil C 1201 Now press the previously defined hotkey or select Transfer to combit Relationship Manager or the desired view if several targets are defined from the address pick up menu In the following window you can edit the transfer if required With drag amp drop you can transfer the pieces of the original text to the fields After clicking on Apply a new record will be created as long as no other record could be identified by e mail address The different data will be entered into the correct fields because of their allocation Tip If you wish to transfer an address from Microsoft Internet Explorer address pick up will save you the step with the clipboard You only have to mark address data in Internet Explorer and then open the context menu with the right mouse button From here simply select address pick up Transfer to combit Relationship Manager and you will move straight to the Edit address befor
135. abase server The installation files are normally stored on a file server that can be accessed by all clients or on the database server itself cRM WebAccess The cRM WebAccess allows data access from the Internet using a Web browser The architecture provides a web based system before construction can lie with the presenta on logic business logic and database on different servers The database server must not be accessible from the Internet Communication takes place exclusively via Web Services which provides the relevant information and services on the Internet 1 3 Server Installation Before starting the installation you should consider the following points Administrator rights are required for the installation The installation must be carried out with the installation program The program files can either be installed under any accessible UNC path variant a or locally variant b 19 Preparation and Installation l Installation cRM program files variant b or notebook installation database server MS SQL program group PostgreSQL option cRM data Scripting engine program files For the client installation run the program client exe from the cRM program directory For a single seat or notebook installation proceed the same way as in a server installation Starting the cRM installation program le 20 Close all currently running applications Disable any antivir
136. according to the document management rules name assignment save location O As single images Format TIFF compressed Each page will be saved as separate file As document Format PDF All scanned pages will be combined to a single document Title Description Keywords Scanner TW Brother MFC 7360N LAN e Currently no documents images have been scanned gt Right click in the document container and select Documents gt Read from Scanner from the context menu 114 Archiving messages from eMail Client gt Select As single images if only scanning one page Select As document if you wish to scan in several pages and want these put together as a document with several pages gt Select the format The scanned document will be saved in this format Depending on the chosen format further document information can be given title description etc Note For this file format a document type must be created in the file management or at least the entry Other Document with file ending gt Select the desired scanner and click Scan to start the process gt After the scanning process is finished save the document with the Save button 7 4 Archiving messages from eMail Client In Microsoft Outlook Mozilla Thunderbird and Tobit David you can use an add on to archive messages e mails or Tobit David also faxes and SMS in a view e g in the Activities
137. achment Picture Table Fields Hyperlink Message Format Text Formatting Paste Description L Newsletter 06 13 Sender v ya SMTP only e g Hans Meier lt info combit net gt Multiple recipients in separate mails personalized v To Email v Email I Y ce v a Subject Direct e mail function in combit Relationship Manager vba Dear Mr Ford Here could be your text Yours sincerely sunshine agency Edit Preview Source code Attachments gt Via File gt Open youcan open an existing template modify and finally save it via File gt Save or Save As gt The dialog contains three tabs where you can switch between the editing mode the real time preview and direct source code editing HTML gt Inthe preview you can browse through the filtered records with the arrow buttons The entire setup of the e mail including subject text field variables formatting HTML e mails and any attachments is contained in the template When saved templates can be 132 Working with e mail templates or standard e mails used as often as needed They work in a very similar way to document templates in your word processor Creating e mail templates You can make the following settings Format Inthe Format ribbon click on Text or HTML When you select the HTML format additional formatting options are available to you
138. ackup of the whole system server and clients Please note the fact that the preceding information is only an example and has to be seen in the context of your own backup strategy 317 Appendix 21 5 Ribbon and toolbars Here you will find an overview of the main menu functions in the ribbon and the corresponding position in the toolbar Position in toolbar to position in ribbon Project Command in Toolbar Command in Ribbon File gt New File gt New File gt Open gt File File gt Open gt Open File gt Open gt Solution Center File gt Open gt Solution Center File gt Save File gt Save File gt Save as File gt Save As File gt Reorganize File gt Information gt Reorganize File gt Provide for WebAccess File gt Information gt Provide for WebAccess File gt Exit File gt Exit Views gt New Context Menu on view in Project window gt New Views gt Open Start gt Open gt View gt Go to gt View or Context Menu on view in Project window gt Open Views gt Properties Settings gt View gt Properties or Context Menu on view in Project window gt Properties Views gt Delete Context Menu on view in Project window gt Delete Views gt Info Center Window gt Switch to gt Info Center Views gt Appointments amp Tasks Window gt Switch to gt Appointments and Tasks Views gt Calls Window gt Switch to gt Calls Windows gt Toolbars gt Toolbar Project No equivalent
139. act view Information regarding the configuration of relations can be found under Relations in the chapter Configuration of views 1 1 relationally linked records To link a contact to a company for example click on Link to a company at the top right of the Contacts view in the reference project Medium which is included gt Luna Aventuras DE 78467 Konstanz e amp Master Data l p y Salutation Herr Icon Company css y2 MatchCode Cou ZIP City Street Custom AccountMngr Namelscnd Albatros Flug OH Albatros BoE 78464 Zeppeiinstr 33 F10003 User2 d Alpenverein Edelwei Alpenverein Edelwei IDE 82467 Garmisch Partenkin Enzianstr 44 F10017 User3 Pr 1 3 Anwaltskanziei Reci Anwaitskanziei Reci IDE 12307 Beriin Falckensteinstr 17 F10042 User1 en MatchCode Mile Find Text gt Company M Position All records from the linked view which are available to be linked are displayed in a list Select the record by double clicking it There is a search tool in the selection list To search simply type in the word you wish to search for It is not necessary to call up the search function The field set in Find Text will be searched automatically Byright clicking this button the link can be removed again During selection for those records displayed in the list a filter can be created which sets the records to be displayed Current field contents can be used as comparative values Button in chapter Scripts
140. acts a Start Filter Output Appointments Tasks Data Settings Window Global Search MI E n X Delete Q Q A Speca Fing d Search Contacts MESI EN f m Q f Referene In Directories lt All Records Mi View New Edit T Quick Find Create te az Dial Send Sciptj amp Route X Extended Find As Replace Filter Last Filter CustomerNo TVA E mail Workflows Planning Show Record Find Filter Direct Find Filter Actions Project a x Z Info Center x Companids x ff Contacts x x Info Center gt Luna Aventuras DE 78467 Konstanz ts dX Appointments Tasks Master Data Calls aS em Tile m Communication Account Address Private Ta Salut letter Serr geehrter Her Phone 07531 0999999 1 e v 4 f Companies F3 Name Soei Phone2 075210888888 e Facebook jean scie Ki 4 D Contacts Firstname Jean MobiePhone 017009999651 e Twitter Activities oues MoblePrivate XING Jean Soleil x ie SalesOpportunities EDIT Fax 07531 0999987 d Campaigns Position Email soleli retationship manager net G Preference Emai G 9 Complaints ProductAssignment TY SalesDocuments Department Vertrebsietung Emai2 Activities 4 SalesOpportunities gi Sales HY Sales Documents amp Products Campaigns 9 Complaints Z Projects Relations Additional E Projects Y lt A Records gt ox hd phe v DateTime Type Directon Prony Category Comment Duration Responsible Document S vi Li E 21 11 2012 14 37 00
141. ady be selected in the search dialog and the current field content will be entered as the search criteria the only exception being fields of the Characters long type Under Search Criteria enter the term you are searching under Options select normal If you want to search case sensitive simply tick the corresponding option Note To use this option case sensitive searching must be set up in the database server configuration The records with the search term will be displayed once the search has finished and only those records You can tell that you are in search result mode from the symbol at the bottom right of the view window Example You want to search for the company Sunshine Agency and just enter Sunshine as you don t know the exact name As the company belongs to a bigger group of companies you are not sure if the searched term exists in the field Company Company2 or Company3 So you will find all records of this company independent from Agency Ltd or SA Search options 76 Contains Search To find data for which the search term does not exactly match the search field or the beginning does not match use the search option Contains Provided that you know exactly what you are searching for there is the option to use the exact search option instead of the normal option This means you have to enter the entire search term in our previous example this would be Sunshine Agency Note howev
142. alidity condition carry out the following steps gt First you should decide whether the correct input should be forced or whether only a notification should appear for an invalid entry gt With the button New you will reach the list with the conditions and notifications The cursor will automatically jump to the Validity condition field which can be defined with the help of the formula wizard In the field underneath you can now set the notification message that appears if the validity condition was not satisfied by the input Note Please note that the definitions do not provide 100 protection and are only input aids For some special functions such as drag amp drop search replace or even the virtual user these checks are partly ineffective Example To force the correct input of an e mail address StrPos EMAIL lt gt 1 and StrPos EMAIL lt gt 1 and Len EMAIL gt 5 290 Shared object properties For the notification if this validity condition is not valid you could enter e mail address is not valid for example You will get the most consistent form as possible for the input In the notification you also could already tell how the correct entry should look like that there has to be an as well as at least one point and five characters Run external program You can link fields of the input form with external programs These external programs for example a spreadsheet or a graphics program c
143. alue OK Cancel Select the value of the corresponding previous activity in the treeview in the upper part of the dialog Example Select the telephone number of the current record gt gt gt gt n the Workflow Designer select File gt New Drag the activity ReadFieldContent onto the work area n the tool window Properties enter the field names of the telephone number e g Phone for the property Field name The value that is read out is automatically written in the property Value Drag the activity Dial onto the link below the activity ReadFieldContent n the tool window Properties enter the value the result of the previous activity ReadFieldName for the property Number Open the connection dialog by clicking on the button In the upper area of the dialog open the treeview and select the property Value of the activity ReadFieldContent Start the workflow in the view via Start gt Script amp Workflows gt Execute Workflow 17 2 cRM Workflow The workflow is saved as an XML file If conditions are made they will be saved in a RULES file with the same name 261 Workflow Designer Properties of the workflow The properties of the workflow are displayed in the tool window Properties if no activity is selected Below the list there is an area in which a description text is shown for each selected property The following properties are available Name Give the workflow anew
144. an then be run directly from the corresponding field by right click the field and select Run External Program from the context menu Setting up the run external program function gt With objects for which a program linkis possible you can find a Program tab in the dialog that opens Here you can set up a program to be run by selecting the desired external program and the parameter to be transferred gt Inthe input field Program name you can enter the path and program names of the desired program or can select it with the Select file button gt Inthe input field Program parameter you can transfer parameters to the external program for example to start the program with a certain document With the parameter s you can set that the field contents are to be transferred as a parameter This is useful for example if you store a path and file name in the field so the file is automatically loaded when the program is run With the parameter env lt var gt you can transfer the contents of an environment variable as a parameter too lt var gt stands for the name of the environment variable More about environment variables can be found in your operating system manual Aside from these two parameters you can enter all other parameters permitted for the program being run in the input field Program parameter gt Allow program start by file extension If this option is turned on the associated program is ascertained fr
145. anyway Abbrechen Reminders If you have activated the reminder function for an appointment or task you will be shown a reminder list at the relevant time xx 1 Reminder s EN At 06 10 13 at 11 00 14 00 o clock With Luna Aventuras Jean Soleil Location conference room A Subject Project 1 ZP Subject With Locati Luna Aventuras Jean Soleil confej gt Action lt no action selected gt Execute SS Snooze Defer by 15 Minute s v 2 x Edit Defer Snooze Close gt Select Go to record to display the linked record gt Select Delete to delete the appointment gt Select Close to delete the appointment reminder The actual appointment will not be deleted gt If an appointment was linked with an action you can carry out the action with a click on the Execute button gt To move the reminder to a later time set the desired time interval and click on Snooze The actual appointment will not be moved just the reminder If necessary you can also move several appointments tasks at the same time Example You want a report to be completed on Tuesday at 16 00 and therefore you let remind yourself at 10 00 a m in order to start on time Unfortunately you got 105 Appointmentand task management interrupted by a long phone call why you want to get reminded again not until 1 1 00 To do this click Snooze by 1 hour gt If you wish to move the appointment not
146. aration and Installation Note This function requires the Professional or Enterprise Edition iz cRM Workflow Designer Remove Newsletter if e mail incorrect xoml Loaded cS File Edit Workflow OE ld X amp EBD z System FaultHandler 3 System Else E System Policy E System Seauence Q System Terminate hy System Throw D System While E If Then regular ig Show question i dial log Name Please specify name of the activity used to generate associated type s OBBL lt 255 Workflow Designer A workflow is a predefined sequence of activities The objective here is a possible partial automation of the execution such as a reading out of the telephone number of the current record and start a call The subsequent activity is ideally determined by the output of each of the preceding activities Repetitions loops or branches if then can also be executed gt Tocreate a new workflow select Settings gt Workflows gt New gt Toopen an existing workflow select Settings gt Workflows gt Edit gt A workflow can be started via Settings gt Workflows gt Execute Start gt Script amp Workflows gt Execute Workflow an event a button of the type Execute workflow or a content link Workflows are technically based on the workflow foundation of the Microsoft NET framework Through this s
147. ard with Settings gt Lists Reports Customizing print templates Select the 1 N relations here that should be available in the print template By clicking transfer them to the Used list In the normal case the fields of the view are only made available to the table object as List amp Label fields By activating the option Define fields of main view as variables they are made available to other objects as List amp Label variables e g for use in text objects Normally tables are issued only if records are available With the option Output empty tables tables are always printed eg the header Relational Print Settings Available l CompaniesRelations ID CompanylC CompaniesRelations ID CompanylE ProjectAssignment ID CompanylD CampaignAssignment ID Company Activities ID CompanylD SalesDocuments ID CompanylD ProductAssignment ID CompanylD lt lt Complaints ID CompanylD Calne Annet tin IID Cannan in gt gt Used Contacts ID CompanylD Define fields of main view as variables Output empty tables Select the 1 N relations that shall be available for the print template Additionally you can specify the print order of these relations Working with the report structure Cancel In the Report Structure tool window all elements and sub elements of a report structure are displayed with their object type and data source relation name sort name in the order
148. arities SQL databases generally work based on queries and are therefore set oriented and not position oriented This means that a particular record cannot be navigated to or updated without running a query that hits it exactly Various field changes only become visible in the input form through this query e g through trigger functions time change stamps calculated fields field changes to this record by other users in the record etc The query is respresented visually in the status bar by 1 n without the filter icon For this reason when scrolling between records changes by other users in the network only become visible after a query e g with refresh F5 changing and saving a record filtering 100 Scheduling appointments and tasks 6 Appointment and task management This internal view allows the management of appointments tasks and resources This view is opened via the navigation Window gt Appointments and Tasks or Appointments Tasks gt Appointments and Tasks Another option is to use external scheduling such as Outlook More information can be found in the chapter Link to external task and appointment manager E combit Relationship Manager Medium English Appointments Tasks Working week view ES E i Project Views Windows Settings 8x 1D d Og 9e ien search 1 Navigation 3 x _ Companies x Contacts x SlAppointmentsTasks x 2 Project
149. art gt Start gt Start gt gt Curren gt Curren gt Curren gt Curren gt Curren gt Curren gt Curren gt A gt All Records gt All Records gt All Records gt All Records gt All Records gt All Records gt Analysis gt gt Analysis gt ments Tas s T s Ti s Ti s T s Ti s T men asks men asks men asks men asks men asks men asks Show gt View gt Show gt View gt Record Record Record Record Record Record Record Records gt Send gt Prin gt wt gt Sta Ins gt Send E mail gt Prin Letter gt Transfer to Word Processor gt Prin gt Prin gt Prin gt Prin ultiple istics an Single Label Single Card List Report for Record tiple E mail iple Letters Letter via Word Processor Print Print gt Print Labels Print gt Print Cards Print gt Print Lists Reports Report s gt New gt Appointment for Record gt New gt Task for Record gt S gt S gt S gt S how gt Appointment for Record how gt Task for Record how gt Appointment List how gt Task List gt Switch to gt Appointsments and Tasks List View Show gt View gt Web Show gt View gt Report No equivalent No equivalent No equivalent No equivalent No equivalent No equivalent No equivalent nput Form View View View View View View
150. as reached the recipient it simply means that the message was successfully transferred to the SMSC as is normal when sending SMS messages from a mobile phone Sending SMS messages in the network If you only have a modem connected to one computer in your network you can use it as a central server for the sending of SMS messages Requirement for this is that both computers client and server are in the same workgroup If in doubt ask your network administrator In the client click on the button Select to select the server In this case the settings for the provider are inconsequential since the configuration of the server is used Logging the sending of SMS messages A log about the last calling attempt is automatically created If you are sending the SMS message from your own computer you can see the log with the Details button in the sending dialog The same information can also be found in the file sms log in the user sub directory of the sender When problems occur with the sending of SMS messages you should first look if this information can provide a possible cause 129 E mail 9 E mail You can send single and multiple e mails directly from cRM For this you have the choice between different formats and mail services For multiple or standard e mails you can create e mail templates and as well as being logged sent e mails can also be stored in the document container automatically 9 1 Technical requirements
151. ase Structure You can create edit and delete tables and fields The internal field type is then defined in the view configuration Note To change the database structure the active user must have the corresponding rights For further information regarding the database user see also Choosing a database connection in chapter Preparation and Installation A database configuration tool e g Enterprise Manager MSDE Manager pgAdmin is only necessary for advanced functions such as the definition of constraints changes to primary keys or the rearrangement of the field order Create Database table Select File gt Information gt Database Structure to open the dialog for the configuration of the database structure Gy Edit Table Structure ES Database structure E You can define the structure of your database tables here Database table Companies gt Select the New button next to the database table input field to create a new database table on the database server gt Select the Delete button to remove a database table Note If a database table is created directly using a database configuration tool it is necessary to restart cRM so that the table can be selected in the view configuration Database fields Select File gt Information gt Database Structure to open the dialog for the configuration of the database structure Alternatively open this dialog for a specific database table by 181 Configuration of
152. assigned on the appropriate button If no appropriate category listed you can create v Scheduling appointments and tasks them on Settings gt Categories Choose from many standard symbols and designate them with a meaningful name for you Private Private appointments can only be seen by the owner of the appointment Select any other options you want In the tab Appointment activate the option Recurring if a recurring event is being entered such as a birthday weekly discussions etc After activation a dialog with various options will become available Set the recurrence pattern Depending on whether you select daily weekly monthly or annually different options will become available in the right hand area of the recurrence pattern Recurring appointments are only shown once in the appointment list Under Attendee you can select whether the appointment is for you default or for other users Please note that any later changes to the appointments of other users are only possible if you have the corresponding user administration rights You have also the ability to create appointments for resources such as hardware vehicles classrooms or similar These resources are defined under Settings Resources Appointment Attendee References Action B gx eem B sale Administrator Beamer Of course you can also filter out the resource appointments Instead of selecting a user select the desired resource in the filter l
153. ated combobox is also saved All users whoload the project in question will now receive the settings you chose as Soon as the corresponding view is re opened If a user changes the configuration again at a later date and does not save for the entire project the changes are saved in the registry and are used again from there This means the newest configuration is always loaded If however you wish to revert to the configuration saved for the whole project you can do this by selecting Settings Reset to Project Default Customizing ribbon Customizing the ribbon can basically be done like in other Office products therefore the following description is kept relatively simple Commands gt Right click on a group in a tab gt Customize gt Select the tab in the right area Main Tabs gt Select an existing tab in the option field over the left column gt Select the desired command and add it to the desired group with a click on Add gt Sort commands Drag the commands and drop them onto the desired position in the Ribbon Remove commands Select the command and click Remove 45 Getting started Customize Ribbon x esee Y at a Customize the Ribbon Select commands Customize Ribbon ros EE Main Tabs x Es View Main Tabs Info Center amp C Start dl Appointments and Tasks amp V Start B Calls V Filter amp V Output amp V Appointments Tasks amp V Data X Set
154. ath to program can be started if it was not found If you cannot find the required program in the list you can use the target program Clipboard The data can then be manually inserted into almost any Windows program For a transfer to Word or Excel you can select a document template for the target program in the Document Template field To place the fields in certain places in Word or Excel documents these templates can contain bookmarks These bookmarks are then assigned to individual transfer lines For further information regarding bookmarks see the Bookmark section Only the user templates of Word and Excel are available in the combobox Alternatively a template from the workgroup directory can be set To do this simply write the file name in the field A template is automatically searched for in the workgroup templates directory when the template entered cannot be found in the user template directory Alternatively the complete document path can be entered e g F Template standardletter dot When you create a transfer template for a document type of the document management do not select a document template here This is set directly in the configuration of the document type in the document management see chapter Configuration of views Transfer lines The dialog contains a listbox in which the individual lines of the transfer template are displayed as well as various options If you create a new transfer te
155. ation If you place two windows in the same place these will simply be docked together and will take up less space With the tabs at the bottom edge of the window you can switch between them Field alignment E InputForm Edit Object Page Settini j gi s a 12 0 Select fields EE ES 81 5 na static teot E had E D fixedtextorfdrmula fll E siaii l i Td E Communication Communication Account Address Private m Cedtetorformola M E Sel sio ssuion i med D AccountMngr lt 73 D Activities 9 E 5 1D Appointments D Bank amp a tB D BankAccountllo amp DG lix E 7 Bankcode g H a D Bic Gt ComPreference Descrpton EN D Birthday cg i t D Birthplace H H H H i i c D BusinessRelatipn E Activities Activities SalesOpportunities Salls Sales Documents Products Campaigns Complaints Projects Relations Additional D CampsignAssignmen v iE 9 gt Aces z Sm x p Seetields input Order Activities B3CO768A 5599 44B5 B4F2 7D31 AB 10EC5 Tabs E SS X C3 Input form E Tabbed pages CJ Communication C Account T Address C Private T Main tabbed pages Q Activities J SalesOpportunities 7 4 7 CJ Sales Lastners contact LastPersonaiContact Z _ New standard letter Qj Sales Documents v Tabs Status bar Input form Main tabbed pages Workspace The w
156. ation In this case the Windows users must be set up in the MS SOL Server For more information about Windows authentification see MS SOL Serverlogin method 1 6 Update installation combit strives to maximize backward compatibility As the cRM is an extremely open flexible and customizable product it may not be possible to test any individual customization in advance so we generally recommend to test your own scripts or other automation before the first productive use by generating test data Update Server installation 1 How to back up your data Backup the system database combit cRM System and the project database e g combit directly in the database system Backup the cRM installation directory e g C Program Files combit cRM Backup the entire project directory including input form definitions scripts transfer templates global export import templates print templates e g C ProgramFiles combit cRM Solutions 26 Pay Update installation Backup the individual user settings and possibly user defined templates in the application data directory e g C Users lt User name gt AppData Roaming combit cRM Start the installation of the new version and follow the prompts Install the new version in the same folder as the old version attention to the following notes An existing system database combit cRM System is recognized by the installation program and is automatically converted Y
157. be selected whose city is B completely independent from the name gt NAME Smith AND COUNTRY A OR CITY B means that all records will be filtered whose name is Smith and which either lie in the country A or in the city B Note Always pay attention to the sequence of the operators With AND and OR links the sequence is important because the rule AND before OR applies 90 General Filter Filter with relationally linked views You can also set a filter that runs on multiple relationally linked views In principle the same procedure is followed as described when creating linked conditions In the list of views select the appropriate view before setting any conditions only then will the associated fields be displayed If you have already defined a condition and then change the view for the second condition the filter expression of the first condition will no longer be directly visible to you Only the expression for the current view is displayed in the window You can tell that a condition has been set for another view because it will be shown in bold in the list Full text filter for document content If the database system supports the respective full text indices and the internal field type of the document field is embedded file you can also filter by document contents also fuzzy Y General Filter EJ Views Fields Operators Value gt E Contacts a A DMS_Top
158. be stored and managed automatically in the document container configure the transfer template with a document template in the document management For further information see chapter Activities and Document management 217 General configuration In transfer templates you can set which fields of an individual record are to be transferred to which target program and in what way Also you have the option of transferring fixed text such as a return address and formatting as well as reacting to certain field contents using conditions and functions The target program can be started automatically gt Atransfer template is activated under Settings gt Transfer Templates gt Select gt To carry out a single transfer using the active transfer template select Output gt Transfer Record To create or change a transfer template proceed in the following way gt Select Settings gt Transfer Templates gt Edit E Edit Transfer Template C Users Admin Desktop Contacts Word 2013 xfx File Edit eaas General Description Template for address transfer to Word Target MS Word 2013 vl Document template v vi amv s 7z u Bese Lines to transfer gax Cond MailingAddress F CompanylD Companies ID Company Line properties Cond MailingAddress F CompanylD Companies ID Company2 m Cond MailingAddress F CompanylD Companies ID Company3 Cond MailingAddress F Department Blank Optim
159. ble to select the key fields To be able to keep an overview about three fields are ideal Inserting new records In the following dialog you can decide whether records that exist in the secondary database but not in the main one should be transferred to the main database without query or whether the transfer should be confirmed manually for each record Synchronization type only Outlook synchronization The following dialog only appears for Outlook and allows you to set whether a full synchronization i e an import with subsequent export should be carried out If you activate the option Execution must be confirmed by user the execution of an automatic synchronization must also be confirmed this makes a statistic run possible see later in this chapter Field allocation for re export only Outlook synchronization If the export was permitted in the previous dialog the usual field allocation dialog appears but this time the other way round the secondary database has the target fields Take particular note of the data filter it works on the fields of the main database and describes which records are to be re exported Name allocation for the format Formatting set in the wizard can be saved and will then be available to run instantly under User defined formats In the following dialog you can set a name for it If the template should not be saved simply leave the name field empty Templates are also useful if they only f
160. by clicking on the buttons By category or Alphabetically If you are sorting by category each category contains properties that can be combined back into groups Categories and property groups can be opened and closed for a better overview The properties are different for each activity However there are many features that are common to all activities These properties are now described here A detailed description of all activities and their properties can be found in the additional workflow documentation in the document directory Output medium Oo PRN PRJDIR Print Templates Persons Business letter d Activity OpenCurrentRecord Path CurrentRecord Output file 3 PRJDIRZNPrint Templates Brief pdf Print template Print template File name of the print template to be used The general properties are found under the heading Activity Name If you add a new activity to the work area the activity name is set as the name in the properties list e g Filter However if you have a larger number of the same types of objects in your project these names can quickly become confusing Therefore you have the option of giving activities a new meaningful name via the properties list e g FilterNewsletterSubscribers The name must be unique within the workflow If the name of an activity is changed existing connections to subsequent activities may in some cases become invalid You can recognize this by the red validi
161. by hand or inserting them using the buttons If nothing is to be written for an argument simply enter two quotation marks into the corresponding THEN or ELSE argument Within the conditions there are special rules for the notation which are described next Example Let s say that in the view s field COUNTRY the country indicator D CH A etc is saved When transferring into a letter head the country should be written out under the city however only if there is no D in the field COUNTRY Note For links the rules described in the chapter Operators of the List amp Label documentation apply Comparative values entered manually must always be written inside quotation marks A pair of quotation marks with a space between them stand for a space Advice on syntax rules Double angle brackets Within expressions i e conditions and functions special rules for notation apply Such expressions must always be written in double angle brackets Please note that only one pair of double angle brackets may occur per expression even if this expression contains several conditions or functions 216 Configuring transfer templates Variables in expressions Outside of expressions variables are written in angle brackets lt VARIABLE gt within expressions they are written without VARIABLE Expressions and fixed text Text entered manually must always be contained in quotation marks when within an expression
162. can be placed over a container to filter the records in it Y al records lr Bw x Y lt all records gt Contact Name Y Only letters V Only E mais T Only phone calis Nf Only faxes BEE Y Only personal Certain priority WW Only own activities T Only documents All saved filters in the linked view for which the option Container Filter is activated in the Filter Library are available in this combobox The activated filter remains in use until it is changed With the buttons Append existing Append new and Scanning of the Container Document category the corresponding container context menu functions for a container with a document field can be carried out For buttons with the Append new function the dialog for the selection of the document type will be opened A document template can optionally be linked with the button In this way a document corresponding to the configuration of the document management can be created without further query The document template is selected under the Advanced button on the Extended tab With the option Always create a document of the following type all document types configured in the document management are available 304 Specific object properties E Button Container Document Append new Activities EJ Properties Extended i Tooltip p Appearance Appearance condition ya Editability condition
163. ce ee eeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeaes 306 Users and groups debo tatnen Galles eed ded i 307 Activ Directory Connection tte e etr nds 307 Memberships EAA TEE EA ee o n e e Rp Rea 309 User master data user logins iess a a e 309 Gro p rmaster Cale zero ede eode e e e Me ed tutes 310 20 2 Rights management ssssssseene meme nennen 310 DenmUonmofrglits res abe e getreten 311 Application rights and user settings 312 ProjJecETHOELS s rect c tetro to Pag bo b e HER RUE 313 VIGW EIOS undas nb o Ren ee dae a e dae be e 314 Hecotd ngbissisime inel fork Sates ecu t fS bet catt E UA Mer 314 Field tights xo erected n eee e etie 315 21 Appendix eL IPAE EPIRI Wee ic Lit ues 317 21 1 SUpport x von eer ett reet oret rose ete RA AAA 317 21 2 Overview of Configuration files data sess sees 317 21 3 Optimization of the operating speed sssesseseeee 317 214 Data backup i ieeeeioc tb eee cec dest vuv tee ares tees Weld din tae PRE EE On TRAY eT 317 21 5 Ribbon and toolbar sessssssssssssseseeen eee 318 Position in toolbar to position in ribbon 318 Position in the ribbon alphabetically to position in toolbar 327 13 21 6 22 Index Datadypes aioe cite ce needed cue EE E TE EA T pers bomo ddr dede System Requirements 1 Preparation and Installation This chapter should be read before the software is installed It contains important
164. characters Data filter va Note that assignments between fields of different types are possible but do not always deliver the desired result An assignment between a comment field and a numerical field makes little sense This applies especially to the Character Numerical Comment Documents Contacts References and Date types If you select the auto link the different field types will be converted if possible 160 Export of records If the target field is shorter than the source field the excessive characters are cut off This applies to decimal places in numerical fields too and the numbers are not rounded You can if necessary address this with a formula In the data filter at the bottom you can enter a formula with which the records to be imported can be limited only the records that meet the conditions are imported If the formula field is empty all records from the source database will be imported Name allocation for the format Formatting set in the wizard can be saved and will then be available to run instantly under User defined formats In the following dialog you can set a name for it If the template should not be saved simply leave the name field empty Templates are also useful if they only fit the involved databases approximately Generally itis less effort to adapt an existing template than to set all links again The templates are saved in the respec
165. chive view by clicking on the corresponding button In the Fields area you specify which log entry is to be made in which field The respective fields of the target view are available for this You specify the auto log text in the Formula column Formulas give you access to data fields and additional information which could also be used for the entry By clicking the Formula editor button you get help from a wizard For this specific message variables are available essage Sender essage Subject essage Body essage CC Recipient Contains a list of the SMTP CC recipient of the message The list is separated by semicolons and each SMTP CC recipient is enclosed in single quotation marks essage Recipient Contains a list of the SMTP recipient of the message The list is separated by semicolons and each SMTP recipient is enclosed in single quotation marks e g lt SMTP1 gt gt SMTP2 gt Archiving messages from eMail Client Message ReceivedOn Conversion into a character field via the function Date Message ReceiptDate 02d 02m 04y 02H 02i 02s Message Direction Message Type im unknown 1 incoming 2 outgoing unknown 1 e mail 2 fax 3 SMS gt Options tab Here you will find the various options for the message archive General Archive messages without user interaction Suppresses the confirmation dialog when archiving Display record records after successful arc
166. choose a separate fax program 11 2 Faxing with List amp Label templates You can fax directly with List amp Label templates gt To send a fax first go to the record of the person to whom the fax is to be sent Now select Output gt Print Letter and choose the saved template The output dialog opens and as long as your fax driver is correctly installed under Direct to the item Fax Device Fax is shown Click on the Start button to send the fax gt To send a multiple fax first select the desired recipient group with the filter functions Now proceed in the same way as described when sending a single fax and the fax will be sent to all records in the active filter The only difference is that you have to select Output gt Print Multiple Letters Customizing the fax template When faxing directly from the software you do the following First you must create an appropriate fax template You do not have to create this from scratch however but can adapt the included standard template to your needs gt To configure this standard fax template click on Settings gt Card Letters Now select the file Contacts Windows Fax template crd from the PrintTemplates sub directory gt Thetemplate is opened in the List amp Label Designer Now you can make any desired changed such as changing the text etc gt When sending a fax additional information is required to be able to address the fax i e at least the
167. ck find find sort stored filter expressions output of labels lists cards creating new edit delete records WebAccess installation The WebAccess setup is running on the server that is accessible from the Internet Before performing the installation ensure that the system requirements are met ie Microsoft Internet Information Services IIS are installed and the NET Framework is added as a feature In case of a first configuration configure the Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 as follows 1 Selectthe entry Add Roles 2 Select the server role Web Server IIS 3 Select the required role services for ASP NET 4 Selectthe entry Add Features 5 Activate the feature NET Framework 3 5 1 The installation requires administrator privileges for the user Select the entry Run as Administrator from the context menu Start the combit WebAccess_x64 exe 64bit or combit WebAccess_x86 exe 32bit from the cRM program directory and follow the instructions WebAccess must be installed to the wwwroot directory of the Microsoft Internet Information Services IIS default location C inetpub wwwroot cRM WebAccess 29 Preparation and Installation The files of the converted solution have to be copied to this directory after the installation To convert the solution see the chapter titled Create a solution for WebAccess At the end of the installation the server must be restarted Access of cRM WebAccess o
168. cking a selected column title again with the left mouse button and dragging it By clicking on the View formatting button the formatting can be specified for the selected field The column settings title width formatting etc are not saved if the column is hidden exception the column has been explicitly set to not editable Configuring the appearance In the Appearance tab you can configure the various display options of list and container views E Settings Columns Appearance Options Preview Title Title Title Colors Like Wind Field Field Field Like Windows zr Field Field Field Field Field Field Fieid Field Field Background of Normal Data Line Field Field Field Background of Selected and Tagged Data Line A Background of Tagged Data Line Field Field Field Background of Selected Data Line Field Field Field Foreground of Header Line Field Field Field Foreground of Normal Data Line Field Field Field Foreground of Selected and Tagged Data Line Forenround of Tanned Data ine v Field Field Field Field Field Field Zebra pattern Intensity 5 Field Field Field Field Field Field Dipby Fied Fed Fed VY Fonts Header Data line Field Fieid Fieid i Field Field Field Effects 2D with 3D title v Horizontal separators Field Field Field z Vertical separators Eid Fei Fei Line height 1 Fe lines Field Field Fied v Fiat Fia Field lt gt a
169. command has been executed Hide menu command gt Linkthe event with the existing script file with the action Script File or embed the script into the project with the action Script Direct Event Field Change With the event Field change you can watch certain fields and execute a workflow script when the content is changed Example If the status of a service order is changing from open to done a notification e mail is automatically sent to the customer If multiple solutions share the same data database maximal one solution can use the event Field change Otherwise malfunctions will occur gt Selectthe field s to watch by the button Select fields Properties V Active Description status change If a Field change on fields Status then Execute Script File Z File PRIDIR Scripts change vbs Dead gt Ifa field change is detected the defined script is executed Note If in the above example a notification e mail should only be send when the status changes from open to done it has to be defined in the script Event Timeout f a desired status is not reached a script can be executed with the Timeout event 248 Event Manager Example If for example a customer complaint is staying unprocessed the team leader is receiving a message The status unprocessed results from the field Status meaning that you define a filter Status lt gt unprocessed here gt Select the f
170. consistency check for the cRM project directory is performed afterwards This result can be exported via the appropriate button The following errors can occur Aview can not be adopted if it has no field of type Record ID Where a column layout has not been defined as a project default for a view or a container the column layout must be defined manually or automatically created depending on the setting by the wizard 30 WebAccess installation A project default column layout generates these in the cRM WindowsClient by clicking the right mouse button on the column title of a list or a container and selecting Set as Project Default for All Users from the settings context menu A view can not be adopted if no input template file extension dli exists eg database views which are only created for internal calculations 5 Then select those views that should be available in WebAccess All views visible in the Marked area are converted 6 Choose settings for compiling the list views Automatically take existing column configurations of list views and containers If this option is activated existing column configurations are automatically taken Enter a maximum number of columns to be taken To optimize the speed only required columns should be included We recommend to choose no more than 10 columns Automatically proceed and do not wait for confirmation if fields are found Views will automatically be creat
171. creased in this way because service packs no longer only need to be installed centrally This option is therefore only suitable for experienced users When a new service pack is installed on the server the client installation must be started again With the Repair option the client will then be updated with any new program files from the server Alternatively the service pack can be installed directly on the client 1 5 Choosing a database connection If the client installation was not carried out the database connection information of the server setup is used automatically gt To change or manually create the database connection select File gt Options gt Database Login gt Select the Database system 25 Preparation and Installation amp Database Connection Please select database system and server You should also specify the login data Database system Microsoft SQL Server 2005 2012 Database server SQLSERVER2012 v Logon Use Windows authentication Use database authentication Username combit Password ecccccce Under Database server enter the instance name of the database server on which you have run the server setup Enterthe login information for the database server Enter the database server user name that you had set up by the cRM setup standard combit This is not the cRM login information When using the MS SQL Server you can also login through Windows Authentic
172. ct gt Company Master Data Settings gt Database gt Database Structure Settings gt Project gt Events Settings gt Project gt Navigation Structure Settings gt Project gt Import Settings gt Project gt Properties File gt Provide for WebAccess File gt Reorganize 327 Appendix ile gt New File gt Open gt Open File gt Open gt Solution Center File gt Options gt Database Logi File gt Options gt DMS Login File gt Options gt General File gt Options gt Sounds File gt Save File gt Save As Window gt Switch to gt Calls File gt Options gt Change Password n File gt Options gt User Administration Window gt Switch to gt Info Center Windows gt Show gt Dupes Windows gt Show gt Navigation Windows Windows gt Show gt Status Bar Windows gt Window gt Close A Windows Views Comm Appoin Record Appoin Appoin Record Appoin Appoin Appoin Appoin Appoin and in Ribbon ments Tasks gt New gt Appointment for ments Tasks gt New gt Task for Record ments Tasks gt Show gt Appointment for ments Tasks gt Show gt Appointment List ments Tasks gt Show gt Task for Record ments Tasks gt Show gt Task List ments Tasks gt sments and Tasks Changes Context gt Cancel Changes Context gt Copy 328 Area gt Show gt Search Results gt Window gt Sw
173. ctions are not supported in WebAccess 31 Preparation and Installation 10 115 12 13 32 Buttons of type Execute Script File Execute Script Code Execute Workflow Predefined function Container Document Formulas and by that appearance conditions content links editability conditions program calls and input validations Display formattings groupings Embedded graphics that are stored directly in the input form Note The file icon of embedded documents and graphics can be customized To do this create an according PNG image and save it in the following path images FileTypes lt File extension png If you also would like to provide a solution for WebAccess Mobile select the mobile views to convert in the next dialog All views visible in the right area will be converted and are available in the WebAccess Mobile project navigation then Define the fields that should be displayed in the list and detail views of the corresponding view Define at least 1 field each You can switch between the views by using the buttons Next view previous view 2 lines can be defined for the list view Select the fields that should be displayed in each line by using the button Fields of the internal field type Unknown Boolean Picture Icon Embedded Picture and Code are not supported Hint The later record sort order in the list view is defined by the first sort order in the corresponding view in
174. cts as well as existing objects that are not locked or manually changed Lebel 3 Object settings Applies only to the one currently selected object Edit gt Edit Object The global font setting Level 1 and the object type specific settings Level 2 are defaults while the object settings Level 3 can only be set retrospectively for existing objects If you make settings on the different levels the settings for the higher level 280 Inserting fields and buttons always apply 1 gt 2 gt 3 With the button Defaults You can revert the settings of a level e g Level 2 back to the value of the next highest level e g Level 1 E Object Defaults x Button Static Text Groupbox Picture Listbox Combobox Edit Control Checkbox Creation size Appearance Width 100 This is the size in dialog units used for Arial Unicode MS 8 pt ee M newly created objects when created by the menu or Drag amp Drop Eont Height 9 Select Insert label with field name Default O Always V Minimal size Prompt Background col Never Background color 36 v Other options De C SHift correction v 3D Frames Edit the default settings for the controls here They will apply to newly created controls too e OK Cancel Default settings as style sheets Levels 1 and 2 can be used as style sheets As long as you have not set individual properties f
175. ctual records are queried A filter expression could have the following format Example 1 surname Mustermann mail mustermann combit net For this filter the LDAP server would return all records that have the name Mustermann and or the e mail address mustermann combit net Example 2 LDAP ocalhost app cRM project cRM Solution EN crm view Addre sses c D This URL would start a search query on the local computer in the view Addresses of the project cRM Solution EN crm and would return all records which have set the country to D If you do not know the complete name of the person being searched the combit LDAP server offers a wildcard search 243 General configuration Wildcard Effect Stands for a character string in a word of any length Example bit stands for all character strings that contain bit Stands for any character in a word Example M ier stands for All words with 5 characters starting with M and nding with ier i M er stands for All words with 5 characters starting with M and nding with er D Setting up an address book in Outlook Microsoft Outlook XP 2013 gives you the option of searching for address data in a LDAP directory This is useful because with the help of the combit LDAP server direct access by Outlook to the views of the combit Relationship Manager is made possible If you wish to have the LDAP server available as a data source in the Outlook ad
176. d First name and surname will be indented by a space leading space Assuming the variable FIRSTNAME were empty there would then be two spaces between SALUTATION and NAME which does not look professional in print If all three variables were empty the two spaces would still stand leftover spaces This line would not be empty and would therefore not be automatically suppressed With space optimization any repeated enclosed spaces are automatically turned into a single space Non removable This option is not active by default therefore spaces are not normally printed Activate this option if you wish to output a space e g between town and country Manual linefeed When this option is activated a row is not ended by a word wrap Instead it is ended with a manual line break Any existing paragraph formatting will be overwritten No carriage return When this option is activated a row is not ended by a word wrap Any existing paragraph formatting remains intact You can also place all information to be transferred in one row of the transfer template Wherever a line break should occur simply insert a break Alternatively you can use bookmarks that can be entered directly to mark places in the target document where information is to be inserted 221 General configuration Bookmark A bookmark marks a position in an Excel or Word document that you set and name With a bookmark you can for example mark the place wh
177. d Start gt Scripts amp Workflows gt Execute Workflow or through events Embedding scripts within scripts For commonly used functions it makes sense to store these in a central location so that any necessary changes affect all scripts based on them For this the embedding of scripts is supported with a special instruction of the following form 272 Script extension lt include file c scripts include vbs gt The instruction is replaced by the contents of the stated file To avoid possible syntax errors it is recommended to place the instruction on its own line Note All scripts embedded in this way must use the same script language as the main script A mixture of several languages is not possible and leads to syntax errors If you have saved your scripts within the program directory you can use the APPDIR variable rather than stating an actual directory lt include file 96APPDIR9eNnclude vbs Tip The variable APPDIR is also available in other parts that support scripts e g the input form the function definitions and within the toolbars APPDIR can be used as a placeholder that is replaced by the path of the application by the program e g C Program FilesiccombiticRMN PRIDIR is replaced by the path of the project in the same way Synchronous and asynchronous scripts Since the areas of application of scripts are extremely varied two different types are available Synchronous scripts
178. d solution with shared database and every mandator only sees his customer data A project with selection of the mandator after login The selection of the mandator is done by dialog Script with variable cRM Project Session Client This variable then can be used in the record rights Example Setting the variable via dialog in event Project has been opened sClient InputBox Please enter mandator name Mandant Login cRM CurrentProject SetSessionProperty Client sClient Please note the following restrictions Record references e g Appointments amp Tasks reference by e mail etc only work if the cRM project where the reference has been created is open The call detection is always executed for the current project The desired project has to be defined in an eMail Autopilot script Only one project can be configured in eMailClient Add In and LDAP Server If records of other mandators are hidden by using record rights these records can t be seen 13 3 Project Restore To restore a shipped project or to attach it to a new server proceed as follows 1 174 Yo u find zip archive with all necessary files in the project directory e g Medium zip for our sample project Medium Unzip it into the desired directory Create a new and empty database by using a database configuration tool e g Mi crosoft Management Studio or pgAdmin of PostgreSOL To do so right click on Databases in the Object Expl
179. d which gives information as to why the message could not be assigned e g No matching record could be found 115 Activities and Document management Requirements For the supported versions of Microsoft Outlook Tobit David and Mozilla Thunderbird refer to the System Requirements A working 1 N relation between the search view e g contacts and the Archive view e g activities In the document management of the Archive view right click on View then select Properties gt Document Management a document type for the e mail archiving must be configured for the file extensions msg Outlook or em Thunderbird David Settings gt Open the configuration dialog via Settings General tab Enter the login data and select the project for which the message assignment is to be activated You can also have the log file displayed by clicking on the corresponding button In Outlook this can also be opened via the log file item gt Search and archiving tab Here you select in which view the record is shown and in 116 which view the message is to be stored If no match has been found an alternative Search and archive view can be configured The target field for document archive is automatically selected For this the fields are searched in the following order DMS document Embedded file File link The first field found is used as the target field You also define the field defaults of the new record in the Ar
180. day 13 29 Clock Forwarded e mails 0 8 Script Output Through the Action menu or the corresponding buttons the check can be started ended or paused The current script status can be seen in the status bar The program window provides information about statistics edited deleted and forwarded e mails the status next cycle start and the script outputs You can also start the E mail Autopilot as a service To create the service enter the following command in the command prompt cmd exe as an Administrator Sc create eMailAutopilot binPath Path to the application Vcuep04 exe DisplayName combit eMailAutopilot Now the service can be started and ended in the Windows services Possible error message will be listed in the EventL og 251 Workflows and Events Attention The configuration must be setup with the same user and computer under which the service is running Otherwise the E mail Autopilot cannot locate the configuration file in the standard directory C Users lt User gt AppData Roaming combit cRM E mail autopilot settings The settings can be found under Settings gt Settings General Program start Define the status when the program is started started not started paused and whether the e mail autopilot starts with Windows Scan settings Define the waiting time in minutes before the e mail account is checked again Logging Enter the directory of a log file if you activate the logging
181. ddress manager Update Check An automatic check for updates can be activated under Settings gt The service pack can be run on any computer that the client installation was performed on 1 12 Migration from combit address manager If you have worked with the combit address manager until now the migration wizard will help you transfer as much information from your existing databases to the cRM as possible Note Please note that the migration wizard is only available in German and that the migration is only possible for a MS SOL Server and not for PostgreSOL You can however migrate the address manager database to MS SOL and then migrate this database to PostgreSOL using tools from third party sources If you operate SOL Server 2008 to 2012 you will need the SOL Server 2005 Backwards Compatability package Otherwise the error message SOL DMO object not found is displayed The installation package can be found in the cRM program directory The following transfer options exist Greatest possible transfer of data Document and contact containers are transferred into relationally linked tables The relational links are automatically set up in cRM The previous field types are carried over into cRM compatible field types Transfer of theexisting input form Documents and contact containers are turned into new table objects For the according views new input forms are created automatically As far as possible the address manager functi
182. ded are available as server side events Scripts and workflows should not involve any interaction with the user gt After you have defined the event close the event manager v In the dialog Workflow Server save the project to apply the changes gt Start Stop the Workflow Server by using the respective buttons The running Workflow Server checks for changes of the configured fields every 60 seconds gt If the user Workflow is linked with a Windows login e g the server s user account it starts without user interaction That is useful if the Workflow Server is contained in the Autostart group Note Normal logins sessions that do not respond for more than 10 minutes will automatically be cleaned up That does not apply to a Workflow session It won t be 246 Event Manager cleaned up as for all members of the group Administrators a hint will be displayed that an error occurred with the Workflow Server After restarting the Workflow Server the hint will be removed 16 2 Event Manager The event manager makes it possible to react to different events with automatic actions For this you can save scripts for each of the events offered here a Event Management Es ProjectStatus Events B gx E ProjectTaskAssignment Active Event Description Es ProjectTasks Es ProjectTaskStatus Es SalesAreas Es SalesDocumentitems Es SalesDocuments Es SalesDocumentTypes Es SalesOpenitemsCompanies Es SalesOp
183. description of the most important data types can be found under Data types in chapter Appendix The Field size if available sets the maximum number of characters that can be saved in the field For numerical fields the Precision property sets the maximum number of significant figures and Decimals sets the maximum number of decimal places Example The number 123 45 has the precision 5 and 2 decimals NULL values allowed If this option is activated a field does not require input Please note that you can only deactivate this option if there are no NULL values entered in this field yet Key field Only one primary key field can be defined in each table The option can only be applied to a field if no key field has been defined in the table yet To change an existing key field you need a database configuration tool e g Microsoft SOL Management Studio pgAdmin Note Create a primary key field for every table We recommend the field type uniqueidentifier MSSQL or Character of length 36 PostgreSQL In the view configuration give this field the type Record ID Unicode To be able to store UNICODE characters in cRM fields it is mandatory when using the Microsoft SOL Server that the character fields in the database are of type nchar nvarchar or ntext Otherwise the database server possibly converts characters that can t be displayed with the standard codepage of the database silently into other characters that ca
184. dge of the buttons and drag the separator up or down as soon as the cursor has changed into a double headed arrow 39 Getting started Project ax Info Center 5 Appointments Tasks B Calls Views 4 Firmen 4 lol Kontakte Aktivit ten e Verkaufschancen P Kampagnen g Beschwerden Produktzuordnung Adressen D WebElemente amp Dokumente E Belege Ss Projekte Produkte S Frageb gen Sonstige 5a Watch Results Q Active Users 2 4 Info Center Info Center appointments tasks calls These internal views can be hidden completely Further information can be found under User interface in the chapter General configuration Views The arrangement of the views can be configured under File gt Information gt Navigation structure Further information can be found under Navigation structure in chapter Configuration of projects Favorites Here you can add commonly used records to folders of favourites Further information can be found under Favorites in chapter Entering and editing data History References to the recently viewed records are saved here Furtherinformation can be found under History in chapter Entering and editing data Instant reports Filter Active user Here you can see the users who are currently logged in The Info Center is a central HTML based view that can be used as a general information gateway To open the Info Center click the item in the navigation
185. different fault handler activities 268 System activities This fault view serves as a container for any number of Fault Handler activities Each of these fault handler activities is responsible for handling exactly one exception and can accept any number of other activities These activities are executed when the corresponding exception appears in the workflow You must make sure that this processing takes place in a completely asynchronous manner For advanced workflow there is among other things the option of letting multiple branches be executed simultaneously Then it would be possible that multiple exceptions could occur at the same time which would then also handled at the same time By right clicking on the activity block and selecting Display sequence you go back to the Workflow view x E sequenceActivity1 i Y faultHand 3 amp View Cancel Handler 9 Lg View Fault Handlers faultHandlerActivity1 ShowMessage Dialog Y 9 Example Show message window when field content empty n the Workflow Designer select File New Drag the activity SequenceActivity onto the work area to create an activity block Drag the activity ReadFieldContent in the activity SequenceActivity onto the text Place activities here n the tool window Properties enter the field names of the telephone number e g Phone for the property Field name The value that is read out is automatically written in t
186. dress book follow this procedure gt Goto the dialog Tools gt E Mail Accounts or Tools Account Settings gt Microsoft Outlook XP 2003 Select the item Add a new directory or address book and confirm with Next Microsoft Outlook 2007 2013 Select the tab Address Books and select New gt In the following dialog select the item Internet Directory Service LDAP and again click on Next gt Now enter the name or IP address of the combit LDAP server Optionally you can log in with user data To change further settings click on the button More Settings gt Inthis dialog please enter the server name and if necessary a different port gt In the field Search base you can enter a base This is used when searching in the address book Close the configuration After restarting Outlook the combit LDAP server is available in the address book 244 Workflow Server 16 Workflows and Events Note Some of these functions require the Professional or Enterprise Edition A workflow is a process process sequence of operations that consists of individual activities One must distinguish between client side and server side workflows The individual activities are defined in the workflow designer or as a script A script is series of commands which are run are carried out sequentially when run More information can be found in the chapter Scripts and programming reference Some events also support Workflow files
187. ds Therefore the machine where the cRM setup is executed requires an internet connection for this specific installation option The DVD already contains the SQL Server 2008 R2 Express setup in German and English If the cRM setup is executed in German and the Windows language format is German incl subtypes Austria Liechtenstein Luxembourg Switzerland the German version of the SOL Server 2008 R2 Express will be installed otherwise the English version Usean existing instance of PostgreSQL on this computer The installation of cRM can only be installed on existing installations of PostgreSQL Therefore first download PostgreSQL Then restart the cRM setup and choose Yes in the dialogue to use the existing PostgreSOL database server don t know If you choose this option a recommended new Microsoft SOL Server Express instance will be installed see above Serial number and product key for the base license The relevant information please refer to your license certificate Serial number and product key for the extended license If you do not want to enter an extended license leave the boxes empty Installation directory As installation directory you should use an empty directory on any server that can be accessed by workstations and supports long file names Install options Select the install options in the following dialogs These options will only apply to the computer the setup is performed on these options are t
188. e or accordingly the editor Hint for experts The mail template is a text file into which HTML could be coded directly with an editor To use this option you should be fairly competent with the subject because the template could in some cases not be loadable 9 4 Automatic e mail archiving You have the option of archiving e mails in the document management after sending them The archived e mails can be opened at any time and this allows for complete storage of all sent e mails The description of the necessary configuration can be found in the section Document management in the chapter Configuration of views 9 5 Email Autopilot The Email Autopilot runs on a server and monitors an inbox constantly It can start a workflow that is triggered by a certain subject line With this for example internet e mail queries can be automatically analyzed and synchronized with records or entries in records can be made automatically If no associated record is found a new record can be created More information can be found under E mail autopilot in the chapter Workflows and Events 135 Output of data 10 Output of data When outputting data you have various options 10 You Single transfer of data with a transfer template into another application e g Word This output is suitable for individual letters for example since the printing contents can be changed in the corresponding application e g Word before printing For
189. e accessible If you would like to display the project number in the view MeterReading you can implement that with e g views triggers or continuous links and field presets in the input form Please note the information found under Optimization of the operating speed in the Appendix 3 View Settings Companies EJ Name Companies i Database table view Companies v Fields Relations Codes Dupes Function Definitions Auto No Auto Log Document Management Docum Relations 8 x Field name Relation type Foreign view Foreign key Relation alias a ID Relation N M CompaniesRelations CompanylD1 CompanyRelations1 ID Relation N M CompaniesRelations CompanylD2 CompanyRelations2 ID Relation 1 1 SalesTurnoverCompanie CompanylD SalesTurnoverCompan ID Relation N M ProjectAssignment CompanylD ProjectAssignments ID Relation N M CampaignAssignment CompanylD CampaignAssignment ID Relation 1 N Activities CompanylD Activities ID Relation 1 N SalesDocuments CompanylD SalesDocuments BusinessSector2 Relation 1 1 BusinessSector2 BusinessSectorlD2 BusinessSector2 BusinessRelation Relation 1 1 BusinessRelations ID BusinessRelation ID Relation N M ProductAssignment CompanylD ProductAssignments AccountMngr Relation 1 1 Users LoginName AccountMngr ID Relation 1 N Complaints CompanylD Complaints ID Relation 1 N SalesOpportunities CompanylD SalesOpportunities SalesArea Relation 1 1 SalesAreas ID SalesArea CreditPaymentB
190. e command Edit Redo Deleting objects Select the objects you wish to delete and then choose Edit gt Delete or press the DEL key All selected objects are deleted The clipboard is also available to you in the input form designer for the editing of objects With the clipboard you can cut objects copy them and paste them again In this way objects can be moved from one tab to another The exchange of objects between different input forms is also made possible The corresponding commands for using the clipboard cut copy paste can be found in the Edit menu 282 Inserting fields and buttons Selecting objects To select a single object use one of the following procedures Click on the object with the mouse The object selected is that whose edge is closest to the cursor To edit its properties directly right click the object In the Input Order window click on the corresponding object With a double click you will open the Properties dialog for this object While holding the left mouse button drag the cursor over the object you wish to select A thin frame will appear while doing this Release the mouse button when the object to be selected is completely enclosed by the frame Objects that are only partly enclosed and not selected To select multiple objects at once hold the SHIFT key and click the objects to be selected one after the other Altrnatively drag over the objects to be selected with the mouse All object
191. e displayed in the field URL By using the formula wizard you can dynamically create that URL Note that you probably have to 300 Specific object properties adjust the security settings in the Internet Explorer options if you want to use active content in web pages e g by adding the URL to the secure sites The webpage can also be loaded dynamically via script e g by a button For script access WebElements object an unique ID is generated for each Web Element which is displayed in the content dialog Further information can be found in the SDK documentation in chapter Web Elements Also the tab Properties offers multiple options Note The websites will be displayed inan Internet Explorer control It internally runs in the com patibility resulting in possible differences restrictions especially with displaying CSS compared to the standalone Internet Explorer application Container Containers are special list fields for displaying records from 1 N relational linked views e g a container in the contacts view which shows all of the records assigned in the Activities view For a container to be available to you you must first have defined at least one 1 N or N M relation for this view Through Contents select the variable to be assigned to the object The link fields are listed for which a 1 N relation has already been defined Further information regarding the definition of relations can be found under Relations
192. e formula editor select the desired variable and click on Insert to transfer it to the row lt is even faster if you double click the variable Confirm the row with OK In this way you can build up the desired label as in the example above You can also format every row by clicking it and then setting the desired font alignment and other properties in the right hand area If you have inserted empty rows you must turn on the property Inerasable for them Otherwise these empty rows are automatically suppressed when printing Confirm the definition with OK Save the label definition with File Save and close the List amp Label Designer with File Exit Note Detailed information regarding the creation of print templates can be found in the List amp Label Designer documentation Customizing single mail merge letters Single mail merge letters file ending crd are no different in construction than complex labels For this reason only the differences are discussed here The individual parts address sender logo and text are placed on the workspace as objects just as with labels Double click on the object Formatted Text to enter the actual text You can also copy this from an existing letter in your word processor 231 General configuration Formatted Text Source Free Text Calibri v 2 E 9 v Westlich v lr v 5 e FK 88 a FSFE DG me WYSIWYG Letter template DIN 676 Fo
193. e g name surname can be displayed you can create a fixed text field in the input form of the Contacts view Tip In fields of 1 1 relationally linked views you have the option of placing an input field rather than a text field in the form In the view however nothing can be entered into this field The placing of an input field has the advantage that it has a context menu as opposed to the text field If for example you wished to display a telephone number from another view in such a field the menu command Dial would be available to you Cascaded deleting and updating This plays a role if you have linked data such as addresses and contacts If an address is deleted the contacts associated with this address should usually also be deleted Cascaded updating is necessary if for example the ID of a contact type is changed in the ContactTypes view This ID should of course be changed in all relationally referenced contact items of the view Contacts For cascaded deleting and updating to be carried out you need SOL constraints Constraints must be defined for the relations between tables through the database system Detailed information can be found in your database system s documentation 191 Configuration of views 14 5 Defining codes On the Codes tab set the different attributes for a previously defined code field If for example you have set in the field types that the field Category should be a code fi
194. e history in chapter General configuration You can also set a Family name You need this to connect certain views as a group The maximum length is 30 characters Example You send a reference to a record of the view Addresses Management to a colleague This colleague however can t open this view as he doesn t have access but he could open another view the view Addresses Normal which indeed differs however contains the same records If these views were assigned to the same family the cRM will automatically open this view from the same family for your colleague 207 General configuration 15 General configuration In the following section you will be given an overview of further general configuration possibilities and the creation of transfer templates 15 1 Settings for the program start Select File gt Options gt General gt Settings General Settings EJ Settings User Interface Sending Mail Telephony Appointments amp Tasks H Program start V Start combit Hints Start combit address pick up Synchronize clock on startup with database server Restore last opened views Open Info Center Check for new version requires internet connection OK 2 OK Cancel Start combit Hints The combit tip wizard provides context sensitive information in the notification area of the task bar through a pop up window Further information can be found under Sources of help
195. e knowledgebase support area and check for updates through the menu File gt Help gt Support Advice about the support concept can be found in the internet under www support combit net 21 2 Overview of Configuration files data All information on this topic see the document cRM Config EN pdf in the cRM installation directory Docu 21 3 Optimization of the operating speed All information on this can be found in the Knowledgebase article german only Performance Optimierung cRM6 at www combit net de support kb 21 4 Data backup As your data is vital for your business we strongly recommend a daily backup If your data is being modified more frequently you should back it up even several times a day Consider besides other in particular the following data Setup the database backup directly in the database system the system database combit cRM System and if you use the provided standard solution the database combit Backup the entire project directory including input form definitions scripts transfer templates global export mport templates print templates e g C Program Files combit cRM Solutions combit_ Backup the individual user settings and possibly user defined templates in the application data directory e g C Users lt Username gt AppData Roaming combit cRM Backup all other files which are not stored in the project directory We additionally recommend a regular complete b
196. e opportunity to transfer your appointments and tasks from the time manager of cRM 2004 into the appointment and task management To start the transfer select Migration time manager in the cRM program group Thisitem is only available after an update installation and in German language only 27 Preparation and Installation Update Client installation The client setup does not need to be run again on the workstations This is only necessary when new functions are to be installed on a workstation or program files were installed locally In this case first remove any existing client installation through the control panel and run the client setup of the new version from the cRM installation directory again where you can then activate any new functions Update WebAccess Uninstall the old WebAccess installation via the Control Panel and then install the new version For more information see WebAccess installation 1 7 Uninstall Uninstall server Start the uninstallation of the server installation from the control panel of the server Then select the entry combit Relationship Manager 7 After confirmation prompt you can choose whether Solutions and personal settings should be stored Then all components of the combit Relationship Manager be removed Please note that the Microsoft SOL Server or PostgreSQL server used is not uninstalled Uninstall client Select the combit Relationship Manager 7 uninstall client program group
197. e spread of inconsistent notation When the code attributes are activated for the addresses you only have to set the code attribute you want to select when creating a filter later on The code attributes can also be created or deleted for a whole selection when re organizing the records Assuming you have a small manageable set of addresses and want to keep them in a single file The code attributes are a way of differentiating between supplier addresses and customer addresses classify events trade fair A trade fair B or other categorizations Reference customer for product A reference customer for product B Note When defining the codes you should make sure that you leave some codes empty between the groups so that these can be used in the future to expand without having to restructure If you have created a code field you can assign defined code attributes when entering data For example for products mailing information etc filters or selections can later be created according to these attributes Category Mailings Christmas Card Invitation Conference Mailing Level Mailing Level Mailing Level II To assign codes you must do the following gt Click in the relevant code field The previously defined attributes are displayed automatically Codes that have been chosen already are colored gt Now simply select the codes you wish to assign by clicking on them Tip If you wish to assign new code att
198. e that a user belongs to at least one group If this is not the case each right will have the setting No automatically If a user is a member of several groups their rights from all groups are added together Example The user is listed in the group Marketing as well as in the group Administrators With the group Marketing he wouldn t have the right to create a new project however he would have as a member of the group Administrators In this case the user gets the right and it doesn t matter that he actually wouldn t have it as a member of the group Marketing Any individual user rights Yes No always take priority over group rights Example The group Marketing generally is allowed to set appointments for other users If a member of this group doesn t explicitly have the right in his individual user settings then he is not allowed to despite his group membership Application rights and user settings On the General tab you can set the application wide rights i e the project spanning rights of a user Amongst these are the rights to create a new project or the creation of appointments for co workers These are rights that do not depend on any particular view but apply all the time If a user creates a new project all project specific rights are given to that user automatically The user does have to be able to change the project after all Whether other users can access this project depends on if they either A
199. e transferring to combit Relationship Manager dialog Configuring the address pick up gt Start the address pick up under File gt Help gt Tools Alternatively address pick up can also be started automatically with the cRM Further information can be found in the chapter General configuration gt Then right click on the address pick up icon in the notification area of the Windows taskbar and select Settings Create a new transfer target with the button New First set the target program in this case cRM Now configure the project and view 63 Entering and editing data Select the button Edit if you wish to edit an already existing transfer target gt In the following dialog enter first a username any passwords the required project and the target view Then allocate the fields Connection Settings ue aamini Password Project C Program Files x86 combit cRM Solutions Medium English Medii Select View Companies Field assignment va Destination field Destination format Source field or formula OK Company Text 100 characters lt Company gt Company2 Text 100 characters lt Company2 gt S Company3 Text 100 characters MatchCode Text 50 characters Country Text 3 characters if not empty Country Country Locale 90 vo ZIP Text 9 characters ZIP S City Text 50 characters if empty City and not empty POCity POCity City S Street Text 50 characters Str
200. eader can look different from the data rows or footer Different row layouts or definitions can be set for each individual row type Using special display conditions different row definitions can be activated as required All row definitions are defined in the same way and consist of columns that can be individually edited and formatted gt In the table contents dialog the individual row types with their different row definitions and individual column arrangements can be edited gt There is a tab for every type of row to set the different row definitions and columns of each row When you double click a row the formula editor opens to edit the row gt If no rows of this type have been defined yet you will be asked whether you want to use an existing row definition from another row type Sort order The sort order of a table can be explicity set in the table properties To display the table properties selectthe table in the Report Structure tool window Then select a sort order in the Sort order field All sort orders of the active view are available Properties x Data Source Companies Filter No Filter All Data Sort Order CustomerNo This makes sense for example when you are using groups so that the records are sorted according to the group If you do not define a sort order the current sort order of the active view is used Note Furtherinformation regarding the table object and regarding the creation of li
201. ease take into account the range of options available for formatting that are accessible for the menu option Option e g the number of Excel rows and columns can be limited to a required number using the option Exclusive data export from table objects With the Preview option you can view and check the real data on the screen before sending it to the printer If you turn on the option Save options permanently the newly selected printer will become the default for this print template Under First Page you can set with which page the print starts In the Pages option you can set a specific page range for the print separated with commas if necessary e g 1 3 4 10 Under Copies enter the number of copies to be printed Start printing with the Start button With labels you have another setting called Start position With the Select button you can set the starting position of the print on the first page of labels so that pages that have already been started can be used The selected starting position is displayed in the field Start position Printing with the preview All print outputs can be examined with real data in a preview window on the screen 142 Output with print templates g combit Relationship Manager Medium English Companies od Start Filter Output Appointments Tasks Data Settings Window Report Global Search Ha 97 OG do 100 i Print Export JEIRTEI Sa
202. eation of mail merge letters from the documentation of your word processor 146 Instant Reports 10 4 Instant Reports Note This function requires the Professional or Enterprise Edition With instant reports you can store print templates combined with filters and display them in the navigation for quick access Display instant reports Select Output gt Report to open a report from the report library Alternatively you can do so via the Navigation window The report will be displayed in the Report window Via the buttons on the Navigation toolbar you can browse through the records if the current record was selected as the data basis Via view properties you can also set a default report for this button More information on this can be found in the chapter Configuration of views under General Configure instant reports gt Select Settings gt Instant reports gt If you want to create a new instant report select New gt Decide whether the instant report should be available to all users gt Select the print template you want to use and enter a description Decide which data should serve as the basis of the report the current record the currently active filter or a certain filter that be defined via the button gt You can also choose a specific name that can be used for script or workflow access With the Checkbox Display in Navigation you can make the report available for quick access in the Naviga
203. ection list if a Word or Excel document with bookmarks is simply opened in the background without explicit selection as document template This procedure offers itself if you are creating a document as a template for the document management because you cannot select a document template in the transfer template while doing this gt To insert a bookmark in Excel select Insert gt Name gt Define You also have the option of directly setting the sheet row and column Line properties Non Removable Bookmark m Sheet 1 Row 3 Column 2 Further options In the lower area of the dialog there are general options available depending on the target program Options Insert automatically Define as document fields v Auto show window lacousgMng RF Save file AccountMngr Users LoginName Abst File name AccountMngr Users LoginName Assi AccountMngr Users LoginName Autt AccountMngr Users LoginName Dea v 223 General configuration Insert automatically The option Insert automatically has the effect that the data to be transferred is automatically transferred to the target program If the option is turned off the data will at first remain in the clipboard and have to be inserted into the target program manually Auto show window The option Auto show window had the effect that the window of the target program will automatically move to the front after the transfer Save file With Save file you can s
204. ed if a column configuration is found Automatically make a field selection if a column configuration is not available When this option is enabled automatically the defined number of columns is taken We recommend to choose no more than 10 columns With the option Only take fields on the first level no relations only non relational fields are selected With the option Ignore appearance and editability condition for buttons buttons can be provided in WebAccess even if there are appearance or editability conditions for these buttons 7 The list views are created During the conversion you can see the converted view respectively the converted container relation above the progress bar If the column configuration is not created automatically you define which columns are displayed in this dialog Use the arrow buttons to move those columns to the area Show which should be displayed in the list view for this view this container 8 The input forms are created During the conversion you can see the currently converted view above the progress bar Please close any possibly opened input form designer before this process Start the process by clicking the button Next gt 9 After completion of the conversion the dialog displays those controls that are not acceptable because they are not supported by the WebAccess This result can be exported via the appropriate button Please note that amongst others the following fun
205. eep scrolling position Keep scrolling position when changing from or to edit mode 3D Frame Controls without 3D Frame can be shifted together Preview Category Newsletter eMaikings Christmas Card Invitation Fair OK Cancel Checkbox With the checkbox object you can place logical fields check boxes in the input form In the field selection all Logical fields are available You can choose the name for the checkbox freely Properties In the field Text you can enter a descriptive text which will however only be displayed completely if the control is large enough In the Tooltip tab you can set a text that is displayed as soon as you move the cursor over the corresponding field Under Cont Link you have the option of linking the field with one or more fields to let their content change automatically You can also set a value as default that is used when creating a new record For checkboxes there are two options either the field is checked which corresponds to the field content T TRUE or it is not checked which corresponds to the field content F FALSE or empty Knowing this you can also re set checkboxes via contents link 298 Specific object properties Picture Picture objects represent the area in which an image can be displayed A variety of image formats can be displayed For the picture object all image fields in the active view as well as the option fixed
206. eet vo ZIPPOBox Text 9 characters lt POZIP gt vo POBox Text 30 characters lt POBox gt v Phone Text 30 characters Phone v Fax Text 30 characters Fax v Email Text 60 characters Email v CoemDrefarenca _Newmnaric Y Search record by e mail address if possible OK Cancel With the Automatic button you can let fields be allocated automatically If you activate Search record by e mail address if possible the e mail address is searched for in the target view If it is not found a new record is not created but instead the current one is completed with the new data Back in the configuration dialog you can extend the list of transfer targets in the same way as required gt To define a hotkey for a transfer target click the Hotkey column in the corresponding row and enter the desired shortcut gt nthe Settings tab set the required telephone number format that is to be used in the transfer You can also set whether address pick up is to be added to the Startup folder gt If you tick the Clipboard monitoring option address pick up will later notify you with a speech bubble if a text item in the clipboard is recognized as an address 64 3 12 Referencing a record Referencing a record With this function you can send a colleague or other cRM user a so called Reference With a reference your colleagues can reach the corresponding record with a simple mouse clic
207. efined for export too since the fields of the source file do not necessarily correspond to those inthe target file The links between the fields in source and target database can be made automatically or manually Export Wizard EN Please configure the export structure here A Bex s 4 field itype i OK ia Company2 T i lt Back Cancel With the buttons in the top section of the dialog you can change the column sequence delete columns that are not being exported edit columns append new columns not for Outlook export and can open the formula wizard with which you can define a formula expression e g to connect fields such as first name and surname For multiple selection hold the Shift button pressed Note Fields with lengths of up to 32kB are exported from the source database Comment and code fields Please note that fields of type Characters long memo fields can only be sensibly exported to a database format or a user defined format with column framing AND column separators The reason for this is that comment fields contain line breaks word 163 Import export and synchronization wrapping These breaks are used as separators between records in many formats text formats and many mail merge files If a comment field is exported with line breaks the export file will be brought into disarray by these breaks Code fields are saved in a character field using a seq
208. egelhofstr 104 1220 Wien AT Kindergarten Sonner Mainaustr 95 78464 Konstanz DE Show waypoints Cancel gt After you have chosen all waypoints select Start gt Route Planning gt Get directions to Current Record In the following dialog you can change the order of the waypoints with arrow buttons add the saved start address with the Home address button 85 Searching for records 86 delete a waypoint from the list with the Delete button Select Get directions to start the configured route planner for the Route Planning to the address of the active record With the button Configuration the settings for the base address and the route planner can be changed The changes in the base address do not have an effect on those already added Select Show points to show only the waypoints in the route planner General Filter 5 Filtering Records Selection A filter creates a selection of records i e the view after running the filter contains only the records that correspond to your chosen criteria You then have the option to edit the filtered records or to use them further in some other application The records can for example be printed as labels lists file cards mail merge or to amend them with code attributes categorizations or documents They can also be exported completely etc The search function is also a type of filter since the result only shows the records being searched for The difference i
209. ehavioui Relation 1 1 PaymentBehaviour ID PaymentBehaviour Y fal OK Cancel 189 Configuration of views gt With the New button you can create a new relation gt Byclicking in the Field name column first select the link field of the current view With a 1 1 relation usually select the foreign key field internal field type Global unique ID Takes the primary key of another record With a 1 N relation usually select the primary key field internal field type Record ID The content is set automatically by cRM gt Then select the Relation type The following relations are supported Relation 1 1 unique assignment of two records Contacts Activities ID ID Record ID Rae Record ID LA ContactlD Global Unique ID Example Every activity is allocated one contact Assign the foreign key field of the Activities view ContactlD with the primary field of the contacts view ID Relation 1 N Different records can be assigned to a record Contacts Activities ID ID Record ID p Record ID 1 ContactlD Global Unique ID Example Several activities are assigned to the contact Assign the primary field of the contacts view ID with the foreign key field of the Activities view ContactID Relation N M A person is assigned to a project and several other people are assigned to the project at the same time
210. el format In the print options dialog various settings are available for the Excel format To reduce the number of columns and rows to the necessary amount activate Only data from table object s on the Output tab Signing documents digitally Many conventional processes require by law because of the written form a signature for example with the documentation of declarations or for electronically transmitted invoices if they may be subject to deductions in accordance with the Value Added Tax Act The digital signature can also be used for preparation and submission of bids contracts of all types accounting related sales reports or for any other exchange of sensitive information In order to be able to sign documents you need signing software You can find the products that are supported under System Requirements in chapter Preparation and Installation gt Install the signature software and configure the interface between signature software and the cRM gt n the cRM select the desired print template via Output gt Single letter Mail merge letter gt Direct or Output gt Single print Multiple print gt Label Card List gt During output you can specify the output format using the various setting options The PDF format the TIFF and TXT formats are also possible is especially well suited or digital signatures gt In the following Save As dialog select the location to save to and enter a name for the file to be crea
211. eld then you must enter the different marketing categories here that you want available in the input form later gt Select the Code field gt Click any row to enter the desired text Tip If you have a code field that contains different groups of codes it is recommendable to leave a few numbers free between the groups For example enter codes for products from 1 6 and enter the status of the customer from 16 24 Leave plenty of numbers free after these codes too as a reserve a View Settings Companies Name Companies Database table view canna v e Fields Relations Codes Dupes Function Definitions Auto No Auto Log Document Management Docum Code field Code attributes x 95 No Description Newsletter eMailings Christmas Card Invitation Fair Mailing Level Mailing Level Il 2 3 4 5 Invitation Conference 6 7 8 Mailing Level Ill v OK Cancel 14 6 Dupe check On the Dupes tab you set the comparison fields for the dupe check and can activate the online dupe check for the corresponding view 192 gt gt Note A record is only recognized as a dupe when the contents of all fields Dupe check of the dupe configuration match Exception The option Ignore if empty for the online dupe check With the New button you will start a new row First select the desired Field to check for example Name Set the fie
212. elds in source and target database can be made automatically or manually The format set in the wizard can be saved and it will then be available under User Defined Formats and can be run instantly Format selection gt Select Data gt Import to start the import wizard Numerous different text and database formats can be imported You can find these formats listed in the import wizard 154 Import of records Import Wizard A Please select the application or file format you want to import address manager amp f factura manager Access eq ACT H Ej cobra a Tobit ax Excell O Outlook a Tet amp Wr Word EQ Other programs H O Phone CDs H O dBase Data sources ODBC 4 PDA Organizer Unknown format Import format Delete Processing of data from Microsoft Excel 9 Back Next gt Cancel With Data sources ODBC you can import from data sources for which an ODBC driver is installed e g Oracle Sybase SOL cobra Adress PLUS Access import through configuration of the ODBC interface When importing text files fixed or variable column widths the import wizard tries to auto recognize the format column and row separators as well as single columns from the defined data source with which the definition of an import format of text data is usually simplified considerably The import of address manager databases serves to join
213. elect the data source for an Access database this is done with the Select button Also enter a data source name and description Confirm the selection with OK and confirm the dialog ODBC Data Source Administrator with OK too 158 Import of records ODBC Microsoft Access Setup Data Source Name contacts OK Description Cancel Database Database C temp contacts accdb Help Select Create Repair Compact Advanced System Database e None Database Options gt Backinthe Select Data Source dialog click on the button Refresh In the list of databases the newly added data source is now listed in this example the Access database persons andin the right hand window the table persons contained in it Select Data Source Data source Table 3t Microsoft Excel 5 Microsoft Outlook David InfoCenter dBASE Files Excel Files MS Access Database SQL Server Visio Database Samples ODBC Admin Refresh OK Cancel gt Select the data source In some cases a username and a password are required If you have not set any simply confirm the dialog with OK Field assignment Since the fields in the data source do not necessarily correspond to the fields in the target a field assignment must be defined in the next dialog The assignments between the fields in the source and the target can be made automatically or manually gt Usually you can let the wizard do most of the wor
214. enerally it is recommended to make the general page size as large as possible because the individual tabs will have more space for the database fields To conclude that the maximum size is always the ideal would be wrong in most cases however There should normally be space for various buttons or fields in the input form next to the tabs 277 Input form designer Note If you doubleklick the entry Input form in the Tabs window you will access the general layout settings Tabs e EJ Input form 7 Tabbed pages C Communication 1 Account 1 Address 1 Private T Main tabbed pages TJ Activities CJ SalesOpportunities CJ Sales CJ Sales Documents 1 Products 1 Campaigns CJ Complaints 1 Projects CJ Relations 7 Tabbed pages 1 to Contacts 1 to Companies CJ Additional The page template generally starts at the top left of the workspace To change its size or position click anywhere in the page template to select it With the selection frame you can set the size and position of the page template Move tab The created tabs appear in a certain order in the input form This order corresponds to the sequence in the tab overview To move a tab to another position within the sequence click on the corresponding tab In the tab overview and move it to the desired location with the two arrows in the same window Create new tab By clicking the symbol Add new page in the tab overview you can create a new tab
215. enitemsContacts E SalesOpportunities Properties Es SalesOpportunities30Days VIAERUE Es SalesOpportunities30DaysW SalesOpportunityStages SalesOpportunityStatus If Field change SalesPaymentDurationCom gt Iv Field change Status change Vv Timeout Unfinished gt 5 days Description Status change SalesPaymentDurationCont on fields Status a al a Eg Es SalesTurnoverCompaniesC as Es SalesTurnoverCompaniesLY men mcus X Ez SalesTurnoverContactsCY File PRIDIR Scripts EventFieldChangevbs O EJ SalesTurnoverContactsL Y j E StatusTypes E SupportActivities E SupportActivityRelevance Es UserRightsGeneral Es UserRightsProjects Es UserRightsViews Es Users gt 2 OK Cancel To define an event gt Select File gt Information gt Events to open the Event Management Project specific events can be Project has been opened Project is being closed Inbound call Incoming call has been searched Menu command has been executed Hide menu command View specific events events can be 247 Workflows and Events View has been opened View is being closed Record has been saved Record is being saved Record is being merged Record has been merged Field change Timeout Menu command has been executed Hide menu command Appointments and Tasks specific events can be Appointment has been saved Task has been saved Menu
216. ent you can access various optimization options for the text transfer by e mail Wait time of serial e mails For serial e mails it can be specified that the mail process is adhered to after a adjustable number of e mails are sent and is not continued until after the specified wait time This may be useful for mail SPAM blockers have only a limited number of submitted emails per unit time permit to bypass or to relieve the local mail infrastructure at regular intervals 15 4 Configure history The most recently viewed or edited records are displayed user specifically in the history Further information can be found under History in chapter Entering and editing data The history is activated in each view s configuration on the General tab General Settings EJ User Interface Sending Mail Telephony Appointments amp Tasks History s Time period to keep records in history Day s Automatism for length of stay 10 Second s Sets the duration after which a displayed record is automatically included in the history 0 for turning off Delete history gt Toconfigure select File gt Options gt General gt History gt Selectthe time duration for which a record is to be kept in the history Olderrecords are removed from the history when the program is started For O days the history is only recorded for the current session When the program is started again the history will be empty For
217. ent Letter doc C3 a Transfer template PRIDIR DocumentManagement Cond ParentViewName Contacts Contacts Word ya Eile name ParentRecordDescription DateS Now 04y 02m 02d 02H 02i I AUTODOC a va Create new file without user interaction Additional field defaults The document management currently corresponds to field Document of type Embedded File Hence documents will be archived embedded in the record Attention Entries without a template are not available for later creation of new documents ial OK Cancel Nowsetthe File Extension such as DOCX XLSX or MSG Tip Create an Other documents document type with file ending so that all documents with any file name can be stored gt In Template select the file template using the folder button In this document template are contained for example company logo return address details etc 201 Configuration of views 202 Further information regarding file templates and bookmarks can be found under Configuring transfer templates in chapter General configuration In Path select the location where the documents are to be saved using the folder button With embedded files the Archive path does not apply With DMS documents the storage archive is set here If the save directory does not exist it is created With this a hierarchical storage structure can be created using a save directory fo
218. entitems SalesDocuments ID SalesDocumentitems SalesDocumentiD v Header Line v Data Line v FooterLine Group Header Group Footer Edit column and i line definitions Hr FX 44 f s s Line Definition 1 Name Line definiti A 4 Data ine definitions 8 LL CountPrintedData 1 Contents cSalesDocuimentlieendss 8 SalesDocumentitems Quantity Options A SalesDocumentitems ProductiD Products ID 4 SalesDocumentitems UnitPrice SEPSA Background Transparent 8 SalesDocumentitems Quantity SalesDocurr m A Export as Picture No 4 3 Line Definition 2 Font Catibri 12 0 pt A Format 123 456 123 456 Column content A lt SalesDocumentitems Description gt Rotation o A Text Format Normal Text A 4 Action Link URL 4 Layout Alignment Left Annearance Condition Alwavs Show Y lt gt Design Fade out dialog Edit dialog layout by mouse Headers are normally used as titles for table rows Data rows contain the formatting of the actual table rows containing the data that are meant to be displayed in the table 237 General configuration Footers are displayed at the very end of the table and can contain conclusive information regarding the data shown above them Group headers and footers are for the structuring of the data rows by using sub headers and sub footers All row types can be defined independently of one another Therefore the rows of a h
219. ents tasks When a new appointmentis created and a user filter is set the user that has been filtered out will automatically be added If more than one user has been filtered out this option is ignored and the user currently logged in is added Control of appointment conflicts When creating or changing single appointments an automatic check is started for whether the selected user already has appointments at this time This check can also be activated when moving appointments When selecting several users this process can take a while depending on the number of existing records Export Import Defaults for appointments tasks Enter the suggested value for the reminder function You can also set by how many minutes hours an appointment should be rescheduled as standard n the User area the Colors for different users can be made This is especially useful if you wish to display the appointments for all users Under Day week view you can define how long your workday is in the display Under time scale you can change the view to fit your needs e g set the weekdays as Monday to Friday for work use or Monday to Sunday for private use You can also define the time allocation in a workday as well as the colors Under Settings gt Resources you can define resources such as hardware vehicles classrooms etc as well as users You can add as many resources as you wish and each name can contain up to 20 characters Under Set
220. er that exact search is not possible in fields of the comment type Wildcard search To find data in which the search term does not correspond exactly with the search field or the start does not match use the wildcard option Wildcards are the symbols and that stand for unknown characters With these you will find what you need even if you do not know exactly what is in the search field in the record you are looking for Search in views Example The field Company contains Weberei Seitenmann und Sohn However you only know the name Seitenmann not the exact Company name and want to search only for this name Phonetic search With this search mode you can search for the sound of a term rather than its actual spelling If for instance you only know that the person you are looking for sounds like Meier but do not know if they are spelled with an ei ai or ay you can enter the name with ei or ai The search results will contain all variants of the name i e Meier Maier and Mayer Note The conditions for the phonetic search are not set up in cRM but through your database system To be able to use the phonetic search with the PostgreSOL database system phonetic search support SOUNDEX must be activated during installation Refining the search Theoption Combine with current filter in the search dialog can be used when you have already carried out a search and want to refine the results with anot
221. er to change the size both horizontally and vertically Moving Select the object Hold down the mouse button and drag the object to the position that you want You can also move the selected object with the ARROW keys on the keyboard The press of a key moves the object by one dialog unit in the 283 Input form designer direction of the arrow If you hold the SHIFT key while using the ARROW keys the objects can be moved by 10 dialog units at once Changing the size and moving with the dialog You can also change the size and position of an object by a position dialog You can enter values precisely here Select the object and choose Position and Size in the context menu Aligning objects With the menu command Object gt Arrange gt Align or the toolbar you can align objects with each other At least two objects must be selected so that the menuitem is available wa Ime UE yu H H iem 32i la xx f I Left right top and bottom The selected objects are aligned by the corresponding edge The object standing out most of those selected is the one to which the others are aligned Size adaption The selected objects are resized either horizontally or vertically to match in size The largest object is that to which to others are resized If you want to leave the objects size unchanged in one dimension select the option Unchanged Using the guide grid You have the option of placing a grid with guidelines on the w
222. ere the letterhead or the date is to be placed It is enough simply to locate the first row of a bookmark e g the field Firm The following rows are automatically hung on the end If you have set a document template for the target program and this template contains bookmarks these will be available in the list and can be assigned to the rows A S gu FILE HOME INSERT DESIGN PAGELAYOUT REFERENCES MAILINGS REVIEW VIEW DEVELOPER Sign in Bi Cover Page EH BE 3 EN T SmartArt 3 P Q Hyperlink x E Header a E X T Equation E lt imo Los m C Blank Page ac ag all Chart GP Bookmark O Footer gt 4 OsSymbol Table Pictures Online Shapes Appsfor Online Comment S Text Page Break a Pictures de Screenshot Office Video i Cross reference PageNumber goy m Pages Tables Illustrations Apps Media Links Comments Header amp Footer Text Symbols L 2 1 x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 1 11 12 1B 04 1 15 17 5 38 Bookmark E Bookmark name mi Signature Add Sender Address Delete Date Subject GoTo Sort by Name Location in Hidden bookmarks Cancel PAGE1OF1 85WORDS ENGLISH UNITED KINGDOM 5 If you insert a bookmark in a positioning frame for example to transfer the address fields into a positioning frame it is extremely important that the paragraph in Word in which the positioning frame is located is formatted through a style sheet normal formatting
223. eric value with a numeric value and not with a picture The Variables and Functions card contains a list of the variables which are available for the current object including the data type in the form of an icon in front of the variable and the available functions Double click or use drag amp drop on the variable you d like to transfer to the editing line The required variable is then transferred to the editing line with the correct syntax cRM Variables There are special cRM variables available for example general information about the project or the user You can find the variables and fields in the CRM sub folder in the list of variables 213 General configuration E Edit Formula ES Data and Functions Condition Text Date Format Number Format Operators v Functions BE 8j UlLanguagelD s 4 Project A Database 3 Numerical functions x 8 DatabaseSystem Mathematical functions A Description Date functions A File String functions A ID Misc functions A Name o Barcode functions A Path Conversion functions Company Binary functions User M Picture functions v cRM Application application variables cRM Application Path cRM Application Path cRM Application UlLanguagelD Current interface language Possible values are 7 German 9 English cRM Project project variables CcRM Project Company Contains all the variables of t
224. es are displayed and in brackets the number and value type of the arguments of the function On the right is the type of the return value result of the function Double click the desired function to insert it Amend the arguments as necessary These can either be variables or manually entered values Within functions special rules apply for the notation which are described in the section Advice on syntax rules later in this chapter Note Since calculations in transfer templates are more of an exception all variables are automatically converted to the value type String Text If you need to calculate with Date or Number values you must first convert these to the required value type with the corresponding functions More information on the available functions can be found in the List amp Label Designer documentation in the Functions chapter Following special cRM functions can t be found in the List amp Label Designer documentation GetCreditCardType retrieves the credit card type e g VISA GetFieldFromAddress Retrieves further information on provided address given as Country Code Street POBox and City e g AREACODE CANONICALCODE CITY STREET ZIP or ZIPPOBOX to open the PO Box directory Example GetFieldFromAddress Country Street City ZIP GetFieldFromZIP Retrieves further information on provided ZIP given as Country Code and ZIP e g AREACODE CANONICAL CODE CITY US STATE or ZIP
225. essssesssesesees eene mene enne nennen 239 GeneraliSetttigs titt esee eter da ea ai te de 240 SEIT M 240 Contiguration Ot the SerVer uu dee a He rece e esee 241 Starting a query from an LDAP client sss 243 Setting up an address book in Outlook s sse 244 16 Workflows and Events cccccceeeeeeeeee testes een 245 16 1 Workflow S rver ence ree a enn rhe da ve do pee d 245 16 2 Event Manager esee peri Peta ce es se dr ete Pee eue sent vena IER use ERE ebey 247 Event Field Change ee cie ae e een d aed dh 248 Event LIGUE d es Reed e oe Rte e m Regg 248 EventSn SCElpEs aci rmi dee m wesc edes mt bl inn oder o 249 16 3 Email a topllot ciii cnr t vray I HER ER ERR RR RE e HER tao 250 Start the e mail autopllOL certis e deeds 251 Esmiailtautopilotsetings ses emet cott mt bd nara nah Sek 252 17 Workflow Designer sssssseeeeeeee nnn 255 17 1 CRM activities ssssssssssssssssseen nene emen mene nene 256 The first activity of a workflow 257 Insert activite s iota i e p e e dea tind ER a 257 Properties ot an dctiVILy aee toe EE EU gaan HORE RAE ER 258 17 2 cRM WOorkflQw iu eoi ect eer eod ids be eet ge de Par De eor t ean 261 Properties of the workflow 262 Validity CHOC kiss ie dte ciet tee P MAMA AN d vete 262 Workflow with loops and branches 263 11 18 19 12 17 3 SYSTEM ACTIVITICS cece ccc ec ec ec cece ce
226. et whether the file in the target program should be saved after being created In the formula wizard you can set how the name of the file is to be generated e g with the start of the firm name Define as document fields In the selection list you can define Document fields The selected fields are available as bookmarks in Word field name Ref and can be inserted into a document template there Once a bookmark has been defined through the document field it can easily be read out with a REF field Proceed in the following way gt In the transfer template select all fields that are to be transferred to Word as document fields Click on a field to select it To select several fields hold the Ctrl key To deselect active fields hold the Ctrl key and click a selected field Field descriptions may not contain points gt Open your document template in Word and insert the field function Ref Document field gt in the corresponding places Example Activate the document field AccountMngr Insert the field function Ref AccountMngr in Word At this position the content of the field AccountMngr will be displayed gt The transferred document fields must be refreshed in the document after the transfer To do this select all with Ctrl A and then press the F9 key Fonts These options apply mostly to Word You have the option of formatting every row of the transfer template To do this select the desired font and font
227. ete To create a data source for the multiple record print proceed as following gt Create an extract with the records to be printed gt Select Output gt Multiple Letter via Word Processor gt Inthe export wizard create a new export format e g in Word format If you wish to edit or create a new export format select Next If you want to run the export template select Execute gt If you selected Next in the previous dialog you can customize the export format The address lines can be changed or added as desired and additional fields can also be added Further information regarding editing and saving export templates can be found under Export of records Only the fields selected here are later available in the word processor as multiple record print fields gt In the following dialog enter a name and target directory for the data source file Take note of the file name and target directory If you wish to connect the data source file with the main document you must enter the file name and directory of the data source file It is therefore important to remember this information gt The data source file is created e g as file with the extension DOC gt Open the word processor e g Word and create the mail merge letter As data source select the data source file just created e g Addresses doc gt Insert the multiple print fields into the document Please find out any further information about the cr
228. etu cs fe 154 Format SelectlODi i eie o die o t n ER T EN TU reg 154 Sele cta dataisout6G usce tiber c cen E HR RR ES 156 Field assignment oec a ee d eet e era 159 Name allocation for the format 16 Start tgrthetmppOFrt do cone denote epe rete a RUE RE err ode 16 12 4 Export Of TeCOrdS iiit deine e RE ex ebur Se ke eg edu TREE S regie eod 161 FORMAL SEISCTLONS ass fai vader ect e da ede ee es 16 Field selection and field linking sss 163 Name allocation for the format 164 Selecttarget lezioni deste ER e UE C Laer e e Deed 164 13 14 Save the target file in the template 165 Starting the exports epe e ou OR Rr o c D ED ER RR 165 12 5 Synchronization of records ssssssssseeseen eme 165 Synchronization of data ie oe etd d PUR sie eade 165 Requirements for the synchronization through cRM sssr 165 Selecting the format and data source 166 Allocating thie key fields o es rese rte ttt e etr e 166 Field assigntnelitsu c eet ed eb REP RM EAR 168 Select fields to be displayed 170 InsertinginewTeCOFdS aca ccrte o cer gue ep a de 170 Synchronization type only Outlook synchronization 170 Field allocation for re export only Outlook synchronization 170 Nanie allocation for the fortmatinssce co tette ces 170 Starting the synchronization and statistic run sss 171 Database synchronization with manual selection sss 171 Configuration o
229. ext search x orien dn re dole eee acta eid ees A le 96 5 6 Filter duplicate items dupes eeesseeeeeem 96 b 7 kastfilter sso eue IIT de re pe Ri III 97 5 8 Invert Titer incer orate o A RN edet 97 5 9 Transfer to phone manager sssesssseemene 97 5 10 Filtering all records of a relationally linked view ees 97 5 11 Manual filter er e E e Ee E Ec A Yen RR Eden 98 5 12 Filtering containers sssssssseseeennmmmmmmn nnne nnn 100 5 183 P rticularitles secreto reo ae oed Eee ce ers erue ex EORR 100 Appointment and task management sss 101 6 1 Scheduling appointments and tasks esee 101 Creating appointment or task 102 B rnmnders xa deme duet ada aed d or enu 105 Edit am ppointmerntoEtask uui im c eto M eder e 106 Outputting appointments and tasks sss 106 6 2 Navigation in the calendar sssseemm 106 Changing the number of days displayed ssssssssssssssss 106 S rtappointments and TASKS rere rci a o tea od pr lta 107 EIlteFS ra Re HD ERR ERE CEREREM Er RR RARE dels 107 6 3 Gonfig ratiori oci reper I aie re REPRE aes 108 6 4 Export mport iicet AA E enr v er EX ER Mo FEE OE Mundo 109 6 5 Link to external task and appointment manager sss 109 Activities and Document management sssssssseeeeeeeseeee 112 7 1 Working with
230. ey type is outdated 335 Appendix Category Date time digits 336 Data type MS SQL timestamp datetime bigint int smallint tinyint bit decimal numeric float real Data type PostgreSQL timestamp date time int8 bigint int int4 integer int2 smallint decimal numeric floats double precision real float4 Description Date and time Date Time with time zone Integers from 2 63 to 2 63 1 Integers from 2 31 to 2 31 1 Integers from 2 15 to 2 15 1 Intergers from 0 255 Integers with values 1 or 0 gt logical field Numerical data with set accuracy and decimal places from 10 38 1 to 10 38 1 Floating point number with user defined precision and exact saving Numerical data with un fixed accuracy Float from 1 79 10 308 to 1 79 10 308 Floating point number with 15 decimal place precision and validity range from 10 308 to 10 308 Numerical data with non fixed accuracy float from 3 40 10 38 to 3 40 10 38 Floating point number with 6 Category characters special Data type Data type MS SQL PostgreSQL char char character varchar varchar character varying text text nchar nvarchar ntext binary bytea varbinary Data types Description decimal place precision and validity range from 10 37 to 10 37 Character data of fixed length with a maximum length of 8000 characters Character data of
231. f MainDB empty Rule Prompt if not empty Rule Prompt Rule Additive Rule SecDB Data filter ya 13 lt Back Next gt Cancel Database synchronization with manual selection If you have chosen manual selection as a synchronization rule for some of the fields Rule Prompt or Rule Prompt_if_not_emtpy differences are displayed in a dialog gt Adjacent to the each field with the field contents from the main and secondary database you willfind a button gt Result With this you can transfer the contents of the field to the Result field As default the contents from the main database are 171 Import export and synchronization taken You can also edit the result here i e make amendments change or delete something gt Confirm the result with OK to continue the synchronization Cancel ends the entire synchronization 172 General 13 Configuration of projects A project is based on a database and a project directory with a project file file extension crm and view files for every view there is an input file and an overview list file 13 1 General Toopen a project select File gt Open Select a project file file extension crm Open the solution center and select a reference project Project information is available to you as cRM project variables in the form of print templates transfer form and input forms more information can be found under Using the formula editor in
232. f projects sssssssssssssssssssse 173 c MNECITITCDMCU rM 173 13 2 Separate data sets eee ese o dena ae reme a Dae dme an 173 13 3 Project RESTO sree feiss sehe treo eren debet dor teas dde yos ATA ded ade PORE EREES 174 13 4 Solution Distribution ssesssssssssssen me 175 1 375 Copy ProJecta zc co ERU Re eee ter tete e acess 175 13 6 Create new ProjoGt i sicie iir i a EN meme meme 176 13 7 ProjectitnpOrt ioter t rete ro OREA a a A R E 177 13 8 Project pProp rtlo Sain nini a mmm 178 ARI ONENEN E Ss ru se Me D Le dede 178 SGtHllgs s eia de beside be des e ev Ace o REPE 179 13 9 Navigation structure cccccccccecececec sees ennemi 180 13 10 Company master data ccccceceececeee sees ee an E in eei ar ii an E 181 13 11 Database Str ct re si toorn i ad i aN 181 Create Database table waive sce teet dien cage A een 181 Database fields tei cm i e t reet dte 181 Configuration of views cesses 184 14 1 View Configuration essssssssseeeenmn mme mener 184 14 2 View name and Database table view eseeenee 184 TASS FIelds 42 itor bere sheets one ERE oe Gage ie Lese ter edocet 185 Create New Change and Delete Fields 186 Field alias ottimo eem dentato Cid er 186 Inte trial field type anc sceceedeecetian omnes E a E 186 15 10 1445 Relations uei Lote a rere ade Eo aa Re eit caet edes 189 Detining relatiors om p e EC OSEE IIR de 189 Cascaded
233. fax number must be placed in the document as information These fax variables are defined directly in the properties window of the project The 151 Fax properties window of the project is displayed when no objects are selected in the work area Properties x Prax Parameter S Receiver s Fax Number Fax Receiver s Name Firstname Name Sender s Name Sender s Company Sender s Department Sender s Billing Code Note There are more possibilities for sending faxes such as with title macros macros that react to particular window titles such that of a fax program or through David from Tobit Further information regarding this can be found in the support area of www combit net 152 Replication 12 Import export and synchronization With these functions you can import data or datasets export to other programs or run synchronization To simplify the procedures a wizard is available for each that supports you even with complex field assignments The following options are available gt Import of data e g from other databases text files Excel files etc The data is turned into new records using a field assignment you define gt Export of data e g pass data to other applications create Excel files create mail merge data sources etc gt Synchronization of data with this as opposed to the import a possibly existing record is searched and synchronized or if it is not found is imported This allows you
234. find fields amp Xx Company ALT 1 ZIP ALT 2 City ALT 3 CustomerNo ALT 4 Search criteria Y Normal QO Wildcard O Phonetic Contains C Case sensitive if possible Include current filter A If multiple results then switch to list view gt Asin the normal search the records with the search term will be displayed after the search process has finished If multiple results then it switch to list view if the checkbox of the option is activated With the new button you can add further Quick Find fields at any time The first ten fields of this list can then be accessed with the shortcuts Alt 1 to Alt 0 More than around 10 fields should probably not be added since the main point of the quick search is to avoid selecting fields from a long list Note The quick find fields apply to all users The right for this must be set under Edit project settings Search for phone number or e mail A fuzzy search for an e mail address finds e mail addresses using a gradual expansion of the search strategy Once matches have been found the search is stopped with this step 1 The e mail address e g maier combit de being searched for will be found exactly that way 78 Searching in relations Finds e mail addresses with other top level domains com de net etc are found such as maier combit com Finds all e mail addresses for which the part of the address before the character sound phonetically
235. for Installing you can use the option Define these settings as default for new clients to define that the setup defaults will be used as the default for the wizard from now on The settings will then be stored in the file client config in the same directory By using the option Don t apply these settings to this system you can create the global configuration without applying it to the current system That makes sense if you want to preconfigure the client settings on the server The client installation can be started with the parameter quiet for an unattended installation through the administrator RunOnce etc The settings will be automatically applied according to the file client config in the same directory The user Administrator will be set for the first login Theclient installation can be executed anytime to change the settings Copying program files locally In networks with low bandwidth the startup time of the application can be improved by copying the program files locally onto the client If this option is activated the program files of cRM and the sub directory data will be copied locally onto the client so that cRM can use the local program files to start For the cRM trial version this option is not available We recommend this option only for networks with low bandwidth e g dial up connections in order to speed up the starting time of the application The work required of the administrator is in
236. for and can be chosen with the arrow down key If you have not yet started entering text but the cursor is in the field you can access the selection dialog with ALT Arrow Down Information regarding the definition of comboboxes can be found in the chapter Scripts and programming reference Working with field specific text blocks autotext With these the largest amount of typing work can be saved For any recurring item entries you define an automatic text block This autotext can also contain formulas e g for the automatic entry of username and date in a comment field During data entry if you enter the respective key the autotext will be filled in automatically During data entry your typing is thereby limited to a few keys Not only tiresome typing is saved by this method though With autotext entries any typos can be automatically corrected Further information regarding this can be found in the chapter Scripts and programming reference Note Especially in network operation conventions about which fields are used and how certain contents are expressed word for word are indispensable so that searching and extracting addresses does not become a chore and all users have a chance of finding a record quickly Auto log With this function you can let entries to different fields be made automatically e g about a successful transfer an e mail or an appointment More information regarding this can be found in the chapter
237. for his her groups View rights On the Views tab you can see an overview of the view specific rights Amongst these are the editing of records the creation of e mail templates import export etc Select the view for view rights If you select the top entry Multiselection you can define the rights for multiple views in one step Default right Read or Write for new fields Set default values for field rights if rights for a certain field were not det explicitly Record rights On the Records tab you have the option of defining rights specific to records For example you can define a filter for a whole group of users so that those users can only see a certain set of records in a view Note The activation of record rights will generally require additional resources on the database server This could cause a decrease in performance The reason for this is that the complexity of the queries is increased with activated record rights gt Select the view for view rights If you select the top entry Multiselection you can define the rights for multiple views in one step gt For a group record filter select Group specific for a user record filter select User specific or See groups gt By clicking the formula button you will reach the dialog for defining a filter Set up the desired selection here Further information regarding this in chapter Filtering Records Selection Try to use filters that are as
238. g for Send to or as a document management variable Activity for Cond IsNullOrEmpty ContactlD Contacts ID Name HCompanylD Companies ID Company Cond IsNi y e With a record reference you can directly navigate to a specific record Here you can specify the information that will be included with the reference Appointments amp Tasks With Cond IsNullOrEmpty ContactID Contacts ID Name HCompanylD Companies ID Company Cond IsNullO y Subject DateS DateTime DateS Now y m d 02h 02i PM ActivityType ActivityTypes ID y combit phone manager connection Info Cond IsNullOrEmpty ContactID Contacts ID Name HCompanylD Companies ID Company Cond IsNullOi y General Using Start gt Reference gt Send to send a record reference to another cRM user by e mail The recipient must only double click the reference and the corresponding view and record are loaded immediately If you wish to create a reference for your own use you can save it under Start gt Reference gt Save as or Copy to Clipboard n the History window references to the most recently viewed and edited records are recorded n the Favorites window of the navigation references to commonly used records can be saved To make settings for record references select the corresponding tab and do the following gt Setthe Filename if necessary with the help of the formula editor Fo
239. g Records Selection gt Select Output gt Send Multiple E mail The new e mail dialog opens Enter the text or open an e mail template under File Open Further information about e mail templates can be found in the next section Start e mailing under Start Send gt The first e mail address that isn t empty is found from the given recipient fields and the e mails are transferred to your default e mail client or your SMTP server Records for which no e mail address could be found are listed at the end of the sending process The sending of the e mail can be logged and the e mail can be automatically stored in the document container Further information can be found in chapter Configuration of views For serial e mails it can be specified that the mail process is adhered to after a adjustable number of e mails are sent and is not continued until after the specified wait time For more information see Configuring the sending of mail in chapter General configuration 131 E mail 9 3 Working with e mail templates or standard e mails For multiple e mails Campaigns Newsletter or recurring standard e mails it makes sense to create a template in advance in the e mail editor gt Select Settings gt E mails to open the dialog a Edit E mail Template HTML Format SMTP C Users Admin Desktop Contacts Samplela mtpx ES Fie Start Preview a Text EN M JE 0 Baj E VO Send B I U 2 S amp S 5 A Att
240. g options Please note that the merger of the records cannot be undone and that the records cannot be restored in the case of an error If an error occurs you can see alog file in the dialog window afterwards This log file contains information regarding the affected records for which the error occurred These records can then be manually edited Merging options Through the Settings button in the Merge records dialog you can define the project specific merging options When you confirm this dialog all changes are lost and the merging options are carried out again Rules Define the rules for comment fields code fields and other fields Memo fields Discard secondary record Only the field contents from the primary record are used in the resulting record Append to field content The comment field contents of the secondary record is attached to the field contents of the primary record 67 Entering and editing data Additionally with the option Attach from first difference on it is possible to ensure identical starting text is not duplicated When merging the contents are compared and the contents of the secondary record are attached to the primary record from the first difference found Replace field content Only the field contents from the secondary record are used in the resulting record Settings for Record Merge x e Define rules here under which two records will be merged to one The result will always
241. g the context menu item Send e mail or optionally through an e mail template 130 Sending e mail Further information regarding field types can be found in chapter Configuration of views When sending through e mail templates the e mail can be logged and automatically stored in the document container When sending directly through the MAPI standard client the new e mail dialog of your e mail client opens and the address in the e mail field is automatically used as the recipient The sending of this e mail is not logged and the e mail cannot be stored in the document container automatically To use direct sending select File gt Options gt General gt Sending Mail and activate the option U se MAPI Client for e mails via context menu For further information see chapter General configuration gt Select Start gt Send E mail or Output gt Send E mail The dialog for a new e mail opens Enter the text or open an existing e mail template Further information about e mail templates can be found in the next section The sending of these e mails can be logged and the e mail can be stored automatically in the document container Further information can be found in chapter Configuration of views Multiple e mail To send multiple e mails you must first create a filter If a selection is not made the e mail will be sent to all records in the view Information regarding creating filters can be found in chapter Filterin
242. ge dialog Since each sequential block of activities can be assign its own fault handler activity and not only to the overall workflow it is possible to implement hierarchical fault handling In certain situations a complete break in the current workflow instance when there is an exception is not necessary or desired After the fault handler s activity has trapped the affected exception the workflow execution can then be continued with the following activity For the fault handling proceed as follows gt Create an activity block with the activity SequenceActivity gt Open a fault handling dialog by right clicking on an activity block and selecting Display fault handler Tip To create a fault handling for the entire workflow open the fault handling dialog by right clicking on the green start symbol 266 System activities 3 sequenceActivityl amp sequenceActivity1 E View Sequence faultHandlersActivity1 c ber M View Cancel Handler p Mena ae 5 o Drop ius ond CH Write Field Content D rop FaultHandlerActivit y Here Y 9 Dragthe activity System FaultHandler in the activity FaultHandlersActivity onto the text Place FaultHandlerActivity here sequenceActivity1 faultHandlersActivity1 cp oE le mm D faultHandlerActivity1 Drop Activities Here v v gt Under the property FaultType select the exception which is to be reacted to here Cl
243. ghts are inactive this user will have viewing and editing rights for all fields Editing rights and viewing rights can be activated separately To change the settings Read and Write checkboxes with three different states are available IV Field right is set e g viewing rights Field right is not set e g no viewing rights F Field right see groups Particularities when working with field rights If new fields are added or are re named and have not yet been configured then the settings Default right Read for new fields or D efault right Write for new fields on the Views tab apply If no viewing rights exist for a field an empty content NULL is returned This should be noted especially for statistics printing L amp L formulas auto log find amp replace modify etc If no viewing rights exist for a field the field is write protected in the input form in the filter mode OBE and a search is not possible In the general filter mode the field is not available 315 User and rights management If no editing rights exist for a field it is write protected in the input form The situation in which a field has editing rights but no viewing rights is fairly unlikely but dangerous It would be possible to overwrite contents that you cannot see For this reason a warning will appear if this setting is made A possible use of this combination an auto protocol creates relational records but some of the fields in
244. gt Tasks Record gt Go to Record Filter gt Users Filter gt Appointments Filter gt Tasks Organize gt Sort Orders for Appointments Organize gt Sort Orders for Tasks Organize gt Import Organize gt Export Output gt Appointment List Output gt Tasks List Output gt Appointment Cards Output gt Task Cards Output gt Calendar View View gt Day View View gt Working Week View View gt Week View View gt Month View View gt Appointment List View gt Task List View gt Toolbars gt Default View gt Toolbars gt Navigation View gt Toolbars gt Filter View gt Toolbars gt Status Bar View gt Refresh View gt Go to Today Settings gt General Settings gt Resources Settings gt Categories Settings gt Print gt Lists gt Appointments 324 Appointment gt Edit gt Edit Appointment gt Edit gt Delegate Appointment gt Edit gt Delete art gt Data gt Delete gt Delete All Appointments art gt Data gt Delete gt Delete All Tasks art gt Go to gt Record art gt Filter gt User S S S S Start gt Filter gt Appointments S art gt Filter gt Tasks Settings gt Settings gt Sort Orders gt Appointments Settings gt Settings gt Sort Orders gt Tasks Start gt Data gt Import Start gt Data gt Export Output gt Output gt Lists gt Appointments Output gt Output gt Lists gt Tasks Output gt Output gt Cards g
245. gure history eroe se ye urne e PREX Dei anaE de 212 15 5 Sound iie ite tise eas eue oo o ek ean tee per eee 213 15 6 Using the formula editor sess 213 I iserting Varablesi no cte t D et e b t Ede 213 Inserting TUFICHOnS e oes e e o Wee 215 Advice on syritax rules nie aeter ct ae I t lent 216 15 7 Configuring transfer templates sse 217 General sengs sarete tct et E tet Ree LORD P EEE 219 Transter ITOS 3o iei nete eir Ree o b ie ede v t ec 219 Eine propeller tib trout osos tette ete es teras tii mbit 221 Further options i t e rm te d e dgio e ar 223 Bela eats inion E a aA E tena 224 15 8 Customizing print templates ccccccccecec eee eceeeeeeeeneeeeneeeenes 225 Gen amp rali i cent p HEU ERU ERREUR TREE 225 Page layouts dec td e EE de eil ei ete eec de e 226 Export M dia eL RE ER RO ERREUR 227 Template Si iien a ante rq e oin SU ATTIC en emp tt deuote dedo 228 Incl ding Pre ectssscitm i E o HE UE ERREUR RR RERO 229 Working with User Variables sssssssssssssssseeeeenenees 230 Customized label te gps de beo d ade 230 Customizing single mail merge letters sss 231 Customizing file cards s ere rre ae p ice 234 Customizing a list or report 234 15 9 Groupware uude pneri iG PI Ie Y RIP pp veces ER D Da Ea 239 Microsoft Outlook XP and above iiaa aaaea aaa Lae AERE 239 Tobit David 8 and abOVe iei e ede e eet 239 15 10 combit LDAP server
246. h the New button the subject search can be configured gt Enter the e mail subject for which the e mail autopilot is to search in the inbox Under Mode the different search mechanisms are available Identical The subject must be exactly the same as the entry Not case sensitive 253 Workflows and Events Example If the subject of the eMail in the inbox is Re Newsletter 5 you have to specify following subject to search Re Newsletter 5 Wildcard You can use wildcards in the definition of the e mail subject any number of characters and one character Example If the subject of the eMail in the inbox is Re Newsletter 5 you have to specify for example following subject to search Newsletter Regular expression The recognition is carried out through text analysis of the e mail subject with the help of regular expressions Example If the subject of the eMail in the inbox is Re Newsletter 5 you have to specify for example following subject to search AW Re Newsletter 0 gj Define the action that is to be carried out when an e mail with the subject defined above is found Select the script that is to be run n the Forward to field an e mail address can be given to which the e mail is forwarded after processing The forwarding is initiated in the script Script objects When starting the script a mail object is made available with which each e mail can be accessed
247. haracter Allows the intake of references to combit factura manager documents Supports the opening of these documents by double click in the browse view and container The references must have the format fmw Account Name gt lt Document Type gt lt Document No gt permitted values for Document Type are AN AU RE LI or BE Quotation Contract Invoice Delivery receipt Order Creation User cRM user that created the record cRM user names can be up to 20 characters This should be respected when setting the field length Modification User cRM user that last made changes to the record cRM user names can be up to 20 characters This should be respected when setting the field length Creation Date Date on which the record was made Set automatically by cRM Modification Date Date on which changes were last made to the record Set automatically by cRM Record ID This is a globally unique ID This field type should be allocated in every view A new record can otherwise not be displayed after the first save because it cannot be found in the table view This can only be allocated once within a view and typically also serves as primary key field The contents are set automatically by cRM not the database system To use record references or to undertake a Windows CR synchronization this field type is essential Tip To optimize operating speed use explicit indexes from your database system for the primary key field
248. he company master data cRM Project Database Name of the database on which the project is based cRM Project DatabaseSystem Current database system Possible values are 3 Microsoft SOL Server 10 PostgreSQL cRM Project Description Project Description cRM Project File Projectfile Path crm cRM Project Name Project name cRM Project Path Project Path CRM Project Session Client Value can be set for each session per client eg via a query dialog This variable could be used e g for record rights cRM User User Master Data Only in print templates cRM View DBTable Name of the database table on which the view is based cRM View Family Family name of the view cRM View Name View name Only in the input form designer cRM AppDir cRM Application directory cRM FormMode Current Status of the input form Possible values are 0 Not in edit mode 1 Edit mode 2 input form designer 3 Edit mode after creation of a record 214 Using the formula editor cRM InEditMode Current status of the edit mode Possible values are True or False cRM PrjDir Project directory Inserting functions With the help of the formula wizard you can insert functions into the row currently being edited With these functions string text number and date manipulations can be made On the corresponding tab you are shown alist of the available functions On the left the function nam
249. he document a specific message variable Action Direction are available unknown 1 incoming 2 outgoing Tip In the included reference project the fields Direction and Type are relationally linked with the views DirectionTypes and Contactlypes The meanings of the field contents should therefore be taken from the corresponding views e g Type 2 e mail Automatic e mail archiving You have the option of activating the automatic archiving of e mails All e mails that are send directly through cRM are then automatically archived in the document management gt Requirements In the view from which you send your e mails in the view configuration under the General tab select the target view for the automatic e mail storage e g the Documents view 203 Configuration of views gt defined See also Archiving messages from eMail Client in chapter Activities and Document management 14 11 Document information You can link the document information title author etc with database fields in the Document Info tab Linking of file type or file name is mandatory with the Embedded file field type The document information is automatically read and stored in the appropriate fields when the file is embedded With this you also have the option of filtering these fields With the File Reference field type the document information is automatically read and displayed so no links are
250. he property Value Drag the activity Dial onto the link below the activity ReadFieldContent n the tool window Properties enter the value the result of the previous activity ReadFieldName for the property Telephone number Open the connection dialog by clicking on the button In the upper area of the dialog open the treeview and select the property Value of the activity ReadFieldContent 269 Wor gt gt gt kflow Designer Open a fault handling view by right clicking on an activity block and selecting Display fault handler Drag the activity System FaultHandler in the activity FaultHandlersActivity onto the text Place Activities here Under the property FaultType select the exception which is to be reacted to here Clicking on the button takes you to a dialog in which all available standard NET exceptions are available Select the exception System ArgumentNullException from the assembly mscorlib The activity that is to be carried out in the case of a fault is still missing Drag the activity ShowMessageWindow in the activity faultHandlerActivity onto the text Place activities here and enter a message text e g No telephone number available Open the Workflow view by right clicking on the activity block and selecting Display sequence Run fault handling in a controlled manner There may be cases where you want to branch out into this sort of fault handling routine For example
251. he width of the drop down list is adapted to the width of the contents Important When inserting combobox objects you should always ensure that at least one row but preferably several rows of space exist under the input line for the drop 295 2 Combobox Salutation EJ Input form designer down list The area for the combobox object underneath the input line can of course cross over other objects ce Properties Extended pm Tooltip Appearance Entries Preset Options Autotext Cont Link Program Input Validation Combobox entries 8 amp x Q9 9 Pe eC Herrn Mr Ms Mrs Frau Hint These properties are field specific thus affecting all objects displaying this database field Preview 2 OK Cancel With combobox objects you could for example pre define the contents Mrs Mr Miss etc for the TITLE field Instead of having to type in these contents in the input form repeatedly later you can select them quickly from a list with the mouse or keyboard With an automatic completion mechanism the first similar item in the combobox is searched while you type It can be selected by pressing the arrow down button For combobox objects all fields of the active view are available in the field selection with the exception of the internal fields Properties In the Properties tab with the option Sorted list you can control whether the listed items are to appear i
252. her dialog in which you can change your input manually for the situation in which neither entry is correct In this way you can use a combination of both entries 3 5 Relationally linked records You can connect records in any way For example you can assign a contact to a company and different activities or projects Relation 1 1 Clear assignment of two records Example Every activity is assigned exactly to one contact which means you connect an activity to a contact Relation 1 N Assignment of multiple records to one record Example Each contact can be assigned to any number of activities which means you connect multiple activities to one contact Relation N M Multiple records can be assigned to one single record Since the records are clearly connected to another record 1 1 by using this relation by double clicking you can jump directly from one container to this record By selecting a 1 N relation the link view will automatically open even if you double click on a field in the target view Example Each contact can be assigned to any number of projects The projects should also be able to be assigned to multiple contacts Therefore you need a link 52 Relationally linked records view where the assignment of contact and project is saved If you select an N M relation for both 1 N relations you can for example jump directly to the connected project by double clicking the project name in the project container of the cont
253. her search term If this option is not selected the previous search is discarded and the new search will encompass all records Example You have found several records of the company Sunshine Agency but you need only the ones of the sales department Execute another search this time on the field Department with the content sales and choose the option Combine with current filter Quick Find This type of search works like a normal search and gives the user a faster and even easier searching process So that you don t have to select the required fields from the list every time a search is run you can set up which fields you will search most frequently All fields of the active view and all fields of those views directly linked through a 1 1 relation are available to you gt Select Start gt Quick Find In the list view simply beginning to type will trigger the Quick Find dialog gt To carry out a quick search select the field you wish to search In the search criteria enter the search term gt The variants normal wildcard or phonetic are still available to you in the search options Further information regarding these can be found in the previous sections 77 Searching for records gt f required you can set whether the search is to be case sensitive and whether a previously run filter is to be used as a basis for the search using the corresponding checkboxes Quick Find EJ Quick
254. herefore not relevant for an installation directly on the server Select word processor Select the word processor used so that the Transfer Template can be set up Database Configuration Enter the username and password with which all cRM clients will access the database server This user is automatically created by the installation assistant After installation is complete start the program client exe from the appropriate client in the cRM directory If you carry out a single workstation or notebook installation the client installation is not necessary 21 Preparation and Installation Assigning rights in the network You have to give permissions for the different users to be able access the cRM files from their network software To give away user rights in the network it makes sense to manage the projects and views of cRM in a separate sub directory For this the users must be given extensive rights If you have separated the projects from the other files you only have to give the rights to the project directory and not the program directory A user you should for example be given the rights RWCMEF i e Read Write Create Modify and File Scan for the project directory You can set exactly what rights are given to the user for each individual directory Every user should have the File Scan right for the whole of the cRM directory Setting up the users gt To set up the users in cRM start the prog
255. hese who are not coming from retail sales gt Choose the field Department as expression contains and as value personnel department gt Press Add and then press OR gt Keep Department selected and change its value to management Again press Add gt Now choose the operator AND followed by NOT gt Now you select the field BusinessSector change its expression to equal to change its value to retail sales and press Add gt Now you have to insert parenthesis in the filter expression to make clear the order of the execution When using the operators OR and AND you always should place them around the expression A OR B respective before the AND In this case place the opening parenthesis to the start and the closing parenthesis after management gt Then press Execute Example for a linked filter with ZIP codes You want to get all records from your addresses in Germany whose ZIP code area lies between 70000 and 89999 gt Asfield ZIP as expression greater equal as value 70000 gt As operator you choose AND gt As field ZIP as expression less equal as value 89999 gt As operator you choose AND gt Asfield COUNTRY as expression equal as value D Example for the AND before OR Rule gt NAME Smith AND COUNTRY A OR CITY B means that all records will be filtered whose name is Smith AND whose city is A Furthermore all records will
256. hether the current field content e g combit Software GmbH or the field alias or field name if the field alias is empty is displayed for example Company E Text field Name EJ Text je Properties Extended pe Appearance Output of field content B Output of field name automatically displays the alias name of the field If it is changed later additional customizing in the input form is avoided 2 OK Cancel If the field has been inserted via the entry fixed text or formula from the field selection you have the option of defining a static text or a formula with the help of the formula wizard 293 Input form designer f E Text field Name m Text FE Properties m Extended F2 Appearance Static text Name 5 Text by formula The text will only be displayed completely if the control s size is large enough Watch the preview In the tab Properties by marking Left Centered or Right you can set the alignment of the text You can also set whether word wrapping is allowed in this dialog with the function 3D Frame you can influence the appearance Input field Input field objects are the traditional objects in input forms With input field objects you set the area in which the field contents of your view are displayed and edited Properties In the Properties you have the same settings Left Centered and Right w
257. hip manager net CareDreferans 2 i i Transfer entire content With the button Use the whole primary record as result or Use the whole secondary record as result the entire content of one record can be used in the result 66 Merging records Using individual field contents For differing field contents conflicts you decide which contents are to be used in the resulting record Fields for which you do not have write permission are marked grey gt To transfer a single field content of the primary record into the resulting record double click the corresponding conflict in the primary column or click the Use the field of the primary record as result button gt To transfer a single field content of the secondary record into the resulting record double click on the corresponding conflict in the secondary column or click the Use the field of the secondary record as result button When individual field contents are used in the resulting record the origin is shown by color Blue Field content from primary record Green Field content from secondary record With the Memo and Code field types you can open a special transfer dialog by double clicking the field In this dialog you can edit the resulting field directly gt Embedded documents and embedded files cannot be displayed Starting the merger With the OK button you start the merging of the records The process is done according to the mergin
258. hiving If a filter is active in the Search view a new view is opened for the display Try to archive messages to CC recipients also This option is only evaluated for sent messages Archiving options Archive message only when a record is clearly found This ensures that the message is only archived if a clear match has been found If no match or multiple matches have been found the message is not archived A corresponding entry is created in the log file Archive message for all data records found If more than one data record is found manually select the record If multiple matches have been found the desired record can be selected via a dialog A selection may not be made more than once Message selection is only supported by Tobit David Successfully archived messages can be provided with a selection in David Select the desired selection from the list e g Archive Addresses Phone numbers tab You will find different options for news archiving Personal e mail addresses Enter your own e mail addresses here so that a differentiation can be made between sent and received e mails during the search The use of wild cards and is supported So you can include for example all of your company s own email addresses in the search archiving Email addresses to be ignored Enter those email addresses that should be filtered during archiving search The use of wild cards and is supported So you can ignore for examp
259. however are only considered if the selected online directory does support them gt The results will be displayed in the browser Note Since structures and addresses of websites can change very quickly it is possible that websites and services will become inaccessible without warning 4 6 Search in phone directory You can import data from telephone CDs into your view and exchange data through an interface Many different phone directories are supported With this you can search directly in online telephone and trade directories please read the note and transfer data from up to date telephone CDs to amend or correct your contacts list With this you can transfer data directly from the current phone directories or you can amend or correct your existing contacts In case of a telephone CD the telephone CD must be in the CD ROM drive and the CD must be installed before hand Configuring the phone directory interface gt Open Settings gt Directories RoutePlanners gt Inthe Phone Directory tab first select the telephone directory that you wish to use from the top field Also enter a path to the corresponding executable This control might be deactivated for some directories The program will establish the necessary connection itself in this case Depending on which directory you have chosen you are given the relevant information about the search options available for this directory e g whether search is only by firm name or
260. iable lt cRM User Groups gt The group names are placed in single quotes and are separated by commas In this way a group specific web view or group specific input and display fields can be created Example if StrPos cRM User Groups Sales lt gt 1 The simple quotation marks should be part of the formula to be able to differ clearly between Sales from Sales2 20 2 Rights management The rights management split into project spanning project specific view specific record specific and field specific rights These rights can be set for every user individually or for several users at once through groups 310 general rights Definition of rights gt Select a user or group gt Select the view for view rights record rights and field rights entry Multiselection you can define the rights for multiple views in one step Rights management If you select the top Sers AIG ministration iR Users Rights Administrati 8 HS X amp I Master Data General Project Views Records Fields Haye 4 C User View Multiselection v 8 Administrator Usert E General c Select the desired views a User2 Open View Users Show View in Navigation Selection BY BR 20 User Edit Record r X amp Workflow Create Record FE Gi 4 da Delete Record I ActivityTypes BA Users Delete All Records BusinessRelations
261. ic A is empty Project Z4 E AccountMngr A DMS User is not empty au Activities E Document contains full text Eg BusinessRelation A Document Author contains full text fuzzy E CampaignAssignments A Document Commer E Company E Document Creationl cl CompanyRelations A Document FileComr Case Sensitive a Complaints Al Nactument FileName Y amp ComPreference E E Tostachteislions cD AND Nor OR v x C ContactRelations2 E Gender 1 CONTAINS Activities Document N Project 24 E LeadSource E MaritalStatus E PaymentTerm v gt The expressions of the different views will be concatenated with AND Include current filter Q Other options v Load Save Execute Cancel Adding the login name to the filter You also have the option to add the login name of the current user to the filter conditions To use this variable click on the arrow button next to the Value field and select User Login Name With this variable you can for example save a filter expression in which the account manager field is searched for a particular user It is not necessary to add the name of the 91 Filtering Records Selection attendant into the filter conditions by using the variable the filter automatically finds the login name of the current user Frequency statistics You can have a frequency statistic displayed for each field This allows target groups to recognized each other more quickly a
262. icking on the button takes you to a dialog in which all available standard NET exceptions are available For cRM activities always select System ArgumentNullException in the assembly mscorlib 267 Workflow Designer 632 Activity Name ErrorException Description Enabled True El Misc Fault Fault Type System Argument Null Exception Name Please specify the identifier of the activity It has to be unique in the workflow The activity that is to be carried out in the case of a fault is still missing Drag the desired activity e g ShowMessageWindow in the activity faultHandlerActivity onto the text Place activities here amp sequenceActivity1 im faultHandlersActivity p oe le faultHandlerActivity1 ShowMessage F Dialog Y gt Thetype of the fault is fixed by the System ArgumentNullException However the fault message can be read out by connecting to this FaultActivity and thus be issued e g into a message window 654 El Activity Name ShowMessageDialog Type Message BoxActivity Activated True Description El Parameter El Hint 3 Activity faultHandlerActivity1 Path Fault Message Name faultHandlerActivity 1 Path Fault Message Title 3 Fault Hint Hint If necessary drag an additional activity System FaultHandler in the activity faultHandlersActivity into the white input field By clicking on the blue arrow buttons you can switch between the
263. ield contents you can decide in a dialog which contents to keep and modify the result if necessary Rule Prompt if not emtpy Same as Rule Prompt except empty source fields are ignored Formula You can also define formulas for the synchronization rules this is the reason why Rule MasterDB exists if you were wondering Example Rule SlaveDB if not empty as formula iflen atrim COMPANY 0 Rule MasterDB Rule SlaveDB Example Decision on the basis of field length the longer field overwrites the shorter one if len atrim MasterDB NOTE gt len atrim NOTE Rule MasterDB Rule SlaveDB The data filter under the dialog refers to the data in the secondary database and so only the records that correspond to the filter conditions are synchronized If the filter expression is empty all records are synchronized Note If your main database contains relations based on RECORDID and GROUPID these fields must be linked with a field of the same status otherwise you will be 169 Import export and synchronization shown a corresponding warning that hierarchical information is being lost in the import of new records Select fields to be displayed In the following dialog you can select the fields that are to be displayed during this synchronization process when the synchronization rule Rule Prompt takes effect These are shown to the user for orientation while synchronization is taking place It is usually most sensi
264. ield to watch from the select list Fields of type Date or Time are available gt Enter at which timeout the actions of the selected script workflow should be executed It can be specified in minutes hours days months or years Properties V Active Description unfinished 5 days If a Timeout of field ModifiedOn for J Day and following criteria is not met VY then Execute Script File Ad File PRIDIR Scripts timeout vbs Dao f Define a filter in the General Filter or Free SOL Query dialog by the button Select data With this filter you define which criteria shouldn t be met Example The status unprocessed results from the field Status meaning that you define a filter Status lt unprocessed here Attention The action will be executed for all records that match the filter and the defined timeout That means that in the filter or script workflow it has to be considered if the action should only apply to certain records e g for records of a certain date or later gt Ifa timeout is detected the defined script is executed The event is executed once per record Therefore for each record it is stored when the event has happened in the system database Events in Scripts For the completed scripts a new object Event is available which gives information about the current event It has the following properties Project contains the project object that the event is regarding
265. ine the print settings see chapter Output Settings Click on Start 140 Output with print templates Output Settings If you select a print template with Output gt Print Multiple Print or Output gt Print Letter Print Multiple Letters the dialog for the output settings is generally displayed Contacts Address label 1x7 endless Output of all records including their possible relations Print target C An OneNote 2013 senden Direct to Q Preview v Options Save options permanently Options First page 1 Copies 1 Pages 9 All Page range s Enter pages or ranges separated by comma if necessary e g 1 3 4 10 Print All selected pages v Start position Line 1 Column 1 2 2 Start Cancel You have various options to choose from A printer is already set in the print template With the Change button you can choose a different printer If you have defined multiple layouts you can choose for every layout a different printer and under Copies enter the number of copies to be printed Print Target Region Printer Copies Portrait format d HP Color LaserJet 2500 PC 1 Landscape format SHARP AL 1555 1 Standard layout amp Tobit Image Messaging 1 Direct to Q Preview Options Save options permanently 141 Output of data Under Direct to you can select the output format e g preview printer Excel Pl
266. ing Start gt Actions gt Route Planning gt Set Al Records in Filter as Waypoints Start gt Actions gt Route Planning gt Set Curren Record as Endpoint Start gt Actions gt Route Planning gt Set Curren Record as Starting Point Start gt Actions gt Route Planning gt Set Curren Record as Stopover Start gt Actions gt Scripts amp Workflows gt nn Application Script Workflow Start gt Actions gt Scripts amp Workflows gt Execute Script or Settings gt Manage gt Scripts gt Execute Start gt Actions gt Scripts amp Workflows gt Execute Workflow or Settings gt Manage gt Workflows gt Execute Start gt Actions gt Send E mail Start gt Filter gt Active Last Filter or Filter gt Compose gt Last Filter Start gt Filter gt Create Filter or Filter gt Compose gt General Filter Start gt Find gt Find Start gt Find gt In Directories gt Find Record in Online Directories and Social Media Start gt Find gt In Directories gt Find Record in Phone Directory Start gt Find gt In Directories gt Manual Transfer from a Phone Directory Start gt Find gt Quick Find Start gt Find gt Replace Start gt Find gt Special Find Start gt Record gt Edit Start gt Record gt Edit gt Edit in New Window Start gt Record gt New Start gt Record gt New gt Duplicate Start gt Record gt Delete Ribbon and toolbars Settings
267. ings or both Inserting objects There are two processes in which objects can be inserted Either by using the menu Object gt Insert the toolbar or by drag amp drop recommended Inserting objects with drag amp drop follows this procedure gt Select the desired object type The mouse pointer will change to a crosshair gt Place the crosshair on the point at which a corner of the object should be placed It is best to use the left upper corner of the planned object Depress the left mouse button and pull while keeping the mouse button depressed to the opposite corner of the planned object If you started in the upper left corner pull the crosshair to the lower right corner of the planned object A dashed frame will appear which represents the size that the object will assume upon release of the left mouse button Release the mouse button when the object dashed frame has the desired size Afterwards set the desired properties for the inserted field Edit objects f you have selected more than one object you can arrange the selected objects relatively to each other align them according to their size and change the properties they have in common Up to 10 changes can be undone in the input form designer with the command Edit gt Undo The changes relate to a single tab which means each tab has its own undo function If you have undone an action without meaning to you can revert to the previous state with th
268. into a certain field Global and view specific counter configuration Global counters are available in cRM These are numeric values which are incremented from the given initial value by the indicated increment These counters are not view specific which enables a common customer counter to be used in different views e g if prospective customers and customers are divided into different views but share the same customer number range Within a view you can use these global counters in formulas wherever you want to display the customer number or e g also in letter templates Use the formula editor to create such formulas Example P Cstr counter 96 0f 194 Automatic numbering This results in the numeric global counter value preceded by a P Since the counter value is numeric its value has to be converted to a string before concatenation Cstr In a fictitious view prospective customers the customer number could begin with a P prospective customer in a fictitious view customer with a C 2customer Configuring a global counter This counter can be used in different views SelectFile Information Auto Counter Auto Counter Settings x Auto counter 8x Name Start value Currentvalue Increment OfferNo 110000 110005 1 E TransactionNo 100000 100008 1 CompanyNo 10001 10051 1 InvoiceNo 130000 130001 1 ContactsNo 10001 10082 1 OrderNo 120000 120002 1 DeliveryNoteNo 140000 140001 1 D O
269. into one The active record is the primary record in this process in which the result is saved The secondary record can then be automatically deleted Merging records gt Select Start gt Extended gt Merge records and then choose the record which is to be merged with the active record gt In the Merge records dialog the field contents from the primary and secondary records are displayed In the final column the field contents of the resulting record are shown The field contents of the primary record are used as default gt With the button Switch the primary record with the secondary record the records can be swapped All changes made so far are lost and the merging rules are carried out again gt With the Filter button you can hide the fields for which the contents in the primary and secondary record are identical a Merge Records EJ To transfer a field content into the result double click the source field of the record with the desired content On OK the primary record will be overwritten with the result t gt gt Hb db BY Settings Field name Pri d Company2 Company3 MatchCode Country ZIP City Street Chobham Road 135 Chobham Road Chobham Road ZIPPOBox i POBox i i Phone i 020 3245 999999 10 1020 3245 999999 10 0 3245 999999 10 Fax 020 3245 999999 20 1020 3245 999999 20 10 3245 999999 20 Email i info relationship manager net info relationship manager net info relations
270. ion 17 Route planner and phone online directory interface A list of supported directories can be found under Settings gt Phone amp Online Directories Route Planning on the Directory or Route planner tab Note Since structures and addresses of websites can change very quickly it is possible that websites and services will become inaccessible without warning Document management system DMS interface Generally all DMS connections support adding existing documents as well as documents that were created by the document management The added documents can also be removed deleted from the DMS Changing editing Check in Check out is supported Please note the specialties of each connection and the information under Document management in chapter Configuration of views Due to the versioning strategy of the Mozilla Foundation the version number of the latest Thunderbird version can change frequently combit tries to provide the required changes for new versions so that the latest Thunderbird version is supported however combit does not assure that 17 Preparation and Installation DocuWare DocuWare version 4 6 5 1 is required Specialties If DocuWare version 4 6 and 5 0 are installed in parallel the newer version is always used If DocuWare 5 0 5 1 has not yet been started and has been started from the cRM by a document action a message from the DocuWare Viewer may appear when documents are archived in DocuWa
271. ional Record you can allocate a relational record For both buttons select the corresponding 1 1 relation in the Parameter field on the Properties tab Buttons of type Select Relational Record display all records that are available for the relation to the linked view in a selection list The corresponding record is selected with a double click A filter that defines the displayed records can be defined for the records displayed in the selection list Current field contents can be accessed for comparing The filter for the selection list is selected in the button Advanced on the tab Extended The definition of 302 Specific object properties the filter expression can be made with a General Filter or a Free SOL Query The filter is activated by the checkbox Apply filter on records to be displayed 2j Button Select Relational Record BusinessSector2 pu iam Properties C7 Extended Tooltip Appearance Appearance condition va Editability condition va These settings are no substitute for database rights Their purpose is the visual support of entering and editing the data Filter for Record Selection Advanced Apply filter on records to be displayed Availability Filter v General filter Ya D Free SQL Query OK Cancel Preview o OK Cancel Buttons for function definitions For buttons of the type Predefined function print single Predefined function single e mai
272. ions are available through a Filter gt Manual Y T Dv Include Record BY Include All om Exclude Record EX Exclude All Compose Appl d Record Selection Manually gt Select Filter gt Compose gt The first column of the list view with checkboxes for the compilation of the manual filter is displayed gt Using the checkboxes select the records that are to be explicitly included or excluded from the filter This checkbox has three different states for the labelling of the records IV Record is explicitly included in the manual filter When the manual filter is run this record is definitely displayed Record is ignored by the manual filter Whether the record is displayed depends on the normal filter Record is explicitly excluded from the manual filter When the manual filter is run the record will definitely not be displayed 98 Manual filter CustomerNo Company Department Position Salutation Name P10059 Herrn Krause P10021 Frau Netzer P10076 Frau Schmidt P10002 HOST UR ABR BE Mrs Ii Iv P10003 Albatros Flug OHG Gesch ftsf hrung Herrn Junker P10072 Albatros Flug OHG Vertrieb Vertriebsleiter Herm Mayer Iv P10052 Alpenverein Edelwei e V 1 Vorsitzender Herm Meister P10067 Alpenverein Edelwei e V Herrn Steiger F P10042 Anwaltskanziei Recht amp Ordnunc Herm von K nig FZ P10034 Autohaus Wiese Verkauf Herrn Wiese Optional select Filter Genera
273. ipt Confirm the entry with the OK button Click the Load button to change the template 73 Entering and editing data gt Through Settings gt Relational Appending you can always open the template library to change the description or name gt Through Data gt Append Relationally gt Execute template you can open the template library and run the selected template 3 17 Address enrichment With some telephone CDs that directly support being accessed externally there is the option to enrich several records in one step As long as the CD supports this mode the tab Address enrichment is available in the configuration Here you can set which telephone fields should be enriched and can set certain search options Under Data Data Enrichment you can start the enrichment Depending on the importance of your data it is often worth using the enrichment only on a filter of the records that contain no telephone numbers The enrichment process is logged in the file enrich txt in the directory C Documents and Settings lt User gt Application Data cRM In addition an auto log can be activated underthe view properties that might be capable of tracking changes in a comments field for each record More about this can be found in the chapter Configuration of views 74 Search in views 4 Searching for records The search function is a filter since only the records being searched are displayed at the end To create a target g
274. is not sufficient This defined style sheet e g Address field can then be assigned to all transfer lines which are to be transferred into this positioning frame gt To insert a bookmark into Word click on the place where you wish to insert it then click on Bookmark in the Insert menu Enter a name for the bookmark and click on Add To display bookmarks in Word 2007 2013 select Word Options gt Advanced gt Show document content and activate the option Show bookmarks in Word 2000 2003 select Tools gt Options gt View and activate the option Bookmarks The bookmarks are then shown as grey vertical lines In the dialog Insert bookmark you can see which bookmark has which name if you sort the list by location gt Save the document and leave Word Excel open in the background 222 Configuring transfer templates gt These bookmarks are now available in the Bookmark combobox in the Line properties area of the transfer template and can be assigned to the lines Line properties Blank Optimization Non Removable Manual linefeed No carriage return Bookmark Salutation v Please note that you may only assign bookmarks that are also defined in the document template If you assign a bookmark that is not defined in the target document you will be shown the error message The requested member of the collection does not exist Tip Bookmarks are also displayed in the Bookmark sel
275. ist In this way you can quickly see for example for which appointments the classroom has already been occupied UnderReferences you can link the appointment with other records such as projects or other contacts Appointment Attendee References Action V FX Record View Campaign of Bugfree Software GmbH Heiner Schreiner CampaignAssignment Le H tel du Pont Deux Am lie Chevalier Contacts UK Import Cars Companies E In the Actions tab you can link an appointment with various actions In doing so you select whether an action should automatically or manually be started when the reminder is launched Whether or not you can give other users actions depends on your rights in the system administration 103 Appointmentand task management Appointment Attendee References Action Execution Automatic Manually in reminder dialog Action 7 Send an e mail notification M To sales combit net Perform phone call In this way phone calls can be planned ahead If you set up the appointment directly from the context menu of a telephone or mobile phone field under Schedule Phone Call the corresponding telephone number is automatically entered and you can start the telephone call directly with Execute when the appointment starts Send message via SMS This action allows you to send an SMS message in connection with an appointment The number is already entered here too as long as you set up the appointme
276. it the field properties Further information can be found under Database structure in the chapter Configuration of projects Field alias For each field a field alias can be issued so the name displayed in the user interface and in the dialogs can be differentiated from physical field names This is particularly practical with an international jointly used database if the physical field name e g has been defined in English Then a German field alias can be entered in the view configuration of the German project Additional information on the language of the user interface can be found in chapter General configuration By clicking on the button Set all field aliases to the respective field names you can set all field aliases to the respective field names delete all field aliases or import export them in one step Internal field type Every field type has special properties that for example decide the contents of the context menu They should therefore be defined appropriately After the selection of the field and a double click in the column Internal Type the selection list opens Choose the required type there The most important field types Character Any character string that can contains letters numbers and special characters If the contents are simple text entries or numbers where the sort order and comparison operations are unimportant e g if none of the other field types apply Numeric If the contents a
277. it the involved databases approximately Generally itis less effort to adapt an existing template than to set all links again The templates are saved in the respective application data directory i e they can only be selected and run by the respective creator under User defined formats Global templates can be found under User defined formats Global 170 Synchronization of records Starting the synchronization and statistic run In the following dialog you are given a summary If you confirm this the synchronization will begin You will reach this page directly if you select one of your own formats in User defined formats in the format selection on the first page of the wizard and click the Execute button You can check the accuracy of your entries first with a statistic run With the button Statistic you can test the synchronization before starting for real As a result you will receive a test report with the number of changes and differences A statistic run is highly recommended for controlling the selected key With the number of differences found you can consider whether the result is plausible for your databases E Synchronization Wizard EJ Please assign the fields Automatic assignment ya Main DB iFormat iSecondary DB field OK Synchronization rule 5 j i mdi Company3 ule SecDB if MainDB empty Country ule SecDB if MainDB empty Rule SecDB if MainDB empty Formula Rule SecDB i
278. itch Window Switch Settings gt View gt Properties or Context Menu on view in Project window gt Properties Start gt Open gt View gt Go to gt View or Context enu on view in Project window gt Open Window gt Switch to gt Appointments and Tasks to File gt New File gt Open gt File File gt Open gt Solution Center Settings gt Change User Password Settings gt Database gt Database Connection Settings gt DMS Login Information Settings gt General Settings gt Sounds Settings gt Administration gt Users File gt Save File gt Save as Views Views Views Views gt Properties gt Open gt Appointments amp Tasks gt Calls Views gt Info Center Windows gt Dupes Windows gt Navigation Windows gt Global Search Result Windows gt Toolbars gt Status Bar Windows gt Close All Windows gt Windows Command in Toolbar Sc Sc Sc Sc Sc Sc Sc hedu hedu hedu hedu hedu hedu hedu e gt New Appointment for Record e gt Show Appointment for Record e gt Appointment List e gt Show Tasks for Record e gt New Task for Record e gt Task List e gt Show Appointments Tasks Record gt Discard Changes Edit gt Copy Changes Context gt Cut Changes Context gt Paste Changes Context gt Save Changes Context gt Save amp Close Changes Context gt Undo Da Template Data gt
279. ith all attempted calls to the output medium of your choice from the output menu Printing directly print preview or various file formats are available The list can be configured in the List amp Label Designer which can be accessed under File gt Options gt List of Calls Print Template Manual dialing Aside from the numbers in the phone list you can also dial any other number manually Run the command Start Manual and enter the desired number With the button Dial you start the dialing process Call simulation With File gt Options gt Simulate Incoming Call you can simulate an incoming call to test the automatic number recognition after it has been set up For this enter a phone number without any spaces 122 Configure the phone manager Transfer phone numbers to the phone manager There are two ways of transferring entries from a view to the phone manager individually or as a filter To transfer single entries right click in a phone tield in the view and select To phone manager from the context menu gt To transfer an entire filter to the phone manager first create the desired filter and then select the command Data gt Transfer Filter to phone manager Powerdialing Powerdialing is the dialing of a whole list of calls in this case all calls on the call list as opposed to a single call with which you only complete one call from the list at a time This function is often needed for telemarketing
280. ith which you can set the alignment and by marking the option Word wrap you can allow this function The spell check can also be activated requires Windows 8 294 Specific object properties z Edit field SalesTurnoverContactsLY Turnover x Autotext Cont Link Program Input Validation F7 Extended Tooltip Appearance Alignment gt Left Centered Right Display format when field is not being edited 123 456 12 123 456 12 a Word wrap Field supports word wrap With spell check Activate spell checking for this field Requires Windows 8 or higher Preview SalesTurnoverContactsL Y Tumover OK Cancel The option Make uppercase automatically turns the contents of a field into capital letters With SHift correction you can compensate for the common typing errors that occur from holding the shift key for too long and making the first two letters capitals instead of just the first If the option is turned on the second letter of every entered word is automatically made lower case even if it was upper case intentionally This only happens if the third letter is not also in upper case Combobox Combobox objects allow you to assign lists of pre defined contents to fields These objects consist of an input line witha button on the right hand side Underneath the input line a dotted frame represents the area to be available for the drop down list of pre defined contents T
281. ization Non Removable v Manual linefeed StrSubst Salutation Title Firstname Name N Cond MailingAddress F Cond IsNullOrEmpty CompanylD Companies ID disserui Cond MailingAddress F Cond IsNullOrEmpty CompanylD Companies ID Bookmark v Cond MailingAddress F Cond not CompanylD Companies ID Country Date Now M d y Subject Sample letter v Options Insert automatically Define as document fields Auto show window ABC A Savefile AccountMngr File name AccountMngr Users LoginName Abst AccountMngr Users LoginName Assi AccountMngr Users LoginName Autt v Q OK Cancel gt The last selected transfer template is opened gt If you want to edit an existing transfer template open it with File gt Open Transfer templates always have the file ending XFX In the TransferTemplates folder you will find various examples that you can adapt to your needs gt Ifyou want to create a new transfer template select File gt New 218 Configuring transfer templates General settings gt gt Enter a description for the transfer template This description is available to you as the variable lt Action Template gt for automatic logs Select the target program for the transfer When selecting the program it is very important to choose the correct version Using the button Select application p
282. ject The configuration occurs in a separate dialog Select File gt Information gt Navigations Structure Various buttons and functions in the context menu are available for the configuration of the list 2 Navigation Structure Bj Tg 4 Companies 4 Contacts Cp Activities E SalesOpportunities Campaigns g Complaints 4 ProductAssignment SupportActivities 4 EX SalesDocuments E SalesDocumentltems 4 ES Projects E ProjectTasks 4 Products Li Knowledgebase ProductGroupCompetitors a ProductGroups 4 Others Es ContactsRelations 180 Create new folder To create hierarchies you can create folders Enter a name for the folder and then press RETURN You can move the views and folder around the list by drag amp drop Rename folder Rename a folder Views cannot be renamed Copy Duplicate views and folders including views Delete Remove folders and views from the list Reset All changes to the navigation view are reverted Company master data 13 10 Company master data With File gt Information gt Company Master Data basic company master data can be stored such as company name company address VAT ID and logo This information is made available as variables and can be placed in letters or mail merge templates for example 13 11 Database structure The database structure can be defined with a database configuration tool or directly under File gt Information gt Datab
283. k Select Start Reference Send To The dialog for a new e mail is opened automatically If you made a formula for the subject when configuring the view this will already be entered Book Clipboard ra Basic Text Call Back UK Import Cars FF UK Import Cars cnc 5 KB 5H MESSAGE INSERT OPTIONS FORMAT TEXT REVIEW fsis es ES 6 Paste Address Check Names Names A Attach File WS Attach Item gt Follow Up High Importance Ka Signature gt Include Low Importance Tags amp Zoom attached file You now only have to enter the recipient and any message you wish to send The recipient can then move directly to the relevant record by double clicking the Note For the recipient to be able to reach the record he she must have access to the respective view Save a record reference If you wish to keep a reference for later use you can save it gt Select Start gt Reference gt Save As gt file to move straight to the record Enter the path where the reference file is to be saved Later simply double click the If you do not wish to save the reference but want to store it temporarily you can do this using the clipboard To do this select the command Start gt Reference gt Copy to Clipboard 65 Entering and editing data 3 13 Merging records With the function Start gt Extended gt Merge Records it is possible to merge two records
284. k global access in the Navigation window Optionally you can also set a name that can be used for access by script or workflow Confirm the changes by pressing OK Note All saved filter expressions for views that are no longer available will be discarded when the project file is saved Saved filter expressions can be run directly via Filter gt Execute Filter Expression If you already have made a selection and would like to use a further filter activate the Current Filter as a basis option as well To make changes to a saved filter expression select Settings gt Filter Expressions Select the desired filter and click on Edit The saved filter expressions can also be loaded in the GeneralFilter dialog in order to add additional conditions for example Todo so in the General Filter dialog click on the Load button Note A saved free SOL query cannot be loaded in the General Filter dialog 95 Filtering Records Selection 5 4 OBE Filter Query by Example The OBE function is a particularly easy way of running a filter With this you simply fill in your normal input form OBE filters can also be combined with other filters Every entry counts as a filter condition Start the OBE filter with Filter Query By Example gt In each field enter the required filter Correct spelling is important here The options Case sensitive and Combine with current filter are available If you enter several sea
285. k in the first step with the button Automatic assignment the wizard will try to link the fields of the source and target file based on the field names Already existing assignments are not overwritten Fields for which no corresponding fields were found can be assigned manually afterwards Of course you can also change undesired assignments 159 Import export and synchronization gt In various field types number character date etc the auto assignment uses conversion formulas please check the formulas to make sure they make sense in your situation For all still empty fields in your database into which you want to import values you must now carry out the following steps gt Select the row with the desired target field and click on the corresponding column Source field or formula Now you can select a field of the source database directly gt Alternatively you can open the formula wizard with the item second from top Edit formula With the formula wizard you can define fixed text conditions field links or parts of field contents as contents Examples of this are street and house number which are often stored separately Import Wizard EA Please assign the fields Automatic assignment jDestination format j Source field or formula i OK ct 32 characters Company Text 100 characters MatchCode Text 50 characters Text 50 characters Text 30 characters Text 60
286. k management General gt Appointments amp Tasks For the supported programs refer to the System Requirements Also you can activate the monitoring of reminders on startup If this option is deactivated the reminder dialog will only be displayed after opening the appointment and task management If an external task manager like Outlook has been chosen all task and appointment related menu commands are diverted to the corresponding Outlook dialogs and functions automatically Thus if you choose New Appointment to record Outlook s dialog for creating a new appointment will be opened Tip Import additional address data street city telephone number etc in the subject of your appointment This information will then be available to you in your iPhone Android or Blackberry after synchronizing appointments This way you can do without an address synchronization if you only need the address and communication data of the current appointments In the memo text for this appointment a reference to the record for which you created the appointment is stored Just double click the reference to navigate to the corresponding record Tip When you make this double click the first time you may be asked whether you want to save or open this element Remove the tick next to Always ask before opening files of this type and select Open If all appointments tasks for the current record are to be displayed a custom dialog is opened The user
287. l sss 78 4 2 Searching in relations cece cece ee ee eee eee ee eee mmm 79 4 3 Global Search sl aged socero aei om bade Man SE Foe ea ERR eae ioe Ue eene 80 4 4 Findandreplace ssesseseeeeeenenenene a mene 81 4 5 Search in Social Media and Online Directories suus 82 4 6 Search in phone irectory cccccecsececeececeececeeeeceeeeuseeaueeeaeeeeaes 82 4 7 Route Planning and Directions ssssese m 84 CONTIQUIFALION 5 herir e o are ei Oh eee eed re ie I eR 84 Route Planning to the active record 85 Route Planning with waypoints ssssssssssssseeennnnnete 85 Filtering Records Selection ccccceececeeeeeeeeeeuueeeeeeeeeeeeees 87 Bid General Filtet 2 ceo ctt vcr e oe oul Fede Vt dead 87 Creaung a simple Iter s o eene ned e er epus 88 Creating a filter with combined conditions 89 Filter with relationally linked views ssssssssmens 91 Full text filter for document content 91 Adding the login name to the filter 91 Frequency statistleS ac cr opui er E ERROR a RC ERE ER 92 Creating a filter with user input AskString sss 92 Load recently used tilter m tme REPRE HA 93 5 2 Free SOL Query E A E eene emnes eren 93 5 3 Saving a filter iuo e eee desee RTI ee e eee ELSE Pe die 95 5 4 OBE Filter Query by Example c ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 96 b b Fullt
288. l Predefined function program and Predefined function data transfer select the defined function definition in the Parameter field The function definition is defined on the Function Definitions tab in the view configuration Further information can be found under Function definitions in chapter Configuration of views Link a script If you want to run a script with a button select Script File or Script Direct from the list of available functions When you select Script File you can choose a script file in the properties dialog When you select Script Direct you can enter the script text directly Further information can be found in chapter Scripts and programming reference 303 Input form designer Link a Workflow If you want to run a workflow with a button select Execute Workflow from the list of available buttons Further information can be found in chapter Workflow Designer Buttons for container functions In the folder Container the corresponding container context menu functions are available For all buttons select the corresponding 1 1 relation in the Parameter field on the Properties tab With the container buttons Edit Delete and New the corresponding container context menu functions can be carried out For the buttons Edit and Delete a corresponding container on the tab is essential since a relational record must be selected for these actions With the Filter button a combobox
289. l filter is a very flexible method to filter records that can for example be used to find a certain postcode area a particular buzzword or other shared characteristics You can access all fields and can combine the field criteria freely 87 Filtering Records Selection Creating a simple filter gt Select Filter gt General Filter or Start gt General Filter gt Inthe list Fields click on the field that contains the attribute you wish to search Using the symbols you see the respective field type character numeric date Boolean key field embedded file gt From thelist Expressions select the desired operator The available expressions are displayed Example If you only want to search for a sub string choose the expression contains If the field contains only one attribute choose equal to gt In the field Value enter the attribute you are searching for If case sensitivity is active you can use this too Vv General Filter Views Fields Operators Value AM gt Eg Companies A Company A equalto A USA amp AccountMngr A Company2 begins with Cl Activities A Company3 not equal to Eg BusinessRelation B ComPreference less E BusinessSectorl Country greater Eg BusinessSector2 A CreatedBy less equal CJ CampaignAssignments FS CreatedOn greater equal Case Sensitive c CompanyRelations1 Al CreditCanital V is empty Add E CompanyRelations2 M 2 ie not omne
290. l fora general filter Select Filter gt Apply to run the manual filter If a filter already exists you have the option of combining it with the manual filter The records in the existing filter will be expanded with those records you ticked All records that were explicitly excluded will not be in the filter The number of included excluded records in the manual filter is displayed in the view s toolbar Whether or not the manual filter is active can be seen from the corresponding icon 1 50 1 0 Y To cancel a manual filter select Filter gt Cancel Selection If the filter was combined with an existing filter this will become active again If you wish to completely remove the filter select Filter gt Undo Filter All selection criteria will be deleted and all records will become available again Select Filter gt Record Selection gt Save Manual Filter to save the compilation With Load Manual Filter the compilation can be recalled Note A field of the type Record ID must be exist and the manually included excluded data records value may not be contained in this field a NULL Select Filter gt Save Current Filter as Manual Filter to save all of the records in the current filter as a record selection for a manual filter This way a filter can be directly restored via Filter Manual Load Manual Filter Example You want to get all company records from Germany ZIP Code area 7 and additionally the record Smith Real Es
291. late 136 BAT en at ATENE ETETEA 184 Webview niece eesds 206 Configuration files ssss 317 Connection Active Directory s s s 307 SocialMedia sssssssssssssss 82 Considerations Pa 57 Constraints ida 191 CONTAINER x iiem es 301 Column titles eonim 44 Gonfig ratigh aret 42 FAT t ee ees 100 147 FOrfmatturigasns itera 43 Saving the layout cece 45 Container filter 95 100 Content linke 288 Conversation log 121 COUNTENS Sik deem etin tie creed 195 Create indexes 55 Create tables 181 cRMIShiIpssz dn SARI RE 175 cRM Variables n se 213 CTI ete tro oen See Telephony Customer number 194 Customize File card Sivas tiem tieeieteta 234 Labels oso e oo de 230 IS TS ied ee redes 234 Print templates 225 HOpDOFS creo oim es 234 D Data backup e ee 317 Data entry uo aei oct tte tet s 59 Data output ceret See Output Data SOUF Ceci tette tee 145 Data transfer Address data sssssssssssss 62 Telephone CDs sss 83 Data lypes academic n 335 Database Attach database 0 0 175 Data types oen aei 335 Database Servers Microsoft SOL Server s 15 PostareSQL uoce et neci 15 David Appointments and tasks 109 GrOUPWar xs ee dere 239 Message archive sssssus 115 Dialing utt a titt 124 Digital SIGitute ais ccr thi 18 Digitally sign 144 145 Directions See Route planning Docking and Fl
292. late 325 Appendix File File File File File Pas Pas Pas gt gt 326 Save Save As Import Send Exit gt Attachment gt File gt Attachment gt Formular gt Fields gt Table gt New Table gt Table gt Insert Row gt Table gt Insert Column gt Table gt Insert Cell gt Table gt Delete Row gt Table gt Delete Column gt Table gt Delete Cell gt Table gt Link Cells gt Table gt Split Cells gt Picture gt Hyperlink gt Style gt Q aracter gt Font aracter gt Bold aracter gt Italic aracter gt Underlined aracter gt Left aracter gt Centered aracter gt Right aracter gt Numbering aracter gt Bullet Character aracter gt Decrease Indent gt 3 O 0 Oe OY S0 Or O 3 aracter gt Increase Indent gt Background gt Text gt HTML File gt Save File gt Save As File gt Import art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt nnn CD CDD D CD CD CD DD C nn HHH CO HHH C0 CO 0 CO H O HW CO art gt File gt Exit Paste gt At Paste gt At Paste gt Ta Paste gt Pic
293. ld length up to which the check for equality should run For fields with physical type Characters long at most the first 250 characters can be considered Set whether the dupe check should also be carried out phonetic This option allows a check based on the sound of a word This can be useful for fields such as Name With ignore if empty you can set whether this field should specifically be ignored if it is empty This option is only relevant for the online dupe check not for the dupe filter under Filter gt Dupe Check When the option Activate online dupe check for this view is activated a check is undertaken when new data is being entered for whether the record is already in the database 3 View Settings Companies EN Name ul eed Database table view Companies O v Fields Relations Codes Dupes Function Definitions Auto No Auto Log Document Management Docum Fields to check 8 x Field name Length Field size Phonetic Ignore if empty Company 40 100 E ZIP 9 9 r iv ZIPPOBox 9 9 r iv e The option Ignore if empty is only considered with the online dupe check however not with Filter Dupe Check C Cancel 193 Configuration of views 14 7 Function definitions Here you can assign certain variable names to programs transfer templates print templates and e mail templates With these variable names you can then create links with buttons yo
294. lds differ The record for Mr Smith combit GmbH phone number 07731 906010 remains unchanged as the synchronization on the basis of the key fields in the main database has not found the same record in the source With the New button you can add further key fields The order is not important because all key fields must match regarding the number of characters specified in Length The wizard tries to find the fitting field in the secondary database as soon as a new key field is entered Field assignments In the same way as when importing the fields that are assigned must be defined for synchronization too since the fields of the source file do not necessarily correspond to those in the target The assignments between the fields in source and target can be made automatically or manually The field assignments dialog here has one more column than that when importing the synchronization rule You can set the synchronization rule for every synchronization field To do this select the corresponding field from the list and select the synchronization rule Synchronization Wizard EA Please assign the fields Automatic assignment ya Secondary DB field OK i Synchronization rule Rule SecDB if MainDB empty Rule SecDB if MainDB empty Country ZIPPOBox val ComPreferen Data filter ya o lt Back Net Cancel The following synchronization rules
295. le after importing records for example 96 Last filter gt To start the dupe filter select Filter gt Dupe Check All duplicate records are displayed in the filter created gt When the filter has run you can look through the selected records and individually delete the ones no longer needed gt Alternatively you can merge two records into one with the Start gt Extended gt Merge Records function The active record becomes the primary record in which the results are saved The secondary record can be deleted automatically afterwards Further information regarding merging can be found under Merging records in the chapter Entering and editing data The fields to compare for the dupe check i e the fields that make a record the most distinctive can be set in the properties of the view There the online dupe check for the corresponding view can be activated so that a check is already being done during data entry to see if the record already exists Further information regarding the configuration can be found under Dupe check in chapter Configuration of views 5 7 Last filter There are various ways of reusing filters gt Use the filter library under Filter gt Execute Filter Expression gt To reverse all filters select Filter gt Last Filter You will run all filters that were carried out again in reverse order until no more are available 5 8 Invert filter Select Filter gt Invert filter to reverse the
296. le all of your company s own email addresses in the search archiving Internal text message and fax numbers is only supported by Tobit David Enter your own numbers here so that a differentiation can be made between sent and received SMS and faxes during the search Pay attention to the different number formats 117 Activities and Document management De Activating the Outlook Add In You can deJactivate the Outlook Add In directly in the Outlook settings n the Outlook 2010 2013 Options switch direct to the Add Ins area In the combobox select the COM Add Ins item and click on the Go button n Outlook 2000 XP 2003 select Tools gt Options and go to the Other tab Activate the button Advanced Options in the dialog that opens and press the button COM Add Ins In Outlook 2007 select Tools gt Trust Center In the combobox select the COM Add Ins item and click on the Go button All available Add Ins are displayed Activate deactivate or delete the entry combit Relationship Manager Outlook Addin and confirm with OK If the Add In with the name combit Relationship Manager Outlook Addln is not in the list you can add it with the button Add The Add In module file cuoc04 dll can be found in the cRM installation directory Note Restart Outlook after this process De Activating the Thunderbird Add On You de Jactivate the Thunderbird add on directly via the Thunderbird settings In Thunderbird select E
297. lect an IfThenBranch you can define the condition for this branch in the properties list By clicking on the button a selection dialog with all available operators is provided by clicking on another button in the connection dialog Enter the reference value directly in the properties list or select it via the connection dialog as well as long as it is a result of a previous activity Name Please specify the identifier of the activity It has to be unique in the workflow Example Send a letter or an e mail for each record depending on field content gt Inthe Workflow Designer select File gt New gt Drag the activity CreateRecordSet onto the work area 264 System activities gt Inthe properties select the view name e g Persons By clicking on the button a selection dialog with all available views is provided by clicking on another button in the connection dialog gt Drag the activity ForEachRecord onto the link below the activity CreateRecordSet The activity OpenCurrentRecord is automatically created gt Drag the activity ReadFieldContent onto the link below the activity OpenCurrentRecord gt In the properties enter the field names with content to be read out e g ComPreference gt Dragthe activity CustomlfElse onto the link below the activity ReadFieldContent An iffthen branch is automatically created gt Inthe properties of the left IfThenGeneral branch
298. licts This highlight is removed when field content is chosen for the resulting record Relations Define the actions to be carried out when merging for 1 N and N M relations The following actions are available Cancel The relationally linked records of the secondary record are not used in the resulting record Apply The relationally linked records of the secondary record are used in the resulting record Transfer and ignore dupes The relationally linked records of the secondary record are used in the resulting record Duplicate relationally linked records are deleted When a relationally linked record is a duplicate i e which field contents identify a record most clearly can be defined for each relation through the button With the New button you will begin a new row First select the desired Field to check e g DateTime Set the field length up to which similarity is to be checked For fields of type Characters Long only the first 250 characters can be checked With Ignore if empty you can set whether this field is to be ignored if it is empty Settings for Record Merge Define rules here under which two records will be merged to one The result will always be saved in the primary record Rules Relations Delete Extended Display e Define the actions here which shall be executed when merging 1 N and N M relations Relation Relation type ID CompaniesRela
299. log opens gt Please first enter your user data with which you log into cRM By clicking the Open button you can select a project If the user data was entered correctly the available views are listed in the combobox The combit LDAP server attempts to link the LDAP attributes with fields in the corresponding view automatically Fields for which no equivalent is found can be linked manually afterwards Of course you can also change undesired links retrospectively The following database fields are automatically linked as long as they are available in the view LDAP attribute combit Relationship Manager field OBJECTCLASS Department CN Name SN Name NSCPAIMSCREENNAME Name GIVENNAME Firstname STREET Street MAIL Email C Country O Company HOMEPHONE Telephone FAX Fax L City TELEPHONENUMBER Telephone2 MOBILE MobilePhone OU Department XMOZILLASECONDEMAIL Email2 DISPLAYNAME Name 241 General configuration DISPLAY NAME Name Editing and deleting views Configured views can be edited retrospectively under the menu item Data Source gt Edit This is necessary for example if the links of the fields with the LDAP attributes have to be changed or new attributes must be accepted If you wish to delete a view that has been configured highlight the desired view and select the menu item Data Source gt Delete Please note that when you delete a view any search being carried out on that view cannot be completed and this can cause e
300. lows and Events Some changes can be ignored If you select Notify you will be notified about your own changes e g by a script More information can be found in the chapter Watch record under Entering and editing data Project rights On the Project tab you can see the project specific rights of the currently active project such as changing the configuration of the project Edit project settings This right is required toaccessFile gt Information gt Properties to save filters statistics quick search fields sort orders for all users 313 User and rights management to save the configuration of list container view for all users Tomake a filter expression available for all users Default right for new view This right sets the default for view rights if a view has not yet had its rights defined explicitly Please note that this is not the actual right but the value that is used for all view rights as default Example You create a new view but the user rights for this view weren t set yet In this case the described default right comes to use If you have set a Yes for a user then he does have all rights for this view that means for all view rights a Yes is automatically preset However you have set See Groups for the Default right for new view for an user then all his rights for a new view will be set to See Groups In this case the rights settings take place which are defined
301. lution Distribution File gt Help gt Tools gt Debug Tool File gt Help gt Info About combit Relationship Manager Command in Ribbon Start gt Record gt New Start gt Record gt Edit Start gt Record gt Edit gt Edit in New Window 319 Appendix Record Record Record Record Record Record Record Record Record Record Find gt F Find gt PI Find gt PI Find gt PI Find gt Find gt Stopover Find gt Endpoint Find gt R 320 gt Save gt Save and Close View gt Discard Changes gt Delete gt Delete All gt Duplicate gt Merge gt Go To gt First gt Go To gt Next gt Go To gt Previous Record gt Go To gt Last Record gt Reference gt Send To Record gt Reference gt Save as Record gt Reference gt Copy to Clipboard Record gt Reference gt Add to Favorites Record gt Watch Record gt Dial Record gt Send E mail Edit gt Undo Edit gt Cut Edit gt Copy Edit gt Paste Find gt Quickfind ind hone Number or E mail Find gt Current Record in Online Directories hone Directory gt Find Current Record hone Directory gt Transfer Manually Route Planning gt Set Current Record as Starting Point Route Planning gt Set Current Record as Route Planning gt Set Current Record as Find gt Route Planning gt Set All Records in Filter as Waypoints oute Planning gt Rem
302. matically after a certain time when the program is started Both values can be set under File gt Options gt General gt History Further information regarding the configuration can be found under Settings in chapter General configuration The history log is activated individually for every view in the view configuration on the General tab The field contents of the Record column are defined in the view configuration on the Record Reference tab through the formula in the Subject Comment field 56 Favorites Further information regarding the configuration can be found under Record reference in chapter Configuration of views 3 8 Favorites If you work on certain records often you can add a link to these records to your list of Favorites so that they can be displayed quickly and easily in the future This allocation is saved specifically for the user over all views for every project To open one of the Favorites double click on the corresponding item in the list of Favorites or right click the item and select Go to Record from the context menu i ax Favorites Adding Favorites 4 Project A r E Albatros Flug OHG Goto the record that you wish to add to your list of x Caf Mozart y E UK Import Cars Favorites 4 Project B gt Select Start gt Reference gt Add to favorites at Hammer Baumarkt amp Museum of Contemporary Art gt If desired enter a name for the record and then
303. me 59 Etficient data entty ieu en det tiu e o a e nee 59 ZIP Area code directory ai cmt at e deett dte 61 Internet ConnecuVity o cem ere e qm e PERRO nds 62 hunning external prOGEaITIS a a tete rr i ERR GERE T S 62 3 11 Data entry with address pick uUp cccccceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaeaes 62 Transfer addf6sS65 nn pe ERES E OE EE 62 Configuring the address pick up 63 3 12 Referencing a record sate ec ec ec ee ae aa aE Y E ianh SAT 65 Save aT6COrd refereee uoo oio He OR Pea E ed a S 65 3 13 Merging records i ideni Ed dre dede ruine Dn 66 Metgitig T G COFBSs a d Me a Led Sth Ant cad a Stare af 66 Mergitig optlOrs d e a Ae Re UR zd 67 3 14 Watch record erede p ds 70 3 15 Modify field contents ssssssssesse mm meme 71 3 16 Appending records relationally esee 72 Appending records relationally sees 72 Templates for relational appending ssssssssssseeees 73 3 17 Address enrichment sess 74 Searching for reCOrdS ccccc cece ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 75 4 1 Search N VIEWS aac prre re nyc ev rt nre cab ad se ne orn noir ee riae 75 Normabsearch d o etiem A qoe pog olere er dep d 75 Search options gs e e ean rea pnt e a ek 76 Refining the sSearGhiss stetit petia teet oe OR t i ee 77 QUICK FING seeds A 77 Search for phone number OF e mai
304. meaning that the individual activities can be defined with the Workflow Designer More information on the graphic creation of a workflow can be found in the chapter Workflow Designer Clientside workflows are started by a button or something that is entered or an event Example You start the sending of a newsletter with a button that sends it to a contact as an email or as a letter depending on the communication preference set Server side workflows are monitored by the workflow server and started by an event Example If a desired status does not stop an activity is set into motion For example if a customer claim is not processed over a certain period the responsible staff member receives a message If a field change is made for example a notification on the status of a service order the customer is automatically notified The automatic processing of emails and the start of a workflow via script can occur via the Email Autopilot If you receive a message with a certain subject the email will automatically be processed according to your specifications More information can be found under E mail autopilot Example Automatically process newsletters sign ups at a website The registration details are compared to a possibly existing record otherwise a new record is created The verification of the email address double opt in is also managed via the Email Autopilot 16 1 Workflow Server Servers side workflows are monitored and
305. more information can be found in the chapter Optimization of the in the appendix and in the documentation of your database system Globally Unique ID This is a field that can store a globally unique ID This field type can be assigned more than once in a view and generally serves as foreign key in relations The content is neither set by cRM nor the database system Tip To optimize operating speed use explicit indexes from your database system for the foreign key field more information can be found in the chapter Optimization of the in the appendix Relations 14 4 Relations Relations are connections between two views These relations can be defined in the configuration dialog of both view properties With this you can create any structure or connection you require For example you can assign a company different contacts Defining relations Define relations in the Relations tab In the input designer the buttons Select record and Go to are available for 1 1 relations as well as the corresponding containers to display the connected records for 1 N relations When designing the database consider that the cRM can resolve up to 2 relation levels If you therefore define multiple nested 1 N relations e g in the form Projects gt Facilities gt ElectricMeter gt MeterReading you can t access a field e g ProjectNumber of the view Projects from the view MeterReading Only a field of the view Facilities would b
306. mplate this listbox is empty at first Transfer templates are built up line for line Every line is automatically ended w break Every line can contain fields fixed text and functions Several fields or tex can be in each line The individual lines of a transfer template are displayed on the other in the listbox of the transfer template dialog ith a line objects e below gt Click on the New button to insert a line In the context menu select Text The new line will be inserted before the highlight i e the selected line is pushed downwards 219 General configuration If you wish to use a macro command instead of text select ExecuteMacro here and enter the associated macro name gt If you wish to remove an existing line again select the respective line and click on Delete selected line To fill an empty line or to change a line s existing contents double click on the corresponding line You will open the dialog for editing lines and here you can either enter fixed text such as your return address and or the required variables E Edit Fields and Functions x Data and Functions Condition Text Date Format Number Format Operators Y Functions BE GQ Variables Numerical functions 3 Mathematical functions b Date functions C3 String functions C3 Misc functions p Aggregate functions b Barcode functions p43 Conversion functions C3
307. mply wish to save the changed configuration leave the dialog with OK If you want to activate a sort order immediately select it and then press OK Activate Now you simply have to select the desired sort criteria from the list With the adjacent buttons you can set if the sort order is to be ascending or descending Ascending means that the list starts at the top with A descending means it starts with Z Filters There are various ways of filtering appointments and tasks The activated filters remain active until they are changed exception extended filters User lt all users gt M EA Appointment All Appointments Extended Tasks All Tasks Extended Filter Filterby userand resource In the filter bar you can set whose appointments are to be displayed in the left selection list Via Extended you can also select multiple users or resources Filterby appointment options In the central selection list further filter options are available All Appointments Appointments Today Appointments Tomorrow Active Appointments Recurring Appointments Private Appointments Filterfor task options Through the right hand selection list you can display All tasks Uncompleted tasks Overdue tasks Due by today this week this month Priority 1 2 3 b 107 Appointment and task management With Advanced more selection options are available in both selection lists Mark the desired filter conditions or enter the desired
308. mula CustomerNo CompanyNo F CstrS counter 96 0f o OK Cancel From now on the customer number is automatically entered in the input form for every new record If you create a new record but then cancel the process and don t save the customer number that was generated is not assigned to the next record but is effectively missed out If you do not want to assign a customer number to a record you can delete it from the field That number will also not be re assigned but missed out In addition there is the option of setting up a script for the allocation on a customer number With this the generation of the number could be semi automatic for example so that you can decide for each record whether it gets a customer number or not Necessary rights assignment To increment the counter for the Automatic Number field type a stored procedure with the name cmbt sp increment counter MS SQL or cmbt sp increment counter pg PostgreSQL is used MS SQL only The cRM database user requires EXEC rights to access this stored procedure This has already been done through the installation program in the reference project Afterwards this can be done through the query analyzer by running use database name gt go 196 Auto log grant EXECUTE on cmbt sp increment counter to lt cRMUser gt go If the stored procedure is not available the incrementation occurs on the client s side where it can
309. n a solution If the cRM WebAccess wants to access a Solution on a different server you have to define in IIS that the WebAccess runs with another user account Follow these steps t requires a user that has access to the share with the Solution So either a domain user or a user on both servers with the same name and password Add the user on the Web server to the local group IIS IUSRS In the IIS Manager select the appropriate application pool in the Application Pools and under Advanced Settings determine the identity For domain users domain user for local users only username Input password Create a solution for WebAccess A solution can be created with an assistant for access per WebAccess and WebAccess Mobile WebAccess Mobile is an optimized version for usage with Smartphones iPhone Android Blackberry Windows Phone and Tablets e g iPad The user can decide between the classic and the mobile version in the login dialog 1 Start the cRM and open the project to be converted 2 Choose Project gt Make available for WebAccess 3 Select the directory where all generated files should be saved In this path a subfolder is created automatically with the project name You can select if the solution should be created for WebAccess only for WebAccess Mobile only or for both For WebAccess Mobile the configuration can optionally be created on the basis of the last deployment or a saved configuration 4 A
310. n activity s property Bind to an existing member New Workflow Cf Open View c Print records eat Description OF Type F RecordSet tT FileName T OutputFileName oF Media T Name cH Close view A Description H Variables M The selected property of type System String can be assigned to the target property of type A String System String It has description Output file Optional File name in which the output is to be made If v Print template PRJDIR Print Templates Contacts Addresses Ist OK Cancel 259 Workflow Designer The placeholders PRJDIR cRM project directory APPDIR cRM installation directory USERDIR Windows user directory and TEMPDIR local Windows temp directory are supported Example Print the current record using a print template gt gt gt gt In the Workflow Designer select File gt New Drag the activity PrintRecord onto the work area Release the mouse key once the activity is positioned on the link from Start to End In the tool window Properties select a print template e g with the file extension crd suitable for the view for the property Print template The connection dialog for this is available by clicking on the button In the lower part of the dialog you reach a file selection dialog by clicking on another button Enter the value PDF for the property Output medium so that a PDF file is created
311. n alphabetical order With the function Extended Interface the combobox can also be opened with the arrow keys and not just the mouse 296 Specific object properties Also the option Text editable can be activated with which you can set whether you can only select the predefined contents option off or whether you can make manual entries option on More about the Tooltip tab can be found later in this chapter In the Entries tab you will find a list of predefined inputs for the object For a newly created object this list is empty at first With the button New a new empty item is added above the active item The cursor automatically jumps to the input field under the list in which you can enter the desired text for the item With the button Copy you can add a copy of the current item on the end of the list This function is useful if you want several items with only slight differences With the button Delete selected items can be removed from the list Lastly you can move your items to different positions in the list with the arrows or by drag amp drop With the button Bulb items can be given a display condition only if the formula returns the value true will the item be displayed in the list With this many selection lists can be made considerably more overlookable and inconsistent selections can be reduced Otherwise the same settings are available for combobox objects as for the previou
312. n be changed Setfield type internally Define relations Define codes of the list fields Activate and configure dupe check Configure function definitions for buttons Automatic number allocation automatic counters Activate and configure auto logs Set up document management Configure record references General settings for display web view and history To open the dialog for the view configuration right click on the corresponding view in the navigation and select Properties in the context menu 14 2 View name and Database table view In the view configuration dialog that opens set a name that is unique within the project for this view The maximum length is 30 characters Only alphanumeric characters i e 8 Z A Z 0 9 umlauts and can be used in view names Numbers cannot start the name 184 Fields Then select the database table or database view which is to serve as the basis for the view Views can also be assigned a symbol which will be shown in the navigation and in the tabs 3 View Settings Companies ER Name Companies Database table view Companies ji v Further information of defining a database table can be found under Database structure in chapter Configuration of projects Note If a database table is created directly through a database configuration tool cRM must be restarted before this table can be selected in the view configuration 14 3 Fields
313. n be displayed which can lead to unwanted results Possibly not all Windows fonts can display all UNICODE characters so the corresponding Windows Language Packs must be installed to extend the standard fonts by the characters in the particular language When records are output as PDF then the Font embedding option should be set to Use CID fonts in the PDF output media properties and stored permanently to the print template This will possibly lead to larger PDF file sizes however ensures that possible special characters can also be displayed correctly in the PDF This setting is the default for all new print templates 183 Configuration of views 14 Configuration of views A view is how you look at a database table or a database view The fields contained within can be assigned extended functionalities Views can be relationally linked The list view input form view and web view are different ways of displaying the data of a view gt To create a new view right click in the navigation and select New select File gt Information gt Create New View or copy an existing view To copy a view right click the corresponding view in the navigation and select Copy from the context menu gt Save changes to views with File gt Save With Delete in the context menu you can remove views Existing relations become invalid 14 1 View Configuration Every view has its own configuration dialog in which the following settings ca
314. n for following views 1 Contacts v 2 Companies v Document Management System lt Integrated document management gt MI is 2 OK Cancel Info center In the Info center field you can set the path to a central info view which serves as an information gateway This can be an HTML page or an internet intranet page Enter the path with the formula editor e g cRM Project Path X lnfoCentenindex html or http intranet combit net With this you have access to the user and project variables to display different pages depending on the field contents 179 Configuration of projects Access to the cRM application object occurs within a script using the windows external object You can now work with all cRM OLE objects as with normal scripts Set ocRM window external Tip To save information in the HTML view or to store it over several HTML pages the methods SetUserProperty and GetUserProperty are available in the cRM project object With these values can be persistently stored and loaded 13 9 Navigation structure You can keep the views list organized by creating folders and copying views The structure can be adapted freely and new hierarchies can be inserted through the context menu as required The items can be arranged by drag amp drop and named freely Empty folders due to missing rights for the contained views won t be displayed This arrangement is saved for all users for each pro
315. n printer or preview for example when saving in the preview mode select Save As in the following dialog and enter a name for the file being created in the File name field In additio program o gt With n you have the option of displaying the file directly in the corresponding rto send it by e mail Activate the corresponding options if required he option After saving open the file in the registered application you can open the file directly in the relevant program e g Excel after creating It gt With he option Send exported file by email you can send the file directly by mail gt With he option Digitally sign created file you can digitally sign the file Further information can be found in chapter Signing documents digitally Output as PDF The PDF export module creates document in portable document format This format can be displayed independent of platform with the freely available Adobe Reader In the print options dialog various settings are available for the PDF format document informatio 144 n JPEG generation resolution and page options etc Printing a mail merge letter with the word processor Output as Word The Microsoft Word export format creates DOCX files that are compatible with Microsoft Office 2007 and higher Tables will be exported on continuous pages to support later editing Output as Excel file The Excel output module creates documents in Microsoft Exc
316. nce ee ee ease ea eaeaeeeaeeeeeeeesaeaeaes 265 Workflow with the universal rule editor sss 265 Ending workflow in a controlled manner 266 Fault handling iste tue tee ec nd aes 266 Run fault handling in a controlled manner sss 270 Scripts and programming reference 0cccceeeeeeeeee eee eeneeaeees 271 18 1 Support for scripting functionalities essere 271 18 2 Supported script languages ssse e 272 18 3 Integration of scripts ssssssssee mH 272 18 4 Script extenslon eo sn o eo det eade cedat eae 272 Embedding scripts within scripts 272 Synchronous and asynchronous scripts sss 273 S riptssnd the editmode eet tet eet adt eei 274 Encryption orscripts cti RO ae on tro ov edere dts 274 USER TIGDESiocaent dita erret et e cate to ed n e tet betta tede 274 External 866688 cem o MERE D OE e MEHR OG HEREDI 274 Input form designer csse 275 19 1 Editing input TOFmS misiis inaa reto REO REDEEM eaii DR 275 19 2 Workspace and tools ainnean r aaiae EN EA ERER 275 EON P 277 D tine Main tab n ade e eerte muse ach etn TR reds 277 Tab propertie ER 278 19 4 Inserting fields and buttons sssese 280 ObjectdetaultSs s d Rr Oed sue E eeu sero a E A 280 Ins rtrngob eGts ue oret stared daha da e e Naat 282 EditoBJe6tsz x e E a REEL d EUR D Eee pd 282 Selecting ob 8CEs a o deerat RR e 283 Position andiSiz8
317. ncluded In this directory the zip codes are itemized by city and street Zip codes for the post office boxes are also included The street directory applies itself in many different places because of content links e g gt As soon as you have entered the country and zip code the city is automatically entered If you now move to the street field but do not enter anything and skip to the next field the street directory will open automatically and display the streets belonging to the city gt Even if you only enter the city name but no zip code and no street the street directory will open automatically as you move through the fields Now you simply have to select the relevant street and it is used in the record if necessary the zip code too Important These content links are contained in the reference project so you can use them in your own projects 61 Entering and editing data You can also use your own databases as a directory as long as they are the same file format dBase and have the same field development as the EN Directory provided with it Internet connectivity You have the option of opening internet addresses directly The web browser can be started directly with the URL from an Internet field via the context menu item Call Web Browser The program uses the default browser installed on your system Further information regarding field types can be found in the chapter Configuration of views Running ex
318. nd work together more effectively The frequencies are displayed in absolute terms and as a percentage 1 1 relational fields are taken into consideration as much as possible Date functions are not taken into consideration If you want to perform a frequency analysis click on the Statistics button next to the Value field NZ General Filter Views Fields Operators Value ul Ea Contacts A ABC equalto E AccountMngr A AccountMngr begins with ABC Number Frequency Cl Activities A Bank not equal to z T E BusinessRelation BankAccountNo less A Er E E CampaignAssignments Bankcode greater B su 10 Company BIC less equal E CompanyRelations 8 BusinessRelation greater equal Case Sensitive S Complaint Al Rueinecc amp ectori E i E Complaints z SN is empty Add E ComPreference ie nnt emnhs a oe AND NOT OR E ContactRelations2 E Gender 2 Ed LeadSource Eg MaritalStatus Eg PaymentTerm v lt gt The expressions of the different views will be concatenated with AND Include current filter Q Other options v Load Save Execute Cancel Creating a filter with user input AskString You can also create filter expressions that require interactive user input AskString 92 Free SOL Query Y General Filter x Views Fields Operators Value r acm E Contacts A ABC equalto
319. ndividual rule from which any number can be summarized in one set of rules always arises from the parts If Then and Else This rule is saved as a rules file 265 Workflow Designer Complex conditions and instructions can be entered in the input fields The properties of activities can be queried and set You can query the value of a global variable using the command this GetWorkflowVariableValue lt Variable name gt and change the value using the command this SetWorkflowVariableValue lt Variable name gt The rule based processing of the workflow foundation is very comprehensive For advanced options forward processing repeat rule execution etc you should here refer to the literature on the subject and the messages found on the Internet for the keyword Policy activity Ending workflow in a controlled manner With the activity System Terminate a workflow can be ended at any point in a controlled manner A message text can be displayed This makes it possible to end the workflow by achieving a certain state Naturally it can also be achieved with activities in the fault handler however the corresponding entries in the fault handler view must also be made Fault handling An activity System FaultHandler can be assigned to the total workflow and each sequential block of activities This is not a normal activity It is more like a workflow fault view i e you can define activities if there is a fault e g display a messa
320. necessary 3 Name Activities Database table view Activities Codes Dupes Function Definitions Auto No Field assignment for saving additional information Document Embedded File File Type File Name File Size Creation Date Modification Date Title Topic Author User Keywords Comment Auto Log View Settings Activities v amp Document Management Document Info Record Re Document_FileType Document_FileName Document_FileSize Document_CreationDate Document_ModificationDate Document_Title Document_Topic Document_Author Document_User Document_Keywords Document_FileComment In the view in which the documents are stored in the view configuration under the Document Management tab a document type with the extension eml must be v Here you can specify in which fields additional information from documents shall be stored For embedded documents assigning a field to store file type or filename is obligatory 204 Cancel Record reference 14 12 Record reference With a record reference it is possible to navigate directly to a certain record There are various ways of using this function 3 View Settings Activities ES Name Activities Database table view Activities vit v Dupes Function Definitions Auto No Auto Log Document Management Document Info Record Reference gt General Filename e g for Save As a yq Subject Comment e
321. ng The global windows navigation and dupes can be integrated alternatively into the interface or like independent dialogues be opened so that they float as individual windows freely Select the title of the window and shift them with further pressed mouse to any place in order to put it down there Over a rectangle framework one represents to which place and with which size the window was put down Alternatively you can pull the window also on the represented arrows around which windows at the right left to lower or top margin condition for system a higher depth of shade than 256 colors If you pull the window to another place it is not docked and freely adjustable floating 41 Getting started Customizing the list view and container view The list view and the containers can be customized for each user Even with containers of the same relation it is possible to individually set the layout column title sort order and filter for each container Right click on the column title and select Settings gt Layout and Columns 6 Abg CustomerNo F10002 F10003 F10017 F10042 F10034 4 Company Company2 Street Country ZIP grug Settings gt Layout and Columns Albatros Flug OHG Sort Order gt Column Properties i E ze Set as Project Default for All Users Anwaltskanzlei Recht amp Ordnung Reset to Project Default Autohaus Wiese Configuring columns 10041 34 7 F In the Columns tab you can define
322. ng to the active record If you want to plan a route to the active address gt Select Start gt Route Planning gt Get Directions to Current Record gt In the following dialog select Get Directions to start the Route Planning with the configured route planner to the address in the active record With the button Settings the settings for the start address and the route planner can be changed Route Planning with waypoints You also have the option of planning a route with several waypoints i e a route for several addresses i e when using Microsoft MapPoint gt To set waypoints navigate to the corresponding records and select Start gt Route Planning gt Set Current Record as Starting Point Stopover Endpoint When a waypoint is created without a starting point existing this automatically becomes the starting point If a starting point is set afterwards the previous start point automatically becomes an arrival point Generally start and arrival points should be set before waypoints The status bar gives information about the placing of these points with corresponding icons 3 33 50 50 With Start Route Planning Remove All Waypoints all placed waypoints can be deleted Route Planning EJ Route planner maps google com Please select the waypoint order Waypoints fx v Name Street ZIP City Country lt Bugfree Software Gr Flamingoweg 40 70378 Stuttgart DE Caf zum Roten Hau Zi
323. nge User Password When using a DMS you can set the DMS login information with the button DMS The users can change the information themselves also under Settings gt DMS Login Information This login information does not apply to windream When using windream the current Windows user must be a member of the windream user group f you activate the option login automatically cRM will start without any further interaction if the current Windows user can be linked to a cRM user 309 User and rights management To avoid an automatic login hold the shift key while starting the program to force the login dialog to open f Users Rights Administration B axe 1 Master Data General Project Views Records Fields I gt 4 User n Login name User4 Pug amp Administrator 3 Account is deactivated amp Userl N p User2 Windows Login L m E User L Login automatically User4 Title Mr amp Workflow Last name Buchner iq Groups Y First name Michael E Administrators BA Users Shortname Department Service Phone Phone2 Mobile Mobile2 Fax E mail buchner relationship manager net E mail2 Signature ae Picture e p Ok Canca Group master data After selecting a group you can set a name and description for the group in the Master Data tab All group names to which a user belongs are available in the group var
324. nked with the active record directly When creating documents you can use document templates f the functions Edit or New are available in the explorer context menu of an embedded file or DMS document do not use these functions Changes to the document are ignored by cRM 112 Create anew document 7 2 Create a new document All documents linked to a view are displayed in containers If a record is created in the linked view through the container it is automatically relationally linked with the active record Buttons are also available for many functions in the container s context menu gt By right clicking in this container and selecting New Document gt Create via document management a new document can be created using a document template gt Select the required document type from the following dialog The list corresponds to the previously defined document type Further information regarding document types can be found under Document management in chapter Configuration of views g Select Document Type Document types Description Word Letter Example Word Survey Example 2 OK Cancel The corresponding program opens with the allotted template Also a new record is automatically created in the Documents or Activities view according to the rules you have set for new documents or activities gt Create the document and save it in the corresponding application e g in Word
325. notification When changes are made an email is sent to the user s email address A user s own changes can be ignored and thus they will only be notified about other users changes More information can be found in the chapter User and rights management under Application rights and user settings 3 15 Modify field contents With the function Data Modify you can not only append but also edit or replace existing field contents If you do not wish to append all the records in the view you should run a filter first to select the required records gt Select Data gt Modify Now choose the field from the field list whose contents you wish to change amp Modify Records Field Text CreditinfoDate True v ai CreditLimit CreditOK True corresponds to set False CreditPaymentBehz corresponds not set CreditQuestionDate CreditRating Opti CreditTurnoverPY BEES CustomerNo Overwrite content Email Append to content Facebook v e Execute Cancel s If you have selected a code field the codes contained are listed and Delete and Set are available as options If you have selecteda logical field you can simply Overwrite Content and enter True set or False not set as text If you have selected a combo box you can also select the respective entries from a combo box With a date field you can simply Overwrite content If you select a field from which a 1
326. ns With instant reports you can archive print templates combined with filters and display them in the navigation for quick access More information can be found in the chapter Instant Reports 1 Single transfer to other programs can transfer the field contents of the active record into another application e g Word using a single transfer with help from a transfer form This transfer is useful for individual letter since you can adapt the print contents before printing in the corresponding program e g Word It is also possible to transfer fixed text e g return address formatting format templates conditions and functions The target program is started automatically 136 Output with print templates Further information on the configuration of transfer templates can be found under Configuring transfer templates in chapter General configuration actual record transfer template document field contents gt If you already have a transfer form set up you can run it in the following way Select Output gt Transfer to Word Processor or click on the corresponding button to transfer the active record e g to Word Excel or into the clipboard The active record is inserted at the insertion marker or at specific bookmarks in the target application lf the target application is already open the data is inserted into the currently active document Otherwise a new doc
327. nstallation Document management Create document type Changing settings for the document management is only worthwhile in views in which documents are to be stored Consider a few points regarding the document management first for example which documents you want to save under which path or what templates you want to use for new documents Which information should be transferred to a new document etc Also note that a document type is set not only by the file type but also by its use DOC files for example can be used for letters as well as faxes Since settings for these are still different it makes sense to make two different document types for letters and faxes gt Click on New to make settings for a new document type Give the document type a Description This name is displayed in a selection dialog when creating new documents 3 View Settings Activities EJ Name Activities Database table view Activities vll v Fields Relations Codes Dupes Function Definitions Auto No Auto Log Document Management Docum gt v Open record for editing when adding document Document types Suxte Description Extension Template Path Transfer File name Dontask Word Letter Examp doc PRIDIR Docume PRIDIR Docume ParentRecordDesc fd wae Conse Evam dine LDR INIRA Narima LDRINIRA Narumi DarentRerardNere EZ M Description Word Letter Example File extension doc Template PRIDIR DocumentManagem
328. nt management Further information can be found under Automatic e mail archiving in chapter Configuration of views Webview For every view you can store a web page or own HTML page The display will take place with View gt Web Enter the URL of the web page e g www combit net or lt cRM Project Path gt webview index htm or use the formulas to display different pages depending on the record Note The websites will be displayed in an Internet Explorer control It internally runs in the com patibility resulting in possible differences restrictions especially with displaying CSS compared to the standalone Internet Explorer application Report View You can define a default report for each view To display choose View gt report Define the report template and choose the data current record or the active filter 206 General Record Watch This option allows users to watch records When changes are made to this record by another user or in relational connections as long as this option was activated you will be informed about it in the navigation view under Watch results You can specify whether this also relational field changes to be monitored For more information see Watch record in chapter Entering and editing data Activate History The most recently viewed or edited records are displayed specifically to the user in the history A history log can be activated here Further information can be found under Configur
329. nt through the mobile phone field Here you also have the option of whether the SMS is to be sent automatically or manually through the reminder dialog Send an e mail notification If you wish to send a reminder of an appointment by e mail use this action If the appointment is created from an e mail field the e mail address will be used automatically If you activate Automatic the e mail will be sent completely automatically Execute open file document When an appointment occurs a relevant document can open Programs can also be started automatically for example to run data backup overnight If you activate Manually in reminder dialog the file would only open after being manually started in the reminder dialog Control of appointment conflicts When creating or changing single appointments an automatic check is started for whether the selected user already has appointments at this time The result of the check displays the first conflict found Only single appointments are checked for this The user must also have the rights to view the appointments of other users This check can be activated through Settings gt Options 104 Scheduling appointments and tasks Appointment EJ A At least the following appointment conflict has been detected Subject Project 1 With Luna Aventuras Jean Soleil Place conference room A Time 12 00 14 00 o clock User Userl Beamer Administrator Do you want to proceed
330. nts are authenticated which PostgreSQL user names they can use which databases they can access Records take one of these forms T4 TYPE DATABASE USER CIDR ADDRESS METHOD host all all 192 168 178 2 32 trust host all all 192 168 178 3 32 trust host all all 192 168 178 4 32 trust Default port Please note that the default port 5432 is required for the PostgreSOL database server not a possible helper installation Datatype money Please refrain from using the datatype money for table columns Please use numeric instead The datatype money cannot be processed by the combit Relationship Manager and is also not recommended for useby PostgreSQL Phonetic search To be able to use the phonetic search with the PostgreSOL database system the support for phonetic search SOUNDEX has to be activated during the installation of PostgreSQL activated per default from version 8 3 and above 1 4 Client installation The client setup makes installation easy in large networks Note If you carry out a single workstation or notebook installation client installation is not necessary Run the program ClientSetup exe from the cRM program directory depends on where the program files of cRM were installed in the server setup and follow the instructions 24 Choosing a database connection Partial administrator rights are required for the installation These can be confirmed in a dialog n the section Ready
331. o adopt the entire input form or only certain field functionalities Then select the form file you wish to adopt Saving an input form after editing With Input Form gt Save you can save the form after making changes f you wish to leave the input form designer select Input Form gt Exit About Settings gt Input Form gt Input Form WebAccess you can customize a special input mask for the WebAccess 19 2 Workspace and tools The window of the inputform designeris divided into different sections whose functions will be explained later 275 Input form designer Select fields Field input order Customize the interface First we would like to show how you can customize the interface of the input form designer regarding the size and position of the various sections so you can keep a good overview of proceedings You can place the tool windows tabs field selection sort order as well as the toolbar anywhere in the input form designer and thereby also set the size of your workspace By clicking and holding the title bar of a window you can move it freely The window can be docked again by releasing it in the desired place at the edge Where and in what size the window is placed or docked can be seen from the grey frame you are shown as long as you are holding the window with the mouse button You can move the toolbars in the same way by picking them up in the dotted area and releasing them in the desired loc
332. o be executed with a command line silent rent ServerName User Password lt ServerName gt Database server on which the rental license is installed User User with which the database server is accessed Password User s password The check using the command line can also be started by a client If there is an error you will receive an error message fthe validity check has not taken place after one week all users receive a reminder of the necessary validity check in the login dialog It also shows after how many days a validity check must be performed There is a Validity Check button for this in the login dialog After the specified days have gone by the application can not be started until the validity check has been executed 1 10 Online registration It is recommended that you register your copy of combit Relationship Manager online When you register your product your serial number is saved in the combit database and you will be given access to special software offers as well as being informed of all upgrades or updates of your product in good time gt Click File gt Help gt Online Registration gt Follow the online instructions and fill out the electronic form 1 11 Check for updates It is recommended always to have the newest available service pack installed You can check whethera service pack or a new main version is available via File gt Help gt Online 34 Migration from combit a
333. o run a direct SOL query You can enter the SOL query directly in the following way gt Start the free SOL query with Filter gt Free SOL Query Enter the SOL query In the SELECT part of the query the primary key column of the table must be selected that underlies the current view e g Companies ID 93 Filtering Records Selection n the query you may also use some pseudo variables e g cRM User LoginName and AskString further information can be found under Creating a filter with user input AskString Using Load Save the filter can be saved and loaded in the same way as general filters With the Load recently used SOL query button the 9 recently used filter Example All companies without contact Select Companies ID from Companies where not exists select pps from Contacts Contacts CompanyID where expressions are available even if not explicitly saved by the user The last used filter expressions are user and view specific With Load Save the filter can be saved and loaded just as with the general filter Companies ID Example All contacts with activities in 2012 but no activities in 2013 select Contacts ID from Contacts where exists select Activities ContactID from Activities where datepart year Activities DateTime Activities ContactID Contacts ID and NOT exists select Activities
334. oating 41 DOCUMENT Infos 204 Document management 112 Assigning documents 113 Configuration sss 199 Create new document 113 David message archive 115 DMS Document sss 99 Document types sssss 201 Drag amp DrO ps usw 3 Embedded File 99 File Einkaxzs teda 99 Opening documents 2 Scanning in a document 4 Document Management System DB oGuMWate ssi ats 8 Login information s 309 System Requirements 7 windream sssseseees 18 309 Document types 201 Dokumenten Management System easyEnterprise sssssssss 18 ELOprofessional Edit table structure Automatic archiving David e mail archive Thunderbird e mail archive Embedded File vents for scripts Extended MAPI TTE 130 210 See Filter 341 Index F Facebook connection s 82 FaVOTlt69 elec dett ssdecevctade b7 axe UELUT RE 151 David fax archive sessies 115 Fax template sss 151 Field Change sss 248 Field p s sss drei eo mete 186 Field workers Branches 165 Fields Calculate teretes 289 Calculations eee Ss 289 Create cot eso p o Oe 81 Erelazaliassir t e ue 86 Field lenght sss 83 Field prope
335. of activities Mail service Select the mail service Simple MAPI Extended MAPI POP3 SMTP IMAP SMTP of the e mail account to be checked for messages 252 E mail autopilot Settings E3 D General Mai y Mail Service D Extended MAPI Profile Specify the signup details of the profile which shall be used here If you are usin D Simple MAPI p gnup fthep y g D POP3 SMTP the standard profile these fields can be empty b IMAP SMTP D E mail Subject Profile name Standart D Script Objects Password ecccccceccece D Encryption Scan settings Scan all e mails in inbox Scan only unread e mails in inbox OK Cancel When using Simple MAPI and Extended MAPI you can enter the log in details of the user profile to be used user name password When using POP3 SMTP or IMAP SMTP enter the user information user name password and server data URL or IP address of the POP3 IMAP and SMTP server under Configure Usually you can copy this data from the configuration dialog of your e mail program When using IMAP SMTP Simple MAPI or Extended MAPI you can also set whether all messages in the inbox or only unread messages are to be searched E mail subject Define for which e mail subject the autopilot is to search for in the inbox An e mail forwarding address and a script file can be defined for each subject With the checkbox the search for each e mail subject can be activated Wit
336. of the active record For a multiple print e g address list the output is the data in the currently active filter For this reason you should filter the records before a multiple print since all records in the open view will otherwise be printed In the following sections only multiple prints are considered Single prints work in the same way Note Single and mail merge letters can be created and printed directly in your word processor Direct printing is however generally quicker More complex conditions such as the automatic decision between PO box and home address can be set up more easily in CRM than in the word processor The advantages of the word processor are the more comprehensive formatting options Output of labels With Output gt Print you can print the active address onto a label or envelope Treat envelopes as large labels gt Select Output gt Print gt Print Single Label gt Choose the print template for the label file ending Ibl Print templates can be found in the Print templates folder in the project directory gt Define the print settings see chapter Output Settings and place labels in your printer gt Click on Start With Output gt Multiple Print you can print labels for all records in the current filter If no filter is active labels are printed for all the records The output sequence of the records is the same as the current sort order gt Create a filter with Filter gt
337. om the document type e g XLS An entry under Program name is no longer necessary because path filename and type are automatically ascertained from the field contents An entry under Program parameter is also no longer necessary In this way different files and applications can be run from one field e g text spreadsheets and pictures etc An automatic link can only work if the application has correctly entered the associated filename extension in the system 291 Input form designer 19 6 Object settings The tabs Program Tooltip Autotext Cont Link and Input validation that are available for several objects are discussed in more detail in the previous section The command Arrange in the context menu allows the movement of objects into the back or foreground Foreground means the top layer which will definitely be visible background means the bottom layer The following object types are available Static text for description of fields in the input form Input field Standard field for data entry Can contain autotext content links and external program run commands Combobox for providing fields with a set of possible entries e g titles such as Mr Mrs etc Listbox to display CODE fields Checkbox to display logical fields Graphic to display graphics Group to group fields with frames or background surfaces with or without text Tabs to display multiple tabs Containe
338. on Append to field content to add the log entry to the existing field contents 3 14 Watch record Notes This function requires the Professional or Enterprise Edition In case multiple solutions use the same database only one solution may use this function Otherwise errors will occur Via Start gt Watch Record you can monitor individual records When changes are made to this record by another user or in relational connections as long as this option was activated you will be informed about it in the navigation view under Watch results You can also click the Viewed checkbox so that the entry is removed from the list There are further deletion options available via the context menu Delete all entries Delete all entries related to this record The list is a container which means that you can configure the column layout by right clicking the column layout The view can be configured according to date modified user who made the modification and reason for modification Example If for example a service request is made or a line of credit is exceeded a notification is sent automatically to the responsible customer service representative The requirement is the activation of this function in the view Further information can be found in the chapter Configuration of views under General The notification options can be configured for each individual user in the user administration 70 Modity field contents Email
339. ons from buttons are automatically turned into the corresponding cRM functions Existing code field descriptions are entered into the new project Function definitions for transfer templates single print templates single e mails and programs of the selected user are also transferred Existing sort orders can also partly be transferred in one step The fields that are transferred as numbers RECORDID and GROUPID are replaced in the input form through corresponding conversion formulas A control should especially be carried for personally made formulas Reference containers cannot automatically be transformed or migrated into a relation since they can also be database spanning In this case the contents of the reference container are transferred to a comment field Please note that a double migration is not supported meaning that a migration into an existing database only makes sense if it is two different address manager databases 35 Preparation and Installation dbf files or if such a database is to be integrated into an existing cRM database You might migrate each separately and use the cRM project import afterwards Starting the migration operation v 36 Start the migration wizard using the file am2crm exe from the cRM program directory on the server Select the command Datei gt Migrieren Enter the previous address manager directory generally the correct one is already suggested as well as the use
340. ontent links 288 gt Shared object properties First you should choose a target field by clicking the New button and making your selection Alternatively you can also proceed as follows The entrys Execute Script File Execute Script Code Execute Workflow are also available With Delete content link you can remove a field from the list again Now you have the choice between the following options Copy source content directly has the effect that every input into the source field is automatically entered into the target field You also have the option of defining a formula with the help of the formula wizard Theoption Transform selective expressions allows the input of any desired text in the target field depending on certain entries in the source field The if then links are defined in the corresponding input fields As soon as a new link is entered the cursor jumps to the if field automatically In the then field you also have the option of defining a formula To tick a checkbox logical field by content link let a T TRUE be entered To untick it an F FALSE Options for setting content links With the option No content link if target field is not empty you can decide whether the linked item is only to be inserted in the target field if it is empty option on or whether the item already there is to be overwritten option off Note Please note that content links only become effec
341. or in call centers To use the function you should first create the required filter of the call partners and transfer this to the phone manager After this start dialing the first call partner with Start Powerdialing All calls marked as successful are moved to the end of the list so that the next call to be made is at the top of the list The same dialog as when dialing in the phone list opens you can enter notes about the current call as usual and then transfer them to the record If the call is finished and you want to call the next person click on the Next Call button Otherwise you can close the Powerdialing dialog with Close to continue it another time if you wish The function is automatically ended when no more outstanding calls are in the phone list 8 2 Configure the phone manager Activate phone manager on startup Select File gt Options gt General and in the Telephony tab click on Settings 123 Telephoning and call list General Settings EJ Settings User Interface Sending Mail Telephony Appointments amp Tasks H 4 Settings Activate combit phone manager on startup gt To make the phone manager start at the same time as the program activate the relevant option here Configure interface Note Every time the configuration dialog is being invoked the dialing unit is being newly initialized It is therefore not possible to check the current settings
342. or objects on level 3 you can easily change the properties of all objects in retrospect by making the corresponding default settings on levels 1 and 2 To use this possibility efficiently it is recommended that you consider the following first What font options are generally to be used for objects These font options should then be set as default for level 1 under Settings Default Font Which settings should be used for the majority of the various object types These settings should then be made under Object Defaults for every object type Individual settings that only apply to single objects only need to be and should only be made where a single object deviates from these defaults If you later decide that you want all text objects to use a different font after all you do not have to individually change the properties of all the text objects It suffices in this case to change the font for text objects generally under Object Defaults and all text objects will automatically be given the new font 281 Input form designer Locking settings It is not always desirable to change all objects if you change something in the default settings retrospectively For this reason it is possible to lock the properties of individual objects to stop them being affected To do this select the objects whose properties you wish to lock Then select the command Object gt Lock Properties You now have the choice of locking font or color sett
343. orer of the SOL Server and select New database from the context menu Enter a new name in the field Database name that is not used ye g cRM Medium MS SQL Open the SOL database file e g cRM Solution Medium sql from the project directory The first line contains the name of the new database e g USE cR ed Po da M Medium this line of course has match the name of database you just created it the name if necessary Click Execute afterwards stgresOL Right click on the new database and select Restore Open the Backup abase file e g cRM Solution Medium backup from the project directory Click OK afterwards Solution Distribution 13 4 Solution Distribution Using the cRM Project Distribution Assistant you can distribute cRM projects the SOL database the cRM project file and the input form definitions The application for project distribution CRMShip6 exe can be found in the cRM application directory or select File gt Help gt Tools gt Solution Distribution gt Select Distribute project to create a zip file including the SOL database the cRM project file and the input form definitions To do this enter the login data of the SOL server the project file file extension crm and the name of the zip file in the subsequent dialog gt Select Restore project to save the selected project zip file with project and database with file extension bak in the desired directory and to attach
344. orkspace Objects can then only be placed along these lines gt Select the command Settings gt Grid gt Setup A dialog appears in which the desired gap between the gridlines can be set The horizontal and vertical grid gaps can be set independently or can be set to the same size with the Synchronous option With the option Active you can activate and deactivate the guide grid In the active state objects can only be positioned along the invisible guidelines in the workspace In the inactive state objects can be positioned anywhere without the grid being lost The guide grid can be turned on or off with the command Settings gt Grid gt active Input order The order in which the objects were placed on the workspace decides the order in which the cursor moves through the fields of the input form when you press TAB or ENTER during data entry The input order also plays an important role when objects partially or completely overlap Objects that come earlier in the order are in the background Objects that come later in the order are in the foreground and can cover up other objects You can change the display order manually at any time 284 Shared object properties gt Select Object gt Arrange gt Input Order or the corresponding button in the toolbar All objects on the current workspace are shown as rectangular frames with a number These numbers represent the current position of the objects in the display order gt
345. orkspace is the area of the input form designer in which you create the input form It always displays one tab of the input form The tab currently being edited can be seen in the tab overview If you are creating an input form from scratch the workspace will at first be empty Tabs All defined tabs are listed here By clicking on them in the list the selected tab will be shown in the workspace Here you can also make various settings for the tabs The page Dialog has a special position With this you can influence the general size of the individual tab pages Additionally you can place objects fields or buttons outside of the actual tabs 276 Tabs Select Fields In this list you can select the type of object that is to be inserted into a tab For every object type the different insertion options are listed in the specific selection e g database fields or functions The selection is made easily by drag amp drop and the field of the function then simply has to be placed in the desired location on the tab Input Order All fields inserted in the workspace are listed here in the tab order and can also be edited from here By clicking a listed field this is automatically highlighted in the workspace in the corresponding tab The status bar In the status bar you are given information about the current position of the cursor or the currently selected object field In the left part of the status bar the position of the cursor
346. ose is selected in the title bar but is 209 General configuration 15 To minimized as a symbol in the notification area of the taskbar With Right click gt Show the program window can be displayed again Select File gt Exit if you wish to close the application completely If you deactivate this option you will no longer be reminded of upcoming appointments and tasks after closing the program window Note If an already running instance of cRM is found when starting the program the user is asked if he she would rather switch to this This avoids unwanted multiple instances if the minimized cRM was overlooked in the taskbar This check is not undertaken if the SHIFT key is held down while starting the program Add internal views to the navigation The navigation is expanded with the internal views info center appointments tasks calls Recycle view windows automatically By double clicking a view in the navigation an already open view is not opened again Always show total record count in status bar The continuous determination of the total number of records in the status bar can be disabled This reduces the load on the database server especially when record rights activated but also with many parallel users Use standard window scroll bar in container list view Open new tabs left if you are used to that from other applications Use ribbon instead of menu and toolbars Maximum number of open view windows in order
347. ou can create as many users as you like though only the number of licensed users have access at the same time f one or more cRM instances are running on a workstation with the same cRM user name login then these instances are jointly using exactly one cRM license f one or more cRM instances are running on a workstation with different cRM user names login then these instances use one cRM license for each different cRM login Each terminal server session is treated as one workstation 33 Preparation and Installation Rental licenses have a specified period of validity or can be terminated To check the validity of the rental license you must perform a validity check at regular intervals To do that the work station must have an Internet connection through which you can connect to the combit Website Then the basic and possible existing extension license serial numbers are transferred to our server As long as their validity is confirmed another check will not be necessary again until the month after next f a validity check is required a message is displayed in the login dialog and in the taskbar notification area for all members of the Administrators group far enough in advance of the expiration date that the license must be checked within the next several days In the login dialog and under File gt Help gt About there is a Validity Check button for this For automations this validity check can als
348. ountry Private DE or Country Private Cond IsNullOrEmpt GContacts Street Cond IsNullOrEmpty ZIPPOBox Private or IsNullOrEmpty POBox Private Cond not CompanylD Companies ID Country DE or IsNullOrEmpty Edit Expression is correct 9o OK Cancel Customize a label If you have created a new label using the project wizard the necessary objects are already placed on the workspace gt To place further objects select the appropriate tool from the toolbar on the left e g Text Drag open a text object in the workspace appears as a rectangular frame Double click the text object you created In the following dialog click on the New button to create a new line in the label Define all the individual lines of the label 230 Customizing print templates a Paragraph Properties Paragraphs B mx amp amp B B 8j ca ITTREEEEESSNNN CompanyID Companies ID Company2 Font Calibri 12 0 pt CompanyID Companies ID Company3 Format None lt Contacts Salutation gt 4 Layo lt Department gt Alignment Left lt Companies Street_POBox gt Appearance Condition Always Show lt Companies ZIP_City gt Blank Optimization Yes lt Companies Country gt Inerasable No pe Justified No Line Spacing 0 0pt Line Wrap Truncate Paragraph Spacing 0 0 pt Appearance m v WYSIWYG OK Cancel The rows of the label should for example contain the variables of the address In th
349. our user settings remain unchanged The tables will be converted to Unicode only necessary in MS SQL and extended by some fields The last opened project database at this workstation e g combit is recognized by the installation program and is automatically converted By converting the fields from the schedule and task management are converted to Unicode only necessary in MS SQL a function to fuzzy e mail search and if used in the solution the views of the user management are created Your data tables remain unchanged in MS SQL your data will not automatically be converted to Unicode Only MS SQL Provided further project databases are available when you open the database the dialog The internal structure of the database has to be adjusted will be displayed In this case follow the instructions of the application to carry out the structure adjustment To carry out the structure adjustment the stored procedure cmbt sp Conter2NChar is created and used The cRM database user e g combit requires View Definition rights to view this stored procedure since otherwise the dialog The internal structure of the database has to be adjusted will always be displayed This can be done e g through the query analyzer by running use name of the database GO GRANT VIEW DEFINITION ON dbo cmbt sp Convert2NChar TO combit GO With the cRM5 6 7 changed reset user passwords cannot be read by older cRM versions You have th
350. ove All Waypoints hanges Context gt Save hanges Context gt Save amp Close hanges Context gt Cancel art gt Record gt Delete gt Delete All art gt Record gt New gt Duplicate C C C Start gt Record gt Delete S S S art gt Record gt Extended gt Merge Records Go To First Record Go To gt Previous Record Go To gt Next Record Go To gt Last Record 9 art gt Record gt Reference gt Send To art gt Record gt Reference gt Save as V CD art gt Record gt Reference gt Copy to Clipboard n art gt Record gt Reference gt Add to Favourites Yn art gt Record gt Extended gt Watch Record Yn art gt Actions gt Dial n art gt Actions gt Send E mail o hanges Context gt Undo Q hanges Context gt Cut Q hanges Context gt Copy Q hanges Context gt Paste n art gt Find gt Quick Find n art gt Find gt Find n art gt Find gt Special Find n art gt Find gt In Directories gt Find Record in Online Directories and Social Media Start gt Find gt In Directories gt Find Record in Phone Directory Start gt Find gt In Directories gt Manual Transfer from a Phone Directory Start gt Actions gt Route Planning gt Set Current Record as Starting Point Start gt Actions gt Route Planning gt Set Current Record as Stopover Start gt Actions gt Route Planning gt Set Cu
351. p gt Online Registration p gt Online Update Check p gt Support gt Forums p gt Support gt Knowledgebase elp gt Support gt Participate in Online p gt Support gt Support Area p gt Tools V address pick up V p gt Tools gt Debug Tool V p gt Tools gt E Mail Autopilot p gt Tools gt LDAP Server V p gt Tools gt License Upgrade Solution Distribution V p gt Tools p Tools gt Workflow Server ormation gt Auto Counter ormation gt Company Master Data ormation gt Database Structure ormation gt Events ormation gt Navigation Structure ormation gt Project Import ormation gt Properties ormation gt Provide for WebAccess ormation gt Reorganize Command in Toolbar Views gt Delete Views gt New File gt Exit gt Help Topics gt Contact gt About gt Online Registration gt Online Support gt Check for Updates Internet gt Online Support gt Forums gt Online Support gt Knowledgebase gt Online Support gt Participate in Online Session gt Online Support gt Support Area gt Tools gt address pick up gt Tools gt Debug Tool gt Tools gt E Mail Autopilot gt Tools gt LDAP Server gt Tools gt License Upgrade gt Tools gt Solution Distribution gt Tools gt Workflow Server Settings gt Administration gt Auto Counter Settings gt Proje
352. pe in the list You can now make changes delete the document type or change the sequence using the arrows When adding a document a new record is always created With the option Open record for editing when adding document you can set by field type File Link whether this record should be opened or whether the record should be created silently in the background gt Document management If you activate the option Create new file without user interaction the file is saved directly in the defined folder and is opened for editing If you wish to manually select the save location of a new file when it is created deactivate this option You also define the field defaults of the new record in the Archive view by clicking on the corresponding button Field Defaults for Activities EJ In the following you can define additional field defaults of the new record Fields BX a Field Formula DateTime DateS Now 02d 2 02m 04y 02H 902i 0 Comment Document Title Responsible lt cRM User LoginName gt ActivityType 5 a OK Cancel In the Fields area you specify which entry is to be made in which field The respective fields of the target view are available for this You specify the auto text in the Formula column Formulas give you access to data fields and additional information which could also be used for the entry By clicking the Formula editor button you get help from a wizard For the direction of t
353. perties can be reached by double clicking the object or select Properties in the context menu of the object It will open a multifunctional editing dialog that is built up differently depending on the object type The tabs Program Tooltip Autotext Cont Link and Input validation that are available for several objects are discussed in this section 285 Input form designer Preset In the Preset tab you can set a certain value that is automatically entered when a new record is created Enter the desired input If for example you mostly had retailers in your customer file you could set that Retailer is entered under Category in every new record In this way you can often save yourself from having to type a common input Display format of input fields A formatting dialog is available for all input fields comboboxes and static text The formatting is applied to the result of the entire expression gt Open the dialog with the Formatting button on the Properties tab gj No Format Number Currency Date Time Date and Time Date Time Difference Percentage Angle Preview 2 H Format Decimal places Decimal point Thousands separator Format for negative values Color for negative values Exponential format Unit No output if value is 0 Always 0 before decimal point 1 amp I Optimized decimal places 12 346 Application setting Application setting A
354. played as the Status ready the current connection is ready to be dialed 121 Telephoning and call list Aborted the dialing process was cancelled but can be restarted at any time Connection established the number has been successfully dialed The entry can be removed from the list or can be saved for later calls Phone list functions The phone manager allows the direct jump from an entry in the phone list to the corresponding record in the view for example to look up information about the person being called or to make a note about the conversation With Start gt Pause you can interrupt a dialing process at any time The entry will be given the status Aborted but can be dialed again at any time With Start gt Next the entry following the current entry is automatically dialed You are then given the option to delete the current entry again because the call is completed or to send it to the end of the list because it should be called again later e g because the line is currently engaged With Start gt Move Item you can send the current entry to the end of the list With Start gt Delete Item you can delete the current entry from the list With the command Start Switch to Application context menu Find Record you can move from an entry in the phone manager straight to the corresponding record The required view will be opened for this Printing the phone list You can print the phone list w
355. port Backward as PDF as Excel File E mail Navigate Instant Reports ax isi Companies Business sector distribut iai Companies ABC analysis chart iai Companies Contact persons ai Contacts Addresses isi Contacts Address list with activities isi Contacts Various contact reports i SalesOpportunities Opportunity list v iai SalesOpportunities Sales pipeline isi SalesOpportunities Stages e L Companies x Contacts x S Appointments Tasks x yx ERN d gt cll Views Sly Favorites History FEET Y fitter GJ Watch Results i Seiten Verz S B Active Users Marh 49 49 Administrator SRVDB 3 3 Creating a new record gt Select Start gt New The input form of the current view shows a record with empty fields in which you can now enter the new data gt Using the Return or lt Tab gt keys you can move to the next field 3 4 Editing a record You can edit records in the input form view list view and containers In the input form view gt Click on the field that you want to edit to enter the edit mode gt Enter the new data and save the changes afterwards with Edit gt Save 50 gt gt Editing a record If you are in the input form view in edit mode and have made a change to a field that you wish to undo select the function Edit Undo With Edit Cancel all field change
356. pplication setting Application setting Default No Cancel gt With the format editor you can set the format for numbers currency dates time percentages and angles The system settings are used by default Tip If you only want to format certain areas of an expression by field link e g for text and numbers within an expression use the functions Date and FStr in the formula dialog Appearance Condition UnderAppearance Condition you can use the formula wizard to define the conditions for visibility or whether the object can be edited If you wanted that COMPANY2 can only be 286 Shared object properties edited if COMPANY1 has contents then enter COMPANY1 lt gt under Editability condition of the COMPANY2 properties Tooltips For some objects you have the option of defining tooltips As soon as you move over the corresponding field with the cursor a note will appear with a text you defined The comment contained within is meant to help with data entry so that you instantly know which input variations are possible or in what form something should be entered Even if several people work with the view everyone will know from the tooltip how a field is to be edited because the tips can be defined specifically for the view In this way it is made easier to keep the view consistent Appearance Under Appearance you can select a background color as well as the font and the font color for the
357. projects right clicking on the corresponding view and selecting Table structure in the context menu By Edit Table Structure Database structure E You can define the structure of your database tables here Database table Companies Fields B Fx Field name SQL field type Field size Precision Decimals NULL values allowt Key field ID uniqueidentifie 16 Iv Company nvarchar 100 Iv O Company2 nvarchar 100 Iv Ci Company3 nvarchar 100 Vv r MatchCode nvarchar 50 iv r Country nvarchar 3 Vv r ZIP nvarchar 9 iv r City nvarchar 50 Vv r Street nvarchar 50 iv r ZIPPOBox nvarchar 9 Iv r POBox nvarchar 30 iv r Phone nvarchar 30 iv E Fax nvarchar 30 Vv D Email nvarchar 60 iv rn ComPreference int 4 iv n ae Spe ee zn rz r N 2 Cancel gt Inthe Fields table select the New button to create a new field gt With the Delete button you can remove fields from the database table Clickin a field to edit the field properties The Field name can be usedto referto and identify a field A field name can only be given once per table Note Physical field names in tables may only contain alphanumerical characters i e a Z A Z 0 9 umlauts and _ Numbers may not be the first character The SOL Field type sets what type of data is allowed to be saved in the field The exact meaning of each data type can be found in the documentation of your 182 Database structure database system A
358. pter Replication Synchronization of data In doing so the address data as well as the appointments and tasks are synchronized Further information about this subject can be found in the documentation of the database system being used Also take note of any limitations of the various SOL Server editions Requirements for the synchronization through cRM Because the changes made during data synchronization cannot be undone you should always make a backup of the database first 165 Import export and synchronization The items in the used fields should have the same type of notation For example the street notation should be the same throughout not Edisonstr Edisonstreet or Edison Street depending on who entered the information If necessary all users should be given a company wide policy for the notation in addresses When synchronizing databases in cRM the current view acts as target Master Database into which the results of the synchronization can be transferred The other data source Slave Database acts as source and generally remains unchanged The active view is therefore brought up to date with the synchronization of the Slave Database Selecting the format and data source Select Data gt Import with Synchronization in the corresponding view to start the synchronization wizard The synchronization can be carried out with numerous different text and database formats You will see the formats listed in
359. r Waypoints fx 4 Name Street ZIP City Country 7 combit GmbH Untere Laube 30 738462 Konstanz DE Anwaltskanzlei Rechi Falckensteinstr 17 12307 Berlin DE Fahrradverleih Boder Seepromenade 34 88709 Meersburg DE Immobilien Hauser Karlsruherstr 34 78048 Villingen Schwe DE Le H tel du Pont Det 14 quai Louvre 75001 Paris FR B robedarf Schr der Laubwaldstr 67 78224 Singen DE Nachtclub Saturday Herbertstr 10 20359 Hamburg DE 2 Show waypoints Cancel In the dialog Route Planning select Show waypoints to transfer the waypoints to Microsoft MapPoint In Microsoft MapPoint you can adjust the display of the data via Data gt Data Assignment Wizard Additional information can be found in the MapPoint documentation General information on faxing 11 Fax 11 1 General information on faxing You have the option of sending single and multiple faxes directly from the program without much effort The currently loaded record serves as the data source for single faxes With multiple faxes the current filter of the database is used Note Requirement for faxing is that a fax program is installed and the PC is equipped with a fax modem or is connected to a faxserver Under Windows 7 8 the Windows Fax and Scan is included which include all the necessary functions to send and receive faxes For more information see http windows microsoft com en us windows 7 Set up your computer to send and receive faxes Alternatively you can
360. r The automatic distribution of the MSI installation module in networks can be done in the usual way for Windows networks You find the installation modules SPClient x86 msi SPClient x64 msi in the cRM installation folder Alternatively they can be downloaded from the Microsoft website When a document stored in SharePoint is retrieved edited and stored again in SharePoint by the cRM the libary s versioning is implicitly supported Digital signatures interface 18 OpenLimit CC Sign secrypt digiseal office and secrypt digiseal server 2 e siqia esiCAPI Architecture Skype interface Skype version 3 1 5 1 is required Unicode Characters The following functions do not support foreign characters if they are not supported by Windows address pick up connection to telephone directory and route planner sending mail via simple MAPI LDAP servers path and filename for eml files in the mailviewer For more information about Unicode see Unicode in chapter Configuration of projects 1 2 Architecture Windows Client The combit Relationship Manager cRM has a classic Client Server 2 tier architecture The cRM itself is a so called fat client For the database connection OLEDB is used to connect to MSSQL and libpq is used for PostgreSQL The settings for these connectors define the supported network protocols e g TCP IP needed ports and if applicable the encryption of the connection The data is administered on the dat
361. r to display information from relationally linked views such as from documents contacts references etc Button modifiable button that can be assigned a large variety of functions etc 19 7 Specific object properties The tabs Autotext Cont Link Program Input validation and Preset are discussed in closer detail before the individual object descriptions Regardless of the type of object in the preview field in the lower area of the properties window the currently selected settings are displayed Static text Text objects contain text which is displayed later in the input form and cannot be changed All fields in your view are available for this object type in the field selection The option Static text has a special importance here This option does not correspond to a field in the view but allows you to place your own text on the workspace Fixed text is useful for describing fields and other objects in the input form or for requests and tips for the user 292 Specific object properties Infront of the data field Company the static text Company should be written To do this place the Company text infront of the Company input field as a static text object in the input form Properties If the field has been inserted via an entry Field name gt from the field selection the text is determined by the respective field content and can not be changed However on the tab Text you can specify w
362. r server properties Properties gt Security select the option SOL Server and Windows authentication Mode as the server authentication This way the setup can automatically carry out all of the previously mentioned required settings Create the respective Windows user in SOL Server Security folder manually and grant the necessary access rights db datareader db datawriter to the combit databases combit cRM System and combit Either one also allows the MS SOL Server authentication by setting this in the Enterprise Manager server properties Properties gt Security recommended This way all previously mentioned settings will be made automatically by the setup The various Windows users can be set up in the MS SQL Server and the appropriate access rights db datareader db datawriter can be given for the combit databases combit cRM System and combit Network access with SOL Server Express Edition Normally SOL Server Express Edition only permits local client connections For the cRM client to be able to connect with the SOL server the database it must be ensured that the Microsoft SOL server has been configured for remote connections Otherwise the client will receive the following message when starting cRM SOL Server does not exist or access denied PostgreSQL Server installation Please read through the following notes carefully General Notes Generally the cRM installation can only attach to existing Postgre
363. r this you have access to the formula editor and the default settings Create a Comment Subject For this you have access to the formula editor 205 Configuration of views If you send a reference by e mail with Start gt Reference gt Send to this entry will be used in the subject line This entry is displayed in the Record column in the History Linking to appointments amp tasks and phone calls phone manager With the formula editor you can set here which contents are displayed in the fields With Subject or Info when creating an appointment a task or launching a phone call via the phone manager 14 13 General On the General tab various functions are available to you Adjust the size of the Input form Resize window to size of input form In this case the window size is fitted to the size of the input form Resize input form to size of window This option has the effect that the input form is always adjusted to the window size you give That means even if you make the window smaller you will always have the entire input area visible No Scaling The input form always appears in the size set in the input form designer Select the Color of the tab To make the interface more clear different colors can be assigned to the Tab of each view Clicking the row you can select the color or type directly the RGB format E mail You have the option of letting sent e mails be stored in the docume
364. r whose configuration should be used as a template If there is no address manager directory on the current system anymore just copy the address manager data directory with the databases from your previous address manager directory and enter the path to it here Then choose the desired database and input form Now choose the corresponding database server from the list Enter the existing database or respectively enter a new name for it Please note that neither databases nor tables with the same name as the dbf file or a container field may exist Numbers may not be the first character Lastly enter a file name for the new project file You also have the opportunity to migrate further address manager databases into an existing project file To do this choose the option Bestehende Projektdatei erweitern Note while doing this that field descriptions are not allowed to occur more than once If another field called Documents exists in a different database for instance it must be renamed first Start the migration operation with Weiter and it will run automatically User interface 2 Getting started In the following section you will find an overview of the user interface and the various settings that are available 2 1 User interface The user interface has various elements and windows View Mode Tabs for change between the views Ribbon input form compit Relationship Manager Medium English Cont
365. ram and choose File gt Options gt User Administration The user Administrator is already present Important For security reasons you must give the Administrator user a password because it has already been given all available rights Microsoft SOL Server Installation MS SQL Server login method Generally MS SOL Server as well as Windows Authentication are supported Windows Authentication This authentication method provides the highest level of security and uses Windows user accounts for login to the SOL Server as well The account can thus be transferred to the SOL server in a much more secure manner The disadvantage with this method is that you can then no longer access the SOL server via the Internet on the default port 1433 Through the authentication further ports are required that might need to be activated which is something that network administrators do not like to do This is why external access in this case should occur via the terminal server SQL Authentication The recommended login method is the MS SQL Server authentication which enables external access the cRM setup creates a new definable MS SQL Server user that can be used for login This user is automatically given the necessary access rights to the combit_cRM_System and the combit_ project databases If the MS SQL server at hand only supports Windows Authentication for login the following possibilities exist 22 Server Installation In SQL Server unde
366. rch terms into different fields these will automatically be linked with AND The fields can be in different tabs Select the desired search modes normal exact wildcard and phonetic or contains are also available in the OBE filter Code field entries e g categories check boxes e g credit rating OK and 1 1 relationally linked fields e g Sector1 can also be selected Example All company records with the city Konstanz and code Fair invitation Enter Konstanz in the field City Choose the code Fair invitation in the Options tab Select the normal filter mode and execute the filter with the button OK A All records that contain the city Konstanz and also contain the code Fair invitation will automatically be searched for 5 5 Full text search With the full text search you can search for specific information in a record of which you are not completely sure in which field it can be found gt Select Filter gt Full Text Query and then enter in which fields of the view you wish to search gt Enter the search term in the search criteria and run the filter with OK In the case of numerical or date fields you must enter the searched numbers or date gt A full text search can also be attached to another filter To do this activate Include current filter 5 6 Filter duplicate items dupes You have the option to filter the database for possible double items This can be sensib
367. re To suppress this message use the preload settings in the DocuWare Viewer For more information see the TecDoc chapter Preload Settings in the DocuWare ELO ELOprofessional 7 2011 or ELOoffice 6 9 is required Specialties It will always be tried to create the defined document archive path so that the Archive structure can be created per formular function during archiving Indexing can also be configured in the document management windream windream version 4 5 is required Specialties The windream DMS server that is currently active is always used Assign a drive letter in the windream server settings for the alias windream settings easyEnterprise x Specialties Indexing must necessarily configured in the document management SharePoint Microsoft SharePoint 2010 2013 is required Specialties The Microsoft SharePoint 2010 runtime modules require Windows 7 8 Windows Server 2008 R2 2012 Windows Vista Windows XP is not supported officially by Microsoft nevertheless it worked well in our tests As soon as SharePoint is selected as the document management system in the cRM s project properties the cRM automatically recognizes if the Microsoft SharePoint 2010 runtime modules are installed on the client when the project is loaded and provides the user an opportunity to install these if they are missing The installation module is from Microsoft and requires an interactive confirmation of an license agreement by the use
368. re just numbers which should be treated as numbers in Sort orders or comparison operations Date If the contents are pure date values to be used in sort orders or comparison operations They are marked with a calendar button in the input form A click with the left mouse button opens a calendar a click with the right inserts today s date 186 Fields DateTime If the contents are just dates and times that are to be used in sort orders or comparison operations e g so called time stamp Characters long If the contents are detailed notes unstructured contact protocols or other comments Any character strings that can contain letters numbers and special characters Code Code attributes i e deposited criteria or so called keywords that can be prearranged for a record for classification 999 characters max length For fields that are larger code Is not offered as a field type Picture If the contents are graphics that are to be displayed or printed in cRM Supported image formats JPG PCD WMF BMP DIB RLE PCX TIF Content is Path and file name of a graphics Tile Embedded Picture Any image files e g pictures charts can be stored directly in the database system and can be displayed in the input form automatically Telephone Same as Character Telephone fields allow automatic phone dialing Mobile Phone Same as Character MobilePhone fields allow automatic phone dialing and the sending of SMS messages Country
369. reamember of the Administrators group Have been given the general right Work with unknown project In this case it is an unknown project since no rights will yet have been assigned to the user in it Have already been given explicit rights for this project by the administrator 312 Rights management These requirements also apply for the view specific rights Additionally in the user management notification options for monitoring of records can be configured aa 8 amp xE amp Im 4 User amp Administrator User 8 User2 Users User4 amp Workflow 4 Groups E Administrators E Users Users Rights Administration Master Data General Project Views Records Fields gt General Create Project General Settings Run Scripts Work With Ur Customize Mi See Other Use Edit Workflow Execute Work Schedule Create Appoir View Other U Edit Delete Ot Create Appoir Link Other Us zi Database Cor Settings Change User gg No No User Settings Record Watch Notification per e mail none Own changes Notify a Cancel Email notification If the Record Watch function is active for a record an email will be sent to the selected email address when a change is made An instance of the cRM Workflow Servers must be running for this function to work More information on the Workflow Server can be found in the chapter Workf
370. ributes to a whole selection of records or wish to edit them you can do this through Data gt Modify More information about this can be found in the chapter Data organization 58 Supporting automatisms 3 10 Supporting automatisms Using various automatisms you can make data entry and changes to records even faster Some of the following functions have to be configured in advance but doing so will certainly save time in the future Some of the automatisms such as content links comboboxes autotext and dupe control have already been described in the chapter Know how Considerations and so will not be discussed here further Efficient data entry Data entry and the maintenance of the addresses are an extremely important aspect of work It should be undertaken carefully Just think about how often you normally have to type addresses and how much time you would save by avoiding having to type out an address only once Regardless of whether you prefer using the mouse or the keyboard for the operation of the interface When entering an address you should definitely move from field to field e g from firm1 to firm2 using the keyboard using the RETURN or ENTER key Enter the contents of each field and complete the entry by pressing RETURN to move to the next field If a field needs to be left empty simply press RETURN again The intelligent layout order of the fields pays off here considerably Content links As mentioned
371. rm A nn n RtrimS SalutationLetter Name with the combit Relationship Manager you can mail merge directly without passing on to the word processor to print You can configure all standard formatting options This template shows the DIN norm 676 A and partially also DIN 5008 The placeholders have to be filled with your own data of course Yours sincerely ToRTFS cRM Project Company Company Attachment Document oiu Appl OK Cancel t Apply ancel The output of many sided letters is also possible Proceed as follows gt Right click and select Assign a layer Choose the First Page layer and click OK So the address return address return address logo and date objects are assigned to the First Page layer In this way they will only be output on the first page Option 1 see included template Direct standard letter template crd So that the letter text starts at the top of the page on the next side a dummy rectangle is placed as an object and is linked vertically Relative to end inverse with the text This dummy rectangle begins where the letter textis meantto start on the next page The height of the dummy rectangle sets the value by which the text is to be moved up and increased in size on the following pages 232 Customizing print templates m Ee DrawingTools Print Template Designer C Program Files x86 combit cRM Solutions Me P pepe Start Insert Project De
372. rmat Excel If you choose the Excel format another dialog is opened In this dialog you can select the Excel file and if necessary the data range Select the Excel file with the button Browse As standard the data range is found automatically i e all columns are read in for which there is an item in the first row With the button Settings you can set the data range to be read in yourself To do this activate the option Define data explicitly and enter the Excel coordinates If you activate the option First line contains data the field contents of the first row are not used as descriptions but are imported as data In this case the columns are given the titles A B C 156 Import of records Select Data Source File name Users Admin Documents data xls C3 y i Tablet ae x Data Range O Read data range automatically Define data range explicitly From To Al R1200 First line contains data OK Cancel UK Cancer Special case import format ODBC and Access If you select the format ODBC or Access another dialog is opened In this dialog the ODBC data source must be set up in several steps Toadda new data source select ODBC Admin Select Data Source Data source File name i amp Microsoft Outlook David InfoCenter amp dBASE Files Excel Files MS Access Database SOL Server Visio Database Sample
373. rmula column you can set the auto log text With formulas you have access to data fields and additional information that can also be used for the entry With the Formula button a wizard will open to provide assistance If the formula returns an empty string as a result during auto protocol the corresponding field will not be written Depending on the action specific action variables are available e mail print export Action Template returns the description of the template Transfer Action Template returns the description of the transfer template Phone call number of attempted calls date duration first info info last info note number status The lt Action Status gt variable has the following values Document management and associated meanings 3 Phone call unsuccessful engaged 5 Phone call unsuccessful hung up 6 Phone call unsuccessful call not accepted 8 Phone call unsuccessful other error otherwise Phone call successful 14 10 Document management With the document management you can assign any number of documents to a record which are then displayed in a container with information such as author contents etc When creating documents you can use document templates In the configuration of the document management you can set how documents are saved field type save directory file name which document templates are available for new documents and which field conten
374. rmula e g so that all documents are saved in the directory with the relevant customer number of the record In the next field enter the path of the Transfer template if required You need this if information from fields of the view is to be transferred directly into the document e g address name scanned in signature etc Note The transfer form may not contain any additional document templates because the document template is already set in the Template field Further information about transfer forms can be found under Configuring transfer templates in chapter General configuration In the field file name you can now assign a formula for the automatic allocation of a file name when creating a new document With the help of the formula wizard you can define these rules With the arrow button you can set the default The variable ParentRecordDescription is used in the default settings It contains the evaluated file reference subject formula to the active record of the currently active parent view The parent view is the view from which a new document is created through a container e g Peoples Since the document container can be available in several different views e g Peoples and Firms and when configuring the formula it is important to make sure that the fields used are available in all parent views a meaningful name can be created with this variable If you wish to change something later select the document ty
375. roup e g for a mailing we recommend using the filter options under Filtering instead of the search function More information on filtering can be found in the chapter Filtering records 4 1 Search in views You can reach the different search options via Start gt Find Searching is also possible by entering the search term in the search toolbar A full text search is carried out in all character fields Normal search The normal search uses the begins with principle This means you do not have to enter the entire search term that is to be found in the field or fields gt Select Start gt Find Fields to be searched select deselect all items Company Company2 Company3 MatchCode Country ZIP City Street Search criteria fields to be searched Iv Iv Iv r r r r r Estate search criteria Search option Contains C Case sensitive if possible search case sensitive C Include current filter Refining the search search options If multiple results then switch to list view Switch to list view 75 Searching for records gt Now select the fields in which you wish to search from the field overview You also have the option to search in several fields at once Tip In the context menu of the field that you wish to search through click on the Find option You can carry out a normal search even faster like this because the corresponding field will alre
376. rrent Record as m ndpoint art gt Actions gt Route Planning gt Set All Records in Filter as aypoints art gt Actions gt Route Planning gt Remove All Waypoints 20 9 Record Find gt Replace Filter gt General Filter gt Full Text Query Filter gt Query by Example Filter gt Free SOL Query Filter gt Manual gt Include Filter gt Dupes Filter gt Manage Filter Exp Filter gt Last Filter Filter gt Undo Filter Filter gt Invert Filter Organize gt Sort Orders Organize gt Import Organize gt Export Organize gt Synchronize Filter gt Manual gt Compose Filter gt Manual gt Apply Cancel Record Filter gt Manual gt Exclude Record Filter gt Manual gt Include All Records Filter gt Manual gt Exclude All Records Filter gt Execute Filter Expression ressions Filter gt Save Filter as Manual Filter Find gt Route Planning gt Route Planning Filter gt Manual gt Load Record Selection Filter gt Manual gt Save Record Selection Filter gt Manual gt Cancel Record Selection Filter gt Transfer Filter to phone manager Find gt Route Planning gt Get Directions to Current Organize gt Enrich Records From Phone Directory Organize gt Modify Organize gt Append Relationally gt General Organize gt Append Template Organize gt Append Templates Output gt Transfer Record Relationally Relationall
377. rrors on the client Edit LDAP Attributes With the button New you have the option of defining new attributes if the predefined attributes do not suffice Inthe top field you have to enter the LDAP attribute n the bottom field you can enter a description for this attribute This can help to understand the rather arbitrary attribute name at a later date After entering a new attribute and description end the dialog with OK The newly created attribute is added to the list and can be linked with a field With the button Settings already configured attributes can be changed In the associated dialog you can also set the description for the attribute gt With Delete you can remove existing attributes from the list Please note that the attributes CN SN and OBJECTCLASS are necessary for correct data exchange For that reason these cannot be deleted and have to be assigned to a field gt By activating the option Authentication logon without specified login information shall use server authentication you can set that searches may be made in this data source without the client explicitly logging in If a client does log in with a username this is used gt Theoption Define view as standard for combit Relationship Manager sets the specified data source as the standard If the client does not specify a data source this is used If all entries have been made correctly end the dialog with OK The data source
378. rt immediately but do not want to allow any reach requests Stopped No port is opened Search requests cannot be processed Start LDAP Server on windows start If this option is set the LDAP server is started whenever the operating system is started This feature makes life easier for the user because the LDAP server does not need to be manually started again after the system is turned on Search In the Find tab you can set the corresponding options Connections Here you can enter the maximum number of connections allowed with the server at the same time If the number is exceeded the client will receive a corresponding error message Please note that an excessively large number can cause performance problems You should therefore depending on the available resources not allow more than 10 connections Data Source If this option is activated you can enter a standard data source in the lower option fields This is used if the client does not specify an application when searching Please note that only the applications installed on your system are available If all settings have been conducted you can end the dialog with OK Any changes are only active after the server is restarted 240 combit LDAP server Configuration of the server Adding view So that the LDAP server can access the views of the combit Relationship Manager these must first be configured To do this click the item Data Source gt Add The following dia
379. rties ss 181 Fieldirightss ueei ettet 315 Field typesi iiec 186 Key Fielde tariyman mny mm 183 UNICOde pinoi nana 183 File cards CUSTOMIZE edges 234 PRICING d tort rom hen mma ences dt 139 FING T iicet td tici d 87 Alphabetic Filter ssss 48 ASKSIFIIG ihe ees 92 Containers co ao tcd 100 document content 91 Double entries ssssssss 96 Dupes as cede R 96 Entire Table xc 97 Free SQL query 93 Frequency statistics 92 Full text query 96 Generals c kids INVER Ute EE aS tH tepore Ed Last Filter 342 OPC alos acne 89 ParticularitiGS erts 100 Query by Example OBE 96 Recently used Filter 93 Rielatiorialsss stored sree des 91 DAVE ie EE PADS 95 Transfer to phone manager 97 D ndo secu xES abt amines 87 LI SOP QUOIYE aret ite 92 glo MM 75 Find and replace 81 n phone directories 83 Normal difds iita 75 Phonetic find sss 77 Quick TING Axess e ees 77 ReTiNIN Gs ah aes acit e dites 77 Houte planllg om cette 84 MIldCard i 76 Fom aten tete Lt Eft tide as 286 Formatting ideo avere ete dta 43 Formula wizard sss 215 Formula S ss eee 230 Free cOntehbss iem eee 237 Free SOL Query uci mitte 93 Frequency statistics 92 Full text search 96 Function definitions ASSIQM retten AEA 194 E mail template
380. s ODBC Admin Refresh OK Cancel gt Inthe dialog ODBC Data Source Administrator select Add to add a new data source 157 Import export and synchronization Gg ODBC Data Source Administrator 32 bit User DSN System DSN File DSN Drivers Tracing Connection Pooling About User Data Sources Name Platform Driver Add dBASE Files 32bit Microsoft Access dBASE Driver dbf ndx Excel Files 32bit Microsoft Excel Driver xls xlsx xlsm xd Remove MS Access Database 32bit Microsoft Access Driver mdb accdb SQL Server 32 64bit SQL Server Native Client 10 0 Configure Visio Database Samples 32 bit Microsoft Access Driver mdb accdb An ODBC User data source stores information about how to connect to the indicated data provider A Eb User data source is only visible to you and can only be used on this computer OK Cancel Apply Help gt Select the corresponding driver e g Microsoft Access Driver Create New Data Source Select a driver for which you want to set up a data source Name Driver para o Microsoft Visual FoxPro Microsoft Access dBASE Driver dbf ndx mdx Microsoft Access Driver mdb Microsoft Access Driver mdb accdb Microsoft Access Text Driver bt csv DL ETT i Microsoft Access Treiber mdb Microsoft dBase Driver dbf S x noan eme ms x Back Finish Cancel gt In the following dialog s
381. s Note Whether modification is being performed by the server or by the client depends on the input When the modification is to be done server side e g due to no usage of formulas then the database server will perform the entire process 3 16 Appending records relationally With this function a new record is automatically created and linked in the relationally linked view e g activities for every record in the active view according to the defined field list After a marketing activity for example e g mailing product sport leaflet 07 you can append the item Mail product 05 2011 to the activity container for all records in the active filter Note Relational appending can be carried out directly from the server when using MSSQL as long as no List amp Label formulas variables are being used that refer to the records themselves Appending records relationally Select Data Append Relationally 72 Appending records relationally Select the relational view in which the new records are to be created You have all defined 1 N and N M relations available The relation alias is displayed in brackets In the field list you can define the field contents of the new records through the New button To do this select the field of the linked view in the Field column and write either text or a formula e g the date in the Formula column With the Formula button you open the formula wizard which supports for e
382. s 1 Preparation and Installation cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 15 1 1 System Requirements sssssssssssseeeeneneemememen nennen 15 CHMIEIG SC IV Gis ucc tecto e e ae tete tn dat alah caine Net 15 Supported Database Servers 15 CHMAWeBAG GSS occ b e d b b i etta oe 15 GRMAWiRdOws CIIGnt ss e em te ten a Aine Pate nr eda 16 1 2 Architecture secco n NEC E ERI AR ERERR teed VER ORE ERU LIPE 19 Windows Glient cie eae das ate te re dain edet f he wares 19 CHMAWebBAGC GSS or cst ue tb e d cit nde tee cet 19 149 ServerInstallatiOni 5 ree nnn REX ERR ERRARE e MEE ERR A rex EE TAE 19 Starting the CRM installation program s sss 20 Assigning rights in the network sess 22 Seting Up iNe ASST S o ha s o S OH AES tus mt du 22 Microsoft SOL Server Installation sssssssseeeeenns 22 PostgreSQL Server installation er ao cater ptt 23 1544 ClientihstallatiQnz zoo eb errat eren s She PR et da eret x ese atra a 24 Copying prograrm tiles T 6ally 4a ait a cet a ea 25 1 5 Choosing a database connection cccceceececeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeaeeneees 25 1 6 Update installation cect eee ee cece ee eee ee esse ee eeeeeeeeeee nents 26 Update Server installatlOn decine he eter s 26 Update ClientunstallatiOn z x eo e e eG 28 Update WabBAGCGSS eoe corte ee atat RH adn eniagi aie aes 28 1 7 Uninstall oreet ener nhe ere annot er ege
383. s 19 Input form designer With the input form designer you have the possibility of designing the input form of the views You can create a completely unique software interface based on your requirements and preferences Every input form can be made up of up to 19 consecutive tabs Each tab has a strip with which it can be brought to the front the first 9 also with ALT 1 9 The desired fields buttons etc can be distributed between the various tabs as required Note Input forms are always saved with the file extension DLI For every view there is one DLI file These are stored in the same directory as the project file 19 1 Editing input forms In the following section you will find a description of how you can edit input forms or create them from scratch and insert the desired fields and buttons If you are not familiar with the input form designer we recommend you read this chapter before designing an input form Open the input form designer with Settings gt Input Form For new input forms the suggested size for the tabs is based on the screen area available to the main window at the time For this reason it is recommended to go to full screen mode when you run the input form designer Customize an inputform Usually it is easier to customize an existing input form from another view rather than create a new one from scratch To do this go to the command Input Form in the input form designer Now decide whether you want t
384. s M E Complaints 1 anp Nor or 4 x E ComPreference al ContactPersons 1 upper Companies Country upper N USA E ContactsRelations E LeadSource Eg PaymentBehaviour lt gt The expressions of the different views will be concatenated with AND C Include current filter 2 Other options v Load Save Execute Cancel Note The option Case sensitive is not available for fields of type Character long and can only be used if it has been set in the database server configuration gt For these conditions to be used in the filter expression now click on Add and then on Execute Example You want to filter all records which are located in the city Konstanz gt From the list of fields you choose CITY gt As expression you choose equal to 88 General Filter gt The value would be Konstanz Example You want to filter all records whose field Note contains enthusiastic gt From the list of fields you choose Note gt As expression you choose contains The value would be enthusiastic Tip lf you wish to filter an already created selection select the option Include current filter Creating a filter with combined conditions If you want to set a filter with various conditions you have to combine these conditions with logical operators AND Both conditions apply Intersection NOT Is used if a particular condition absolutely does not apply Complement OR
385. s in the record are discarded With Edit gt Cut you can quickly remove marked text in a field Edit gt Copy copies marked text into the clipboard With Edit gt Paste you can then paste the text back into another field Using the Return or lt Tab gt keys you can move to the next field In the list view and containers Click on the field that you want to edit to enter the edit mode After closing the input field by clicking another location the changes to the record are immediately saved This can also be triggered by an appointment reminder or an incoming call The events Record is being saved and Record has been saved are not triggered DateTime Type Direction Pronty Category Comment 19 09 2012 14 30 00 5j e Some questions LEICELIN E NENNEN NENEN 2 14 07 2012 11 45 43 Ifa field of type Memo field is longer than 256 characters it cannot be edited directly fthe list is sorted by the field being edited the record will not automatically be re sorted An input rule defined in the input form is ignored if editing directly in the overview list The special functions of certain fields e g combobox selection list icon selection list are not available when editing in the overview list The editing conditions are defined by the normal field rights A field specific editing limitation defined in the input form is ignored gt With Edit gt Cut you can quickly remove marked
386. s relevant in the actual print The preview window contains a toolbar with which the various functions of the preview can be controlled The selection of the current page can be controlled with the arrow keys or the list 143 Output of data The zoom selection list the magnifying glasses and the 1 1 tool can be used to change the zoom setting with which you can make finer details clear You can also zoom in on details by dragging over them with the left mouse button in the preview window With the print buttons you can individually print the current page in the preview or print the entire document copies are not respected in the preview If you right click on the print button the printer selection dialog will be displayed With Send to the current preview file file extension LL can be sent to other people by e mail They can view the preview print it or send it themselves In this way a preview file can be passed around a workgroup without it having to be printed on paper With Exit Preview you can leave the preview window and return to your application Output to other formats PDF RTF Excel Print outputs can also be output into other file formats For this select the corresponding output medium in the print options dialog Please note that the layout may not always be transferred 1 1 depending of the format since some have specific limits regarding the conversion If you have chosen a format othertha
387. s that are completely enclosed by the selection frame will be selected Objects that are only partly enclosed are not Select the command Object gt Select for more options To select all objects on the workspace at once use the command Select All Select Invert Selection Invert means that all objects that were previously not selected are now selected and all those that were selected are now not Select the option Next Object or Previous Object Alternatively you can use the PLUS key for next or the MINUS key for previous on the number pad Repeat these steps until the desired object is selected The order in which the objects were created is important for this menu item Select the menuitem Next Object or press the PLUS key on the number pad to select the object that was created after the currently selected object see also the section Display order later in this chapter This menu item is useful if an object is so close to another that it is difficult to select with the mouse Position and Size You can move each selected object or change its size If you select multiple objects you can change them all as if a single object were selected Changing the size with the mouse Select the object If you position the mouse on the frame you can change the size by pulling the frame inwards or outwards as indicated by the arrows while holding down the left mouse button You must position the mouse in one corner of the frame in ord
388. s that the search has fewer selection options and that you cannot save the search results You can tell that a filter is active if there is a symbol in the status bar The numerical display filtered records total records of view shows the number of records currently in the filter Under Filter you can find the different available filter options General Very flexible method to filter records QBE Query by Example You fill in the normal input form Free SOL query This makes such queries possible as Filter all records for which no record is connected with attribute X Full text search Filter according to the contents in many different fields Dupes Filter duplicate records Manual Filter Select individual records for which there are no common attributes A global stored filter can also be activated directly from the toolbar EB Filter Output Appointments Tasks Data Settings Window 7 V5 Query By Example Yp Execute Filter Expression Y Y ov Include Record B Include All ABCDEFGHI Q Y Free SQL Quey Yg Full Text Query om Exclude Record EX Exclude All JKLMNOPQR General t r Compose Apply Filter e p Invert Filt Y Dupe Check 2 l Record Selection STUVWXYZ Compose Manually By Sort Order If you wish to undo the filter selection and want to use the whole database select Filter gt Undo Filter All selection criteria will be deleted and all records will once again be available 5 1 General Filter The genera
389. s the tab Edit will be displayed The tab contains the commands you need to work with records 38 Navigation t DT p anager T oEN EN o oe all ADI as Manual Filter When you compose a manual filter the tab Manual Filter will be displayed E combit Relationship Manager Large Firmen 5EN Eme m utot Appoinimenti fa Ms Setting wr 5 x Report When you display a report the tab Report will be displayed EI mu combit Relationship Manager Large Kontakte oM sr reer oup Anpornimentsants Osto Settings Window Report d port Exc i i n Export E as PDF a 3 Appointment When you select an appointment the tab Appointment will be displayed E T p N Vi cNN a 3 x amp Minimizing the Ribbon The Ribbon can be minimized to get more space on the screen Click on the small arrow in the top right of the Ribbon You can quickly minimize the Ribbon by double clicking the name of the active tab Double click again on the tab to restore the Ribbon You can use the Ribbon when it is minimized by clicking on the desired tab first and then on the desired option or command 2 3 Navigation Navigation offers you a centralised method of navigation and easy access to different areas You can turn large buttons into small buttons which can be displayed in a single row of symbols at the bottom edge of the navigation area To do this click on the bar at the top e
390. se the arrow buttons at the bottom of the view to switch between records in the actual sort display the first previous next or last record in the view lq 4 Db An alphabetic filter as a toolbar is also provided for rapid navigation This filters according to the selected letter using the current sorting The current filter is always used unless it is already an alphabetic filter then the previous filter is used ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQR STU OW XUYZ By Sort Order List view In the list view all the records are shown in a clear table This makes it possible to gain a quick overview of the records Starting to type in the list view will trigger the quick search dialog 48 Displaying the records To scroll from record to record several arrow buttons are available to you on the right side of the window With these you can jump to the next record to the next page or right to the start or end of the list f you want to look at a complete record you can switch between the overview list and the detail view with the plus minus buttons in the bottom right corner of the view Records can be displayed as a group Right click on the column title and select Sort Order Group Single or Group Multiple The records will then be displayed as a group corresponding to the selected sort order When Group Single is selected only the first sort order criteria will be considered E combit Relationship
391. sign 0 som Bes P4 A TE Group Outline Lineweight Fill Fill Forward Back Coor Color Effect E Position Shape Properties Arrange Objects x su 50 100 150 200 Imm fccit e TES f E TE I n TE ATI RETE TE n fener ACER D Project s A Letterhead 3 A Sender 7 Letterhead Small company logo Company Name and address A Postal message A Company address A Person address A Date iow 4 Dummy rectangle for size adjustments of following pages pa lt gt Letter text 7 Folding mark J Punching mark 3 i 11 juni 2013 Folding mark Il L hene A Address 7 s Letter template DIN 676 Form A Sehr geehrter Herr Solel 1 with the combit Relationship Manager you can ma merge direct y without passing on to the word 1 processor to print You can configure all standard formatting options j This template shows the DIN norm 676 A and partially also DIN 5008 The placeholders have to be _ flledwithyour own data ofcourse ie 3 Yours sincerely J sunshine agency Objects Layers Preview J Attachment Document Locked No 1 Name Dummy rectangle for size adjustment 4 Appearance J D Border Transparent 4 Export as Pict No g b Filling Transparent j Rounding 0 D Shadow Transparent J Footer Room for required information eg Address J registraton court executive director account relationship 4 Layout ad 1 z4 yj Layout Layout Preview Preview 9 06
392. simple as possible Avoid filters with relations 314 Rights management f the record rights are derived from groups avoid group memberships to multiple groups with record rights Only activate the record rights for the views in which they are truly necessary Limits The general filter and free SOL queries do not respect record rights of relationally linked views thus in theory with corresponding WHERE queries records without access rights could be guessed The relationally linked records are of course not displayed If these are critical records the rights Edit direct SOL query and Edit filter expressions directly can be taken away from the user Saved SOL queries and filtering generally are still possible but no query can be created with which the relationally linked records can be guessed Field rights On the Fields tab you have the option of assigning rights specific to fields You can define for example that a user or a group can only see certain fields in a view or only has editing rights for certain fields Select the view for view rights If you select the top entry Multiselection you can define the rights for multiple views in one step Generally fields rights are turned on with field rights active This is independent of whether settings have been changed in the field list underneath If you select the setting See Groups and the user belongs to a group for which field ri
393. size or even easier select a style sheet from the list 224 Customizing print templates Will il Il v Gulim v6 iM Boz u E If you do not specify a format the default font of the target document is used You can enter style sheets fonts and font sizes directly into the dialog field Please note that you may only set style sheets that are also defined in the document template If you set a style sheet in the transfer template that is not defined in the target document you will receive an error message during the transfer 15 8 Customizing print templates Print templates are used for the direct output of data These can be edited in the integrated List amp Label designer This output is especially suitable for standardized outputs such as standard letters mail merge letters address labels name cards lists and reports Information regarding output with print templates can be found under Output with print templates in chapter Output of data Note Thisis only a small introduction to this subject More detailed information about creating output templates can be found in the additional documentation List amp Label Designer All options and functions are described in detail there General To create or edit a print template proceed in the following way gt Select Settings gt Print Templates and then select the desired output form label file card list or direct single mail merge letter
394. sly described input field objects Listbox List box objects are for the display of Code fields The set or available codes appear in a vertical list with a scrollbar When pre selecting the list box object only the Code fields in the active view are available Properties In the Properties tab you can use the option only selected items to set whether all available code attributes are to be listed in the listbox display option off or whether only the code attributes active for the record are to be displayed option on If the record is being edited all code attributes will always be displayed With the option Ignore empty you can set whether only the code attributes are displayed to which a description has been assigned Empty code attributes without description are not displayed This option also applies when the record is being edited With the option Sorted you can let the different code attributes be listed alphabetically In the Preset tab you can select the attributes that should be activated for a new record automatically e g Christmas Card 297 Input form designer E Listbox Category EJ Preset p Properties 77 Extended Lx Tooltip Las Appearance Sorted The entries are displayed in alphabetical order 4 Only selected items In view mode of the input form only the selected items of the Listbox will be displayed ial Ignore empty Show only items that aren t empty K
395. st Tries Duration e Luna Aventuras Karl F ready 07531 999999 2 0 E 0 M belhaus Stuhler ready 07541 999999 10 0 Sch lernachhilfe Graz ready 0316 999999 0 Ubersetzungsbiiro Trar ready 07531 999945 0 Ready Hooked on 120 Functions of the phone manager To call someone gt gt To call someone from the call list double click the required entry in the list or select the command Call from its context menu The number is dialed automatically A dialog also opens in which you have the option of making a conversation log As well as the call duration date and time your own notes about the call are logged You can set in what form and field the data is stored in the configuration of the cRM auto protocol Always in foreground Conversation with Smith Real Estate Hang up Notes transfer conversation Invited to conference log to record go to record Date Time 04 062013 fs 12 30 57 Call status Phone list informations In the O column you can tell whether the call is a logged incoming call arrow or a number dialed by you no arrow The telephone number corresponds to the number of the TELEPHONE field from which the calling partner was transferred to the phone manager In the Info column identifying information about the calling partner is displayed You can set which information is to be used for this in the configuration The following variables are dis
396. started from the Workflow Server The Workflow Server is an instance of the cRM that is started with the user Workflow Ideally this instance runs on one server an additional user license is not required for this instance 245 Workflows and Events gt Select File gt Help gt Tools and start the Workflow Server gt Select the project file gt Via the button Email Settings you can configure the SMTP settings for sending email if you use workflows scripts that send email notifications EJ combit Relationship Manager Workflow Server Watch and execute server sided events Select the project file x86 combit cRM Solutions Medium English Medium English crm E P Start Stop xX 15 05 2013 11 57 21 Start 15 05 2013 11 57 21 TimeoutEvents No events for processing 15 05 2013 11 57 21 CDCEvents No items for processing 15 05 2013 11 58 22 TimeoutEvents No events for processing 15 05 2013 11 58 22 CDCEvents No items for processing 15 05 2013 11 58 39 Stop 11 06 2013 18 55 30 Start 11 06 2013 18 55 30 TimeoutEvents No events for processing 11 06 2013 18 55 30 CDCEvents No items for processing 11 06 2013 18 55 30 WatchAlerts No items for processing Via the corresponding button open the event manager Select the desired view or project in the left view navigation area Via the button New you create a new event VV ON ON Select the type of event Field change and Time limit excee
397. sts can be found in the additional documentation List amp Label Designer 238 Groupware 15 9 Groupware There are several connections to groupware applications Microsoft Outlook XP and above Integration of CRM via the LDAP protocol For more information see the chapter combit LDAP server Alternatively to the integrated scheduling and task management the Outlook Calendar could be activated This is done under the File gt Options gt General gt Appointment and Tasks The direct by e mail via the menu Output will be dispatched via Outlook if you select the Extended MAPI option as the mail service in File gt Options gt General Sending Mail You have the option of e mails from an Outlook folder a record in the CRM assigned Further information about this topic see Archiving messages from eMail Client in the section Activities and Document management Tobit David 8 and above The views of the CRM can be used as contacts in the client David are imbedded The records are then in a so called archives displayed About the buttons in the preview window you can now directly eg Send an e mail Alternatively to the integrated scheduling and task management the David calendar enabled This is done under File gt Options gt General Appointment and Tasks The direct by e mail via the menu Output will be dispatched on David if you select the mail service SMTP and the David server in File gt Options gt
398. t the corresponding item is displayed in the input fields where it can be edited retrospectively 287 Input form designer You can place your items in certain positions in the list with drag amp drop for example to sort the list alphabetically E Edit field Company x Properties p Extended Tooltip Appearance Options Preset Autotext Cont Link Program Input Validation Replace With B og x con Consulting lim Limited uni University v ia Hint These properties are field specific thus affecting all objects displaying this database field Preview Company OK Cancel Note Please note that during data entry the autotext function only becomes effective when a space is entered after the key or the cursor is moved to another field Setting content links Content links can be defined for all input fields comboboxes and checkboxes of a view With a contents link certain contents can be assigned automatically to one or more input fields the so called target fields depending on the input in the source field In this way you can for example decide that whenever Mr is written in the SALUTATION field the entry Dear Mr is made in the field SALUTATIONLETTER Or that whenever C is written in the CATEGORY field the entry Car Dealerships is entered in the SECTOR field You are not limited to a link between two fields you also have the option of giving a field several c
399. t Appointments Output gt Output gt Cards gt Tasks Output gt Output gt Calendar art gt View gt Day art gt View gt Working Week art gt View gt Week art gt View gt Month S S S S Start gt View gt Appointment List S art gt View gt Tasks No equivalent No equivalent No equivalent No equivalent Window gt View gt Refresh Start gt Go to gt Today Settings gt Settings gt Options Settings gt Settings gt Resources Settings gt Settings gt Categories Settings gt Print Templates gt Lists gt Appointments Ribbon and toolbars Settings gt Print gt Lists gt Tasks Settings gt Print gt File Cards gt Appointments Settings gt Print gt File Cards gt Tasks Settings gt Print gt Calendar View phone manager Command in Toolbar File gt Exit Edit gt Delete Item Edit gt Move Item Edit gt Delete All Items Edit gt Switch to Application Edit gt Add Log to Record View gt Standard Dial gt Dial Dial gt Pause Dial gt Next Dial gt Manual Dial gt Powerdialing Output gt List of Calls Tools gt Simulate Incoming Call Tools gt Activate Network Functionality Settings gt Dial Device 7 Settings gt Telephony System Settings gt Dial Device Properties Settings gt Incoming Call Detection Settings gt Sounds 7 Setting a gt Sending of SMS Messages Setting 7 g
400. t Copy to Clipboard gt Reference gt Save as Reference gt Send To View gt Input Form View View View View View View View View View View gt List View gt Report gt Web gt Toolbars gt Customize gt Toolbars gt Status Bar gt Swtich to gt Appointments and Tasks gt Swtich to gt Calls gt Swtich to gt Info Center gt Swtich to gt Open View gt Refresh Command in Toolbar Record gt Delegate Record gt Delete Record Ou Ou Ou Ou Ou Se Se Se Se gt Edit put gt Calendar View put gt Appointment Cards put gt Task Cards put gt Appointment List put gt Tasks List ings gt Print gt Calendar View ings gt Print gt File Cards gt Appointments ings gt Print gt File Cards gt Tasks ings gt Print gt Lists gt Appointments ings gt Print gt Lists gt Tasks Se ings gt Categories Settings gt Settings gt Options Settings gt Settings gt Resources Settings Sort Orders Appointments ettings gt Settings gt Sort Orders gt Tasks gt Settings gt gt art gt Data gt Delete gt Delete All Appointments art gt Data gt Delete gt Delete All Tasks ar Data gt Export ar Data gt Import ar Filter gt Appointments ar Filter gt Tasks ar Filter gt User ar Go to gt Record ar Go to gt Today ar New gt Appointment ar New gt Appointment ar View gt
401. t E Mail Autopilot gt Tools gt LDAP Server gt Tools gt Workflow Server gt Tools gt License Upgrade gt Tools gt Solution Distribution gt Tools gt Debug Tool gt About Views Command in Toolbar Record gt New Record gt Edit Record gt Edit in New Window Ribbon and toolbars File gt Options gt General File gt Information gt Properties File gt Information gt Events File gt Information gt Navigation Structure File gt Information gt Company Master Data File gt Information gt Project Import File gt Options gt Sounds File gt Options gt Database Login File gt Information gt Database Structure File gt Options gt User Administration File gt Information gt Auto Counter File gt Options gt Change Password File gt Options gt DMS Login File gt Help File gt Help gt Contact File gt Help gt Online Registration File gt Help gt Support gt Knowledgebase File gt Help gt Support gt Forums File gt Help gt Support gt Support Area File gt Help gt Online Update Check File gt Help gt Support gt Participate in Online Session File gt Help gt Tools gt address pick up File gt Help gt Tools gt E Mail Autopilot File gt Help gt Tools gt LDAP Server File gt Help gt Tools gt Workflow Server File gt Help gt Tools gt License Upgrade File gt Help gt Tools gt So
402. t List of Calls Print Template gt Help gt About eMail Command in Toolbar File New File gt Open Settings gt Settings gt Settings gt Settings gt Print Templates Print Templates Print Templates Print Templates Command in Ribbon File gt Exit Start gt Edi Start gt Edi Start gt Edi Start gt Edi Start gt Edi o co Hn HD CO CO rile gt rile gt rile gt rile gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt art gt Ou No equivalent Dia Dia Dia Dia Dia ptions ptions ptions ptions ptions oO O O O O ptions Options Options Options Help No equivalent gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt Move Item gt Delete Item gt Dial gt Pause gt Next gt Manual Genera Genera Genera Genera Genera Genera Sounds Genera Genera Command in Ribbon File gt File gt New Open gt Lists gt Tasks gt Cards gt Appointments gt Cards gt Tasks gt Calendar gt Delete Item gt Delete All Items gt Switch to Application gt Add Log to Record gt Powerdialing put gt List of Calls gt Simulate Incoming Call gt Activate Network Functionality gt Dial Device gt Telephony System gt Dial Device Properties gt Incoming Call Detection gt Sending of SMS Messages gt List of Calls Print Temp
403. t View gt Switch to gt Info Center gt Switch to gt Appointments and Tasks gt Switch to gt Calls gt View gt Refresh Actions gt Scripts amp Workflows gt Execute Script or gt Manage gt Scripts gt Execute gt Manage gt Scripts gt Edit gt Manage gt Scripts gt New gt Manage gt Scripts gt Encrypt Actions gt Scripts amp Workflows gt Execute Workflow or gt Manage gt Workflows gt Execute gt Manage gt Workflows gt Edit gt Manage gt Workflows gt New Start gt Actions gt Scripts amp Workflows gt nn Application Script Workflow Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings gt View gt Properties gt View gt Input Form gt View gt Input Form gt Input Form Webaccess gt Templates gt Transfer Templates gt Select gt Templates gt Transfer Templates gt Edit gt Templates gt E mails gt Manage gt Directories Route Planners gt Templates gt Labels gt Templates gt Cards Letters gt Templates gt Lists Reports gt Templates gt Direct Single Multiple Letters gt Manage gt Instant Reports Command in Ribbon Start gt New gt Appointment Start gt New gt Appointment 323 Appendix Record gt Edit Record gt Delegate Record gt Delete Record gt Delete All gt Appointments Record gt Delete All
404. t export and synchronization 12 2 Importing Flat data structure With Data gt Import you can only import individual tables so you have to link the records after the import again To link records after the import we recommend the following procedure 1 Delete all possibly existing constraints in the database system which an import could fail e g if one record in the view Activities must be linked with a record from the view Contacts this is not possible at the time of import 6 Import the data in the respective views The field through which the records are clearly linked should be imported in the fields Z Import PK and Z Import FK 7 Setting the key field in the database system with a query 8 Backup the previously deleted Constraints Example Query update Contacts set CompanyID select distinct Companies ID FROM Companies where Contacts Z Import FK Companies Z Import PK where Contacts Z Import FK IS NOT NULL AND LEN RTRIM Contacts Z Import FK 0 AND Contacts CompanyID IS NULL OR LEN RTRIM Contacts CompanyID 0 12 3 Import of records With Data gt Import you can import external and internal files The database or file from which the records are imported source file remains unchanged Since the fields of the source file do not necessarily correspond to those in the target file the fields that are linked must be defined when importing The links between the fi
405. t the paper format selected during design will be forced during print out Prerequisite is that the respective format or a user defined format is supported by the printer If not the next size up will be selected Size Adjustment Sets whether the page will be fit if printed to a different printer or if the scale should be kept Use Physical Page and not only the printable area If this option is set the whole physical page is available as workspace including non printable margins Some label page layouts require this as the first label starts right at the top left edge instead of at a specific distance The unprintable margins are shown shaded in the full page preview This means that objects can also be placed in the margins which will be cut off during the print If objects are placed on page edges you still should take notice of the unprintable area User specific printer settings If printer specific options e g printer duplex mode paper trays etc are set for a print template these are saved in a separate file which has the same name as the print template but has a p at the end of the file ending This is the so called P file e g Addresses Isp By default this P file is saved in the local application data directory e g C Documents and Settings v User name gt Application Data combit cRM If however a P file exists for the print template in the usually central directory and this is newer than the local P file
406. t click in the calendar in the Appointment Tasks view and select New Appointment or New Task in the context menu or select this function under Record In any view select Appointment gt New Appointment New Task for Record if the appointment or task should be connected to this record Appointments tasks that are created in this way can be displayed via Appointment gt Show appointments for record Enter a description in the subject field The last 20 entries are available to choose 102 from 3l Appointment ae ES Subject Meeting Project A bd Mith sunshine agency Jean Solei v Location y Private Categories aa Appointment Attendee References Action The 19 03 2013 v All day Priority 1 v Start time 08 30 v to 09 00 v C Recurring Recurrence type V Reminder 15 Minute s v before Arial Unicode MS v8 vis BUS ES S sso v 2 OK Cancel Subject Short note up to 140 characters that can be displayed with the appointment Your last 20 key words entered are available in the selection With If the appointment was made directly from a record the contact information is displ ayed here The last 20 entries are also available Location Entries regarding the premises or location Categories You can mark appointments and tasks using symbols which allows for convenient detection and management of appointments tasks A category is
407. t for copying databases instead 175 Configuration of projects To assign the copied database to the copied project afterwards select File Information Properties Please note A new project ID is not created when selecting Save As that means that all rights and configuration settings made in the copied project still apply for this project Changes automatically affect all other projects with this ID If this isn t desired you should create a new ID To create a new ID for the copied project proceed as follows Create a new project by File New Open the project configuration by File gt Information gt Properties Copy the project ID from the ID field Open the cRM project file file extension crm in the project directory with an editor and change the ID manually lt item name ID gt a6609731da5f4d168a537a6f8f0dec50 lt item gt lt item name Name gt Large lt item gt lt item name Description gt Large Version 7 000 lt item gt lt item name DBName gt combit_Large lt item gt 13 6 Create new Project To create a new project select File gt New gt gt 176 Enter a name for the new project It will be displayed in the title bar of the program window Select the SOL database in the Project Settings dialog To select a new and empty database you have to create one before To create one you need a database configuration tool e g Microsoft SOL Server Management Studio or
408. ta gt Edit gt Data Enrichment Data gt Edit gt Modify Data gt Edit gt Append Relationally gt General Data gt Edit gt Append Relationally gt Execute Template Settings gt Templates gt Relational Appending Output gt Current Record gt Transfer to Word Processor 321 Appendix gt Single gt Single gt Single gt Single gt Single gt Single gt Single put gt Multipl put gt Mai o c V m Merge Le il Merge Le isti E mail Letter gt Direct Letter gt Word Processor Print gt General Label Print gt Print gt Card Print gt List e E mail ter gt Direct ter gt Word Processor e Print gt General e Print gt Labels e Print gt Cards e Print gt List ICS an gt S gt App gt gt S Schedule Schedule Input Fo Web Repor oolbars oolbars oolbars Toolbars oolbars oolbars Toolbars 322 Report ew Appointment for Record ow Appointment for Record ointment List ew Task for Record ow Tasks for Record gt Task List gt Show Appointments Tasks List View rm Standard V V Clipboard gt Find V Navigation Sort Order V Filter V Manual Filter V pu pu pu pu pu pu pu pu pu pu pu pu pu pu pu pu Appoin Appoin Appoin Appoin Appoin Appoin Appoin Start gt St
409. tandard other workflow foundation activities can also be integrated in cRM workflows and cRM activities can also be incorporated in external workflows as long as they are also based on the workflow foundation cRM workflows can also be created in the Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 with the exception of the Express Edition and tested incl debugging 17 1 cRM activities An activity is the smallest execution unit in a workflow This activity has certain properties In the Workflow Designer the activities are available in the tool window Activities These activities perform a certain action in the cRM The way they behave is determing by the setting of the properties Through the graphic visualization of the sequence the way the workflow functions is quickly visible 256 cRM activities c NoOperation t OpenView l PrintRecord GH PrintRecords H ReadFieldContent 54 SaveRecord CH SendEmail cH SendEmailByTemplate cH ShowMessageDialog I ShowQuestionDialog System FaultHandler System IfElse zi System Policy E System Sequence c m You may select from the following activities among others Archive document Dial Update view Print records Export records Filter For each record Undo filter Import records Read field content Delete record New record New relational record Open view Close view Write field content Send e mail Save record If Else Show message dialog A detailed description of all ac
410. tate from the UK Select Filter Compose Check the record Smith Real Estate The Record is explicitly included in the manual filter When the manual filter is run this record is definitely displayed Select Filter General 99 Filtering Records Selection As field ZIP as expression begins with as value 7 As operator you choose AND As field COUNTRY as expression equal to as value DE Execute the general filter with the button Execute Select Filter gt Apply to run the manual filter VV VV ON ON Choose Yes in the dialog Do you want to combine the manual filter with the current filter to combine the two filters 5 12 Filtering containers A user specific filtering option is also available for containers Using the combobox select the desired filter in order to display only the records that correspond to the criteria required All saved filters of the linked view for which the option Container filter is activated in the Filter Library are available The activated filter remains active until it is changed Information regarding configuration can also be found under Button in the chapter Input form designer Y lt al records lz S gw x Y al records Contact Name Si Y Only letters Y Only E mails Wild Nf Only phone calis wia Y Only faxes E Y Only personal EB Certain priority VW Only own activities Y Only documents E 5 13 Particul
411. tated conditions you click on OK upon which the statistics template is added to the list of statistical evaluations A statistic that has been saved can be recalled from this list at any time or edited if required n the Statistic field you can set a name With the Settings button you can change the statistic s settings n the Print template field you can define a print template for the statistic Using the buttons you can directly create select and edit it Inthe Description field you can write a detailed description 149 Output of data 10 6 Visualization of data When using Microsoft MapPoint you have the option of viewing your records on a map for annual sales by zip code You can then transfer the content of a database field to MapPoint 150 On the Fields tab link the Add On field with the data field that you want to visualize e g with the sales field Currently only fields that are available directly in the view no 1 1 fields are supported If you do not select a field the records are counted field content 1 Create a filter over all records that are to be visualized and select Find Route Planning gt Set all records in the filter as waypoints After you have selected all of the waypoints select Find gt Route Planning gt Route Planning Route Planning x Route planner Microsoft MapPoint 2004 2006 2009 2013 Settings Please select the waypoint orde
412. te that E subsequent refinishing e g for creating relations etc can be necessary Select the project file where the items shall be imported from srvchk temp beta cRM7 Solutions Medium Medium crm eta Select the items to import Current project zi V Additional Items B Additional Items V Appointment Events 3 Appointment Events v Global Statistics il Global Statistics v Project Events Project Events Tasks Events n A Tasks Events tL Absatzgebiete t Aktivit ten t amp L Aktivit tskategorien t amp L Aktivit tstypen tL Branche Cla sa Activities ActivityCategories ActivityTypes BusinessRelations mL Belege BusinessSectorl te Belegposten BusinessSector2 t Belegtypen CampaignAssignment tL Beschwerden Campaigns t amp Beschwerdestatus Companies la E E Ee E Ee e Fed e Fe CompaniesRelations Next gt Cancel gt Select the project file from which elements should be imported gt Select the elements that you would like to import by using the checkboxes in the left window You can collapse the views to select if certain configuration settings should be imported fa view is already present in your project the following options are available Add new fields also physically to view meaning that the table structure is extended Donottransfer view properties
413. ted in the field File name gt Inthe same dialog window activate the option Digitally sign created files then click on Save gt The document is created and digitally signed at the same time by the signature software 10 3 Printing a mail merge letter with the word processor Single and mail merge letters can be created and printed directly or through your word processor The direct print is quicker and more complex conditions such as the automatic 145 Output of data decision between PO box and home addresses can be set up more easily than in the word processor Further information about direct printing can be found in chapter Output of single and mail merge letters The advantage of the word processor lies in the more extensive formatting options and the change to rework letters individually For a mail merge letter in a word processor you differentiate between the main document i e the actual letter text and the data source i e the individual addresses Both together create the mail merge In the word processor the data from the data source is automatically inserted into the main document More about the creation of mail merge documents can be found in the documentation of your word processor The data source with the desired records for the mail merge creation can be created directly The created data source then simply has to be connected with the main document in the word processor and the mail merge is compl
414. ternal programs There are different ways of running other programs either through a function definition or through a link with a field in the input form Using a function definition With this method you can run other programs independently from individual fields More information regarding this can be found in the chapter Configuration of views Using a link in the input form You can run different programs from every field and pass on any parameter such as the field contents In this way for example word processing can be started with a particular document or a particular graphics program Information about creating links like this can be found in the chapter Input form designer 3 11 Data entry with address pick up With this function you can transfer an address straight from the clipboard and let the data be entered into the relevant fields of a new record You can easily transfer addresses from the internet an e mail or a text file e g one produced by your scanner into a new record The address pick up recognizes the individual address parts and sorts them correctly Insofar as an email address is copied and it already exists in the record a new record will not be created but rather the existing data will be updated only if the field has no content Transfer addresses gt Ifyou have an e mail with an address that you wish to transfer copy the address into the clipboard gt If you would like to copy the contents of
415. text The individual conditions are linked with AND for the evaluation You can also search for an empty field e g all appointments without a subject In this case leave the subject field empty and just mark the checkbox The checkboxes have three different states ld Conditionis set L Conditionis not set E Condition is ignored Example If you want the condition Private to be irrelevant with your filter choose the state ignore But if you want to apply a filter in which no private appointments shall be included at all then choose the state not set With the option Reminder you filter all appointments for which the option Reminder is set Please note that with recurring appointments the Reminder option remains set even if the last reminder has been closed With the option Active you filter all appointments for which there is a reminder A recurring appointment loses its Active status only when the last reminder has been closed 6 3 Configuration Under Settings gt Options in the appointment and task management you have the option to change amongst others the following settings 108 Force reminder window to foreground The reminder dialog will always push into the foreground regardless of the application you are currently using Show week numbers in calendar navigation The week numbers will be displayed in the calendar overview Automatically add the filter user as attendee for new appointm
416. text in a field Edit Copycopies marked text into the clipboard With Edit Paste you can then paste the text back into another field Duplicating records If you want to create a record that differs only slightly from another you can save lots of a time by duplicating the existing record To do this select Start gt New gt Duplicate Then you simply have to mark the fields that you wish to be duplicated and confirm with OK 51 Entering and editing data Note however that no relations or any existing 1 1 and 1 N records are copied with it and in the field selection dialog only the fields that can be copied are displayed This means that any fields that are currently being occupied or calculated are not shown Deleting records gt With Start gt Delete you can delete the current record gt With Start gt Delete All you can delete all records If you have not set a filter in advance all records in this view will be deleted Working simultaneously Locking behavior is how the database behaves when several users are editing the same record at once If by chance a colleague is in the same record as you are and is also making changes to it the question arises whose changes should be accepted In this case a dialog will open automatically in which the changes made by yourself and the other users are listed gt Now select the field contents that are to be used gt With the button you will enter anot
417. that of your choice 2 Column Properties EJ Columns BY R Field name Column title Editable DINE TE EEENNEEUNEIN CustomerNo CustomerNo Iv Company Company v Company2 Company2 Vv Street Street v Country Country v ZIP ZIP 2 City City 2 ZIPPOBox ZIPPOBox Iv POBox POBox iv Phone Phone Iv Fax Fax iv Fmail Fmail wd M Q OK Cancel With the button Set column titles automatically you have the following options in order to change all column titles in a step or cancel changes 44 Customizing the user interface Truncate All Column Titles to Resp Field Name e g Company Truncate All Column Titles to Resp Relation Alias Field Name e g Company Company Reset All Column Titles to Resp Complete Field Name e g CompanylD Companies ID Company Columns can also be marked as not editable This way only certain columns can be released for direct editing in the overview list container Saving the layout of a list container view for all users Changes to the layout are only saved for you personally If other users wish to have the same layout the configuration can be saved for the entire project and thereby for all users Right click on the column title and select Settings gt Set as Project Default for All Users All the layout settings of the list container view are saved in the file viewname vlc in the project directory For containers the current filter setting of the associ
418. the Windows client The detail view can display different objects that can be inserted with the button New Heading To define single sections e g Master Data Communication Fields Can be renamed after they were added Fields of the internal field type Unknown and Code are not supported Relations You can generate an entry that allows switching to the linked view e g Contact Persons Activities Sales Opportunities You can now create the mobile list and detail views To create the configuration file first configure the database in the dialog from the perspective of the later server on which the cRM WebAccess should be operated The Windows authentication is not supported You can skip this step if you already have created a valid project file project cfg License amp License extension 14 To create the configuration file then configure the path to the cRM project file crm of the cRM Windows installation from the perspective of the later server on which the cRM WebAccess should be operated This may be a network share or a local copy ie the cRM project file crm can also be copied locally on the server on which the cRM WebAccess should be operated Then however make sure that there is always the current version available The same goes for the path to the print templates It can also be a network share or a local copy Also make sure that that there are always the latest versions of the print templates a
419. the database to the database server 13 5 Copy Project Select File Save As if you would like to save your project under a different name The project file inputform definitions and column configurations will be saved in the selected directory To copy the database you need a database configuration tool e g Microsoft Management Studio or pgAdmin of PostgreSQL gt To copy an existing database you first have to create a backup file by right clicking the desired database in the Object Explorer of MSSMS and select Tasks gt Backup from the context menu Check the options and start the creation of the backup file gt To restore a database under a new name right click Databases in the MSSMS and select Restore database from the context menu Enter a database name not yet used in the field Into database e g combit_MyCompany Attention If the selected database name is already in use the existing database will be replaced gt Select your backup under From database or From media Make sure that the checkbox Restore is activated Note You can also exchange data directly with the SOL Server import export assistant of the SOL Server Management Studio Expand Databases right click a database go to Tasks and click Import data or Export data With the assistant you can create target database and target tables as well However if you have copy multiple databases tables or other database objects use the assistan
420. the reminder select Defer not possible for recurring appointments If an appointment has already passed the time interval for the rescheduling is calculated from the present time Example You had an appointment on Monday 15 00 but couldn t keep it as you were ill On Tuesday morning 9 00 you get the according reminder and click Defer by 1 hour Based on the current time the appointment will be set to 10 00 today Reminders are not given for finished tasks just as existing reminders will be deleted reset Edit an appointment or task To edit an appointment or task double click the corresponding entry in the active view or the reminder Now you can edit any options that were set at time of creation as desired gt In the day or week view you can edit an appointment by drag amp drop Select an appointment and click on the bottom edge of the field By dragging downwards you can make the appointment longer By clicking the top edge you can move it gt Inthe context menu the most important commands for editing are available With the button Go to Record only when a link to a record exists you can jump directly to the corresponding record gt If you want to delegate an appointment to a colleague for example to your stand in select Appointment gt Delegate gt Some of the fields in the appointment and task list can be edited directly Outputting appointments and tasks If you wish to output appointments
421. the statistic the display will be in accordance with this template 148 Statistics functions z Statistical Analysis EJ t 4 B BX Statistic Print template Description E Contacts Last pe none Average time for A B and C customers which has passed since the i Contacts Aging none Statistical analysis about the aging structure in 5 year steps EA Companies Contz none All companies contacts will be included in the calculation 2a Companies Contz none Executes a filter for customers E Companies Contz none Distribution of the communication channels E mail phone fax an Statistic Contacts Aging structure m Print template none 8 c Description Statistical analysis about the aging structure in 5 year steps o Execute Creating statistics If you want to create a new statistical analysis select the New button In the dialog that opens you can set whether the saved statistic is to be available to all users or just yourself Confirm the input with OK In the following charts dialog you can set the conditions for the statistics such as the data source i e the desired field the calculation type and even the form of display As soon as you have chosen the data you will be shown a preview of the end result Note More information regarding the creating of a chart can be found in the documentation of List amp Label Designer After confirming the s
422. the synchronization wizard Select the desired synchronization format or application and confirm with Next Tip The synchronization with Outlook contacts can be carried out as a complete synchronization The addresses are synchronized in the procedure To do this select the synchronization format Outlook gt Outlook Contacts You may have to confirm a security alert An external application is trying to access your address book The synchronization wizard is identical to the import wizard in many dialogs You should therefore read the section on importing since this is a requirement for synchronization Allocating the key fields The key fields which must first be defined are decisive for the synchronization Which record in the source corresponds to which record in the main database must be set The key fields are for this purpose When selecting the key fields you should make sure to select the correct fields Respective of the task you should only select those fields that clearly identify a record when combined 166 Synchronization of records z Synchronization Wizard Define the key fields whose contents must match to indicate a record match 8 x ya Main DB Format iSecondary DB field or formula OK Length E Company Text 100 characters Company 100 f Please assign the fields used as keys and ignore the other fields at the moment Usually 3 or 4 fields should be enough Specify the maxim
423. ther to sort in ascending or descending order gt If you wish to create a criterion that covers several fields you can add further fields with the New button Example If you have several contacts within one firm it is sensible to create a sort order for the COMPANY and NAME fields in that order The sort order will then go 55 Entering and editing data by the firm name first If the firm name is the same the sort order will go by the contact name Define Sort Order EJ Name Company City Sx te Field Direction Company Ascending City Ascending e OK Cancel gt After confirming with OK you are taken back to the dialog with the overview of search criteria gt Ifyou end the dialog by clicking OK the selected sorting will be activated Note Sorting order applies to all users To create it the right to Change configuration of the project is required 3 7 History References to the last viewed edited or newly created records are saved here This user specific list of records is displayed in the navigation window Alongside the record the associated view and the time of recording is stored for every entry Double click the required record to display it When you point at an item with the cursor the reason for its presence is displayed new record edited length of stay The period after which a record is automatically added to the history can be set The references are also deleted auto
424. tings Start m v 100 New Tab New Group Rename Customizations Reset Import Export z OK Cancel Tabs and Groups You can insert frequently used commands within a user defined group into a standard or user defined tab gt gt Right click on a group in a tab gt Customize Select New Tab to create a new user defined tab with an empty user defined group under the selected tab Rename tab Select and click Rename Sort tabs Drag the tab and drop it onto the desired position in the Ribbon or move it with the Arrow Up Down buttons on the right groups cannot be moved Remove tab group Select the tab or group and click Remove A tab and a group will be deleted with all their content Hide tabs Uncheck the checkbox of a tab by clicking it To show them again check the checkbox again with another click Reset Import and Export Ribbon By using the option Reset you can undo all changes in the Ribbon quickly With Import Export you can transfer your individual settings to or from other installations 2 6 Sources of help Apart from this manual various sources of help are available to you 46 You can reach the Knowledge Base the forums the support area and the online support using File Help Support Sources of help Select File gt Help gt help for the online help With F1 you can access context sensitive online help You can find additional information in PDF format in the direc
425. tings gt Categories you can define the categories for appointments tasks You can create as many categories as desired the respective name can contain up to 30 characters 6 4 Export Import Appointments and tasks can be exported and imported using the schedule data exchange format iCalendar iCal or ics This why it is possible to use calendar information together in multiple applications to transfer it from the Internet or to send it to other people gt Select Start gt Import or drag an iCalendar file via Drag amp Drop to the view of the schedule If you can create appointments and tasks for other users you can through a dialog specify for which user the appointments and tasks are to be created The appointments and tasks will be added to the existing ones Notes cRM does not support all options and functions of other schedule applications In Outlook 2010 2007 appointments are exported into the iCalen dar format via File gt Save under No tasks can be imported in Outlook gt Select Start gt Export to export all of the appointments and tasks in the current filter into a file Through a dialog you determine whether appointments and or tasks are to be exported 6 5 Link to external task and appointment manager As an alternative to the integrated task and appointment manager you can use external programs for this purpose This can be configured per user by choosing File gt Options gt 109 Appointmentand tas
426. tion A full text search is carried out in all character fields The search is not case sensitive Global Search A Individual views can be excluded from the search the option Exclude from global search on the General tab of the View configuration The search results are displayed in an extra window usually at the bottom of the screen By double clicking you can jump directly to the record Record View Activity for Luna Aventuras Karl Heinz Mehler Activities The search is completed in a specific period for each view and contains a maximum of 200 results in the default setting The search criteria can be configured to some extent More information can be found in the document cRM_Config_EN pdf 4 4 Find and replace Find and replace With this function you have a way of replacing certain field contents Since this function is a global operation you must first create a selection of the records in which the changes are to be made E Field ABC Bank BankAccountNo Bankcode BIC BusinessRelation BusinessSector1 BusinessSector2 Category 2 vA Find and Replace Search for M ller Replace with Maier Opti Confirm Execute Cancel If you did not use a filter beforehand the changes would be made to all records in the view gt Select Start gt Replace and in the following window select the field from the field list whose contents
427. tion window 147 Output of data aij Manage Instant Reports Report definitions EJ Template Description n Data ePRIDIR PrintT emplates Companies Bu Companies Business sector distribution Active Filter EJ PRIDIR PrintTemplates Companies Ch Companies ABC analysis chart Active Filter Vv B PRJDIRSAPrintTemplates Companies Co Companies Contact persons Active Filter iv 21 Properties Preview Template PRIDIR PrintTemplates Companies Business BZ a Description Companies Business sector distribution Data Active Filter v Name for Scripts Workflows Display in navigation e 10 5 Statistics functions With this function you can easily statistically evaluate the contents of single fields You can let character and numerical fields be counted for which contents are most common In character fields combinations of two fields can be considered Display statistics Select Output Statistics to open the statistics library In this dialog statistical analyses can be saved specifically for the user or for all users of the project Select the desired statistic gt Click on the Execute button You are given the results as a table and in the required charts When selecting the print option the preview is started in List amp Label from where you can start the output on a printer or the sending by e mail If a print template is selected for
428. tioned via the object Tab How to position a tab object Tabs gt Select the object type Tab in the toolbar The cursor t Bx turns into a cross E Input form E Tabbed pages With the cursor show the point at which the left upper CJ Communication fth bi b a Account corner of the tab is to begin DJ Address mu Cj Main E Press the left mouse button and drag while pressing DJ Activities the mouse button the cursor to the diagonally opposite 1 SalesOpportunities Bus corner of the planned object Bm Release the mouse button once the object the dashed rojects M H c inet border has reached the desired size This tab is therefore E Tabbed pages also displayed in the tool window Tabs DC to Contacts C to Companies gt The properties can be defined by double clicking on the respective tab The dialog corresponds with the main tabs Web Element The Web Element embeds an Internet Explorer window in the input form You can display web pages with it These can be local or in the internet the URL can also be dynamically created via formula depending on record and user With Web Elements online content like weather information maps social media content and many more can be integrated into the input form for example Furthermore script generated content e g report charts as graphic can be displayed like ActiveX objects embedded in a HTML page are displayed in the input form Enter the address of the web page to b
429. tions Company ID1 Relation N M Action ID CompaniesRelations CompanylD2 Relation N M Apply ID ProjectAssignment CompanylD Relation N M Apply ID CampaignAssignment Companyll Relation N M Apply ID Activities CompanylD Relation 1 N Apply ID SalesDocuments CompanylD Relation 1 N Apply ID ProductAssignment CompanylD Relation N M Apply ID Complaints CompanylD Relation 1 N Apply ID SalesOpportunities CompanylD Relation 1 N Apply ID ContactsCompaniesRelations Con Relation N M Apply ID Contacts CompanylD Relation 1 N Apply ID ProjectTaskAssignment Company Relation N M Apply 2 Cancel 69 Entering and editing data Deleting Define how the secondary record is to be deleted after the merger One option is to also delete any relationally linked records e g any contact records linked to a person record Please note if the options Delete secondary record and Also delete relations are activated only the first layer of the 1 N N M relations of the secondary record are deleted To delete all linked records we recommend you activate cascaded deleting and updating in your database system Alternatively the secondary record can be marked as deleted by making an entry in a certain field This would be possible if the user has no record deletion rights Extended Define whether a log entry is to be made after the merger For this give a field name and log entry If you are making the log entry in a comment field activate the opti
430. tive application data directory i e they can only be selected and run by the respective creator under User defined formats Global templates can be found under User defined formats Global Starting the import In the following dialog you are given a summary If you confirm this the import will start You reach this page directly if you select one of your own formats from the User defined formats in the format selection on the first page of the wizard and press Execute As long as records with the same contents are present in the source and target database these are not overwritten but added It is therefore possible that duplicate entries will exist after the import We recommend a dupe check to be run afterwards see chapter Filter duplicate items dupes or to read in the data by synchronization 12 4 Export of records With Data gt Export you can export records to another file format or application If an extract is active only the records in the extract are exported If no extract is active all records are exported Format selection Select Data gt Export to start the export wizard Numerous different text and database formats can be exported 161 Import export and synchronization 5 Export Wizard Please select the export format m User defined formats H E Text file cM Tobit amp K Excel aM at Data and layout La Picture 5 3 HTML 4 OpenOffice org Writer E Office 2007 201
431. tive during data entry when the source field is left Also only as many characters can be inserted into the target field as allowed by the defined field length If the target field for a linked item is too short the item is cut off Tip To calculate values there is a computed column in SQL Server You define the property ComputedColumnSpecification with a formula e g Kilometer End Kilometer Start in the corresponding column in MSSOL Management Studio The column then becomes a virtual column the values in it will update when columns change that are in it Avoid dividing by 0 for example by Value nullif Value2 0 Input Validation Here you can define a rule for validating the input for a field and set the corresponding notification message that appears if the input was invalid 289 Input form designer z Edit field Email x EST EST m A Properties j Extended P Tooltip Appearance Options Preset Autotext Cont Link Program Input Validation Enforce correct input O Hint only Condition Message B amp x pty Email or ISNULL Email True The syntax of the entered e mail address is incd Validity condition Cond Empty Email or IsNULL Emai v ya Message if invalid The syntax of the entered e mail address is incorrect Hint These properties are field specific thus affecting all objects displaying this database field Preview 9o OK Cancel To define a v
432. tivities and their properties can be found in the additional workflow documentation in the document directory The system activities are Microsoft specific activities For more information see section System activities The first activity of a workflow A workflow can work with those records that are visible in an open view After the start use the activity OpenView and then create a filter with the activity Filter Alternatively a workflow can also be created with visibly opening a view Use the activity CreateRecordSet If neither of the two activities is used the workflow works with the current record Insert activities Activities can be moved from the activity list and inserted in the work area by drag amp drop gt Select the desired activity and drag it to the work area while pressing the left mouse key Release the mouse key once the activity is positioned at the desired location Valid insert positions are indicated by a green picture gt An activity can also be moved by drag amp drop 257 Workflow Designer gt To delete an activity select Delete in the respective context menu Properties of an activity In the tool window Properties the properties of the individual activities are shown When an activity is selected the global properties of the workflow can be defined Below the list there is an area in which a descriptive text is shown for each property selected The sorting of the list is set
433. tlori dpa Se ats 39 Navigation structure ss 180 POTE scere e OUR RMEDYUOT QUOTE 175 Reorganize sssssssssssesses 173 SettllgSa aset a p deed 179 Solution Center 173 Workflows sssseseen 245 Q OBE Query by Example 96 R Reactivate messages 209 Record Create new 50 Delete Display Duplicate Editen Favorites Findera onitor Relations Rights SdVO odo Dx D COR NE a SOLE cete s eet ree nee Record monitoring sse 70 Notification options sss 312 Record reference 65 See Reference Reference nesses 65 206 Relat ONS esse Ee epis 52 Appendilng iac cce teens 72 Cascaded deleteting 191 Index SONGING snnt diede ee ret 128 SM TP sit itte d a pa 211 Social Media connection 82 Solution Center 173 OSOFtOILdOFE e rtc ets 55 Configuratio fisser ste pee 55 Replaces 3 eere 81 CEGate e ese dens 55 R pliGatiOnc s o ee 65 Create indexes 55 FRE POMS ceto ted tete ota edt 47 CHEGEIOnDS co oie ati 55 CuStOImlze eerte 234 Sources Of help 46 PRINCI Geis seeders tien 39 Start program eer 209 Rights management 310 otatictable assess oque en 237 Ihoute plannimgsa ro eres 84 Statisti CSi senenn ot t s 148 Run external program 62 291 Street directory Content links sss 61 S Support Scanner control 114 STPM Qion reiranta 271 SETIPUN G asea cie
434. to avoid that too many views are open which leads to performance degradation 3 Configuring the sending of mail be able to use the sending of mail through cRM you must first make the corresponding settings These settings are also used when sending mail through the export print and preview dialogs SelectFile Options General Sending Mail Mail service Mail service unformatted e mails text Here you can set through which mail service these e mails are to be sent 210 The standard interface for most e mail clients is Simple MAPI Extended MAPI only Outlook 2000 XP 2003 2007 uses an extended functionality of the interface With this it is possible to send e mails despite security limitations in Outlook without every e mail having to be confirmed manually by the user for protection against automated virus distribution Configuring the sending of mail When sending through SMTP the e mails are not sent through the e mail program but directly from the software Communication with the SMTP server is undertaken directly Mail service formatted e mails HTML Extended MAPI Outlook 2000 XP 2003 2007 only see above SMTP see above General Settings ES Settings User Interface Sending Mail Telephony Appointments amp Tasks H gt Mail services Unformatted e mails text Si Formatted e mails HTML SMTP v SMTP settings Mail per context menu by mail client registered to mailto
435. to questions about the object model We cannot help with models of other products or the script languages themselves 18 2 Supported script languages Basically all script languages of theWindows Scripting Host are supported The most common are VBScript and JScript which are offered directly by the producer Microsoft There are other types too such as Python The selection of the language is made with the file extension e g vbs for VBScript and js for JScript Note VBScript and JScript are usually already installed on your system If not or if other languages shall be used they must be taken from the respective manufacturers and installed on the system according to their instructions 18 3 Integration of scripts The integration of scripts using buttons is possible Script direct Script file Function definitions within the input form using the command Start gt Scripts amp Workflows gt Execute Workflow or by using events A description of how the scripts are placed there can be found in the associated chapters in this manual You can decide whether the script is entered directly or whether you wish to write it in the form of an external text file Especially for larger scripts the latter is a better choice since this makes re using it in another situation easier 18 4 Script extension These script extensions only apply to internal scripts i e to scripts that are run using buttons within the input form through the comman
436. together different databases with different database structures into one file If the structure is the same the function Data Import with Synchronization can be used Phone CDs In the next window you are given advice how to export data from the corresponding application since exporting data first is necessary to be able to import them into cRM If you have already carried out the export you can confirm with Next otherwise you now open the phone directory application Here you search for and select the desired data and export them according to the instructions of the import wizard before starting the import gt Select the desired import format or the application and confirm with Next gt 155 Import export and synchronization Tip If you run a format of your own creation you can use it immediately button Execute Otherwise the wizard enables you to change the definition retrospectively orto save it under anew name Select a data source gt In the following dialog select the source database With most formats you will be shown a preview of the contents E Import Wizard EJ Please select the data source to be imported EXCEL C Users Admin Documents data xls Table1 v Preview Company Company2 d Company3 MatchCode d Country EXE TERES Suzuki denki Albatros Flug OHG i i Autohaus Wiese utohaus Wiese Back Net Cancel Special case import fo
437. tooltip with extensive content is displayed for the selected lines The records in the container can be filtered by a combobox Further information can be found under Button in the chapter Scripts and programming reference Assignment in link view N M relation All N M relationally linked records e g projects products are also displayed in containers The linking of the two records is carried out in a link view e g ProjectAssignment Example To assign a contact person to a project in the Contacts view right click the project container and select New in the context menu A new record will be automatically created in the link view Project Assignment and assigned to that person Select the project by clicking the Select project button 54 By double clicking an item in the link view e g comment the link view e g ProjectAssignment is displayed By double clicking an item in the target view e g project name the linked record is displayed directly in the target view e g project A in the Projects view When you right click an item various field type specific menu items are available e g dial telephone number send e mail new document open document with linked application By right clicking an item and selecting Delete you can delete linked records A button is also available for this function By right clicking in this container and selecting New you can create new records in a linked view
438. tory Docu of the program installation combit tip wizard The combit tip wizard provides context sensitive information in the notification area of the task bar through a pop up window This information may for example be about an existing product movie Start the program through the program group or through File gt Options gt General and activate the option Start combit Hints 47 Entering and editing data 3 Entering and editing data cRM supports the entry of Unicode characters Unicode also known as UCS UTF 8 ISO10646 is an international standard with which over the long term each character in all known writing cultures and character systems can be mapped and processed 3 1 Opening views A view refers to a way of looking at a database table or a database view The views of a project can be linked together relationally The overview list and input form input form are different ways of displaying the data in a view To open a view click the required view in the project navigation As this is a relational database you can open multiple views at the same time By clicking on a view or on a container entry you switch to an already opened view as long as it is not in change mode In the views context menu of the project navigation you also have the option Open in New Window 3 2 Displaying the records You can display records in a list or individually as forms A report view and a web view are also available U
439. ts are to be transferred into new documents The configuration of the document management is only worthwhile in views where documents are stored In the view in which the documents are to be stored a field of type File Link Embedded File or DMS Document must be present In the Document Management tab different document types can be defined Document types are templates upon which newly created documents are based Type of document storage field types To be able to use the document management create a document field under Fields in the view configuration Consider in advance how the documents in the document management are to be stored You have 3 options File Link In the document management only references to files should be saved not the files documents themselves For this create a field with the field type File Link The Physical Field type is character e g varchar field length 255 Embedded File The files should be embedded directly into the database With this you not only simplify replication and data backups but also enable full text indexing through the database system With this the document contents can be accessed directly by SOL query For this create a field of type Embedded File The Physical Field type is binary long e g image bytea DMS Document References to documents should be archived in a document management system DMS Working with DMS documents is the same as previous file references
440. ttings see chapter Output Settings gt Click on Start Output of file cards A record s important information is normally printed on a file card e g information on a person including the comment field This is useful for field workers who have all relevant customer information available with this gt Select Output gt Print gt Print Single Card gt Choose the print template for the file card file ending crd Print templates can normally be found in the Print templates folder in the project directory gt Define the print settings see chapter Output Settings gt Click on Start Under Output gt Multiple Print you can print a file card for all records in the active filter If no filter is active all records are printed The print order corresponds to the currently active sort order gt Create a filter with Filter gt Select Output gt Multiple Print gt Print Cards 139 Output of data gt Choose a print template for the file card Print templates can normally be found in the Print templates folder in the project directory Define the print settings see chapter Output Settings gt Click on Start Output of single and mail merge letters Single and mail merge letters can be printed directly or through your word processor The direct print is quicker and more complex conditions such as the automatic decision between PO box and home address can be more easily set up than in
441. tus Notes is used Calendar Calendar ToDo ToDo For dates the form Appointment is used and for tasks the form task New tasks and appointments are set and stored with initial values If the date or the task is to be rejected then is sufficient simple closing of the window without memory not but the element must be deleted explicitly in the appropriate View Calendar ToDo The creation of recurring appointments is not possible with the standard form Hints on using scripts Scripts that add records in cRM will NOT automatically add records in Outlook or David cRM s OLE interface will continue to work on the internal task management In the script you may use the property cRM TimeManagerlype to query which appointment management is currently active see programming reference Object Model COM 111 Activities and Document management 7 Activities and Document management Documents and contacts can be managed in the same view For more information on configuration see the Document management in chapter Configuration of views ij Activities 4 SalesOpportunities Sales H Sales Documents Products Campaigns 9 Complaints Jj Projects Relations Additional Y lt Al Records v Ser x DateTime Type Direction Priority Comment Duration Responsible Document zx 7 13 07 2012 14 48 33 E le JjBesebet ser afi Luna Aventuras Kari Heinz Mehler 2d 21 08 2012 10 25 12 S 7 3 Hatte Fragen
442. ty error symbol These connections must then be reset Type Enter the basic type of the activity This information is only needed for system activities 258 cRM activities Activated Specify if the activity is enabled or not If an activity is not enabled it will not participate in the execution and validation This function is the particularly useful if certain activities are to be deactivated for testing purposes Description You can enter a description of the activity here Under the heading Input Parameter configure the necessary parameter of the activity e g a filter expression with the activity Filter With some activities the existing heading Result contains corresponding results of the respective activity e g a readout of field content for the activity Read field content This result can then be passed on to a subsequent activity The input property of an activity can be the result of a previous activity Connect property to a fixed value Modified properties appear in bold To change a property click in the values column For fixed predefined values the value is input via a combo box With some properties a connection dialog is available You can reach it by selecting the property group and clicking on the button In the lower part of the dialog the value can be selected by clicking on another button For database fields you enter the physical field names here Bind FileName to a
443. u define In this way you can simplify many everyday work sequences and save lots of time Example When printing labels you sure often use the same templates Thanks to function definitions you can avoid calling the dialog and the selection of the desired print template Instead you reduce this cycle with a keyboard macro to a single mouse click or keystroke Or just imagine you often transfer single addresses as well in fax forms as in letters or documents Before executing the transfer you would have to activate the adequate transfer template every time With the help of the function definitions you define a transfer template for this purpose which you then can activate directly through a toolbar button or a function button gt In the selection box select which kind of function definition you wish to set the allocation of a single print template an e mail template a program or a transfer template gt By clicking the desired row and the Open button you open the selection dialog for the required file Now enter the path and name of the form template or program gt To connect an assigned function with a button go into the input form designer Further information can be found in the corresponding chapter 14 8 Automatic numbering Under the Auto No tab you can precisely define the automatic assignment of a consecutive number such as a customer number When creating a new record this number is automatically entered
444. uence of 0 s and 1 s The number of storable entries is set by the physical field length of the character field They can also be exported in this form For example a 1 in 10 place stands for the information code no 10 is active For the export of code fields you may choose to activate the option Code description for print and export File gt Information gt Properties gt Settings In this case the code descriptions e g Xmas Card will be exported and printed instead of the code number e g 0010101 Name allocation for the format Formatting set in the wizard can be saved and will then be available to run instantly under User defined formats In the following dialog you can set a name for it If the template should not be saved simply leave the name field empty Templates are also useful if they only fit the involved databases approximately Generally itis less effort to adapt an existing template than to set all links again The templates are saved in the respective user directory i e they can only be selected and run by the respective creator under User defined formats Global templates can be found under User defined formats gt Global Select target file In the following dialog enter into which file or database the data is to be exported Special case Excel If you wish to export data into an Excel file select the Browse button here gt Inthe next dialog select the Open button gt In the
445. um length for comparison in Length 9 lt Back i Next gt Cancel Tip In any case you should check the uniqueness of your key fields by running a dupe check in the main database Filter gt Dupes with the key fields If dupes are found in these ways that are actually not dupes your key is not unique In this case you must either change the affected records or the key so that the key is unique In most cases you have to rely on a combination of 2 or more fields to uniquely identify a record Good candidates for this are fields like firm name customer number and street When selecting the key fields you should also make sure that the main and secondary databases do not vary in these fields including how they are written Otherwise corresponding records will of course not be assigned correctly A key made of the fields FIRM NAME and TELEPHONE is risky for example The phone number is a good key field because it can uniquely identify a person well However telephone numbers change often Example You have chosen COMPANY NAME and PHONE as key fields With your 4000 records you have one where the phone number has changed Mr Smith from combit GmbH now has the phone number 07731 906010 instead of 07731 906020 If you synchronize the database with the database of the headquarters a new record for Mr 167 Import export and synchronization Smith combit GmbH phone number 07731 906020 will be created as the key fie
446. ument is opened f a document template is set in the transfer form all data is inserted into this template The currently active transfer form is run A transfer form can be activated under Settings gt Transfer Templates gt Select Normally you will find the transfer forms file ending xfx in the Transfer forms folder in the project directory The activated transfer form remains active until you select a different transfer form The workload for a single transfer is therefore reduced to a single click of the mouse Transfer forms can also be run through a user defined button Further information can be found under Function definitions in chapter Configuration of views 10 2 Output with print templates Print templates which can be edited in the integrated List amp Label Designer are used for the direct output of data Information regarding the configuration of print templates can be found under Customizing print templates in chapter General configuration This output is especially suitable for standardized outputs such as standard letters mail merge letters address labels name cards lists and reports For this output the contents cannot be changed after the selection of the print template exception interactive user input through the AskString field function 137 Output of data Single and multiple printing is always differentiated For the single print e g a standard letter the output is always the data
447. us programs during the installation Please note the database specific information under Microsoft SOL Server Installation and PostgreSQL Server installation Insert the cRM DVD into the DVD drive and follow the instructions in the installation program If you have the Autorun function activated setup will begin automatically Alternatively double click the setup exe file Database server Specify whether you want to use an existing database server for cRM Yes In the next step choose the database system database server and enter the respective database administrator login information The system database and the sample databases will then be created on the server When using Windows authentication the current Windows user must be set up in the MS SQL server For more information about Windows authentication see MS SQL Server login method No You have several options in the following step Install a new instance of Microsoft SOL Server 2008 R2 Express This option results even with unknowingly existing MSSQL instances to a smooth installation and is therefore recommended 10 T4 Server Installation A new SOLExpress instance COMBIT with user sa and password cmbtPW 1 I will be installed This password should be changed immediately after the installation In case of the cRM setup downloaded from the internet the SOL Server Express setup will be downloaded from the combit net website afterwar
448. ut form designer objects always have a rectangular shape and are enclosed by a frame with which their size and position can be changed This frame represents the space that the object takes up in the workspace and therefore the maximum size to which the contents of an object can expand Objects may overlap completely or partially and the overlapped object may be covered Object defaults For every object type you can set certain default settings that become active when inserting such an object By selecting appropriate default settings you can save time when inserting and configuring objects For the object settings there are three hierarchical levels Level 1 Global font setting Applies to all objects in all tabs Only font settings are possible for global default Level 1 because all objects do not have the same color or appearance properties The global font setting can be selected with the command Settings Default Font Level 2 Object type specific settings Applies to all objects of a certain type The defaults for the individual object types Level 2 can be set in one and the same dialog This dialog can be opened with the command Object Defaults For every object type a tab is available To change the default settings for a certain object type click on the desired tab Click through the tabs in which you wish to change settings The input form designer remembers all changes you make The changes affect all newly inserted obje
449. vailable 15 After completion of the conversion you will find the project file project cfg as well as the two directories DataSchemas and Views in the defined target path In directory Views all input forms with the corresponding pictures are stored in directory DataSchemas all list view configurations This generated folders and files can be copied directly to the server or uploaded via FTP to a server The correct target directory is the directory RM WebAccess of the WebAccess installation see chapter WebAccess installation If you upload them via FTP define the corresponding FTP settings in the following dialog If your firewall is blocking FTP access you must allow the access If the upload process will not start immediately click again on the Upload button 1 9 License amp License extension Select File Help About to display license information edition and the serial number of the product In addition to a purchase license a rental license and test license are also available To extend the scope of the license or change the edition select License Upgrade in this text box or in the cRM application group You can also release a cancelled rental license or a test version in the login dialog by clicking on the corresponding button The license wizard can also started from the cRM program directory it is called using the parameter crmship6 exe license All licenses are for concurrent users In other words y
450. vase HARE ERA 46 Entering and editing data ssssssssssssss 48 3 1 Opening views csssssssssssssenm eene enne 48 3 2 Displaying the records sssssseennn m 48 M d 48 aput TOFTTEVIGW a oic HERE PEE RURSUM ARES E DN RETE RISE 49 WED VICW acre sies dee eie et o ee ie aee stip ete n rc des 49 RepoFEVIGW ue Ed b RR Ug ta dud ete a db c RE udis 50 3 3 Creating a new record sssssssssssssssssssesee enne eee 50 3 4 Editing a record oor rene br ete dae eee dea 50 In the input form VIew ese ettet rer ete eere eroe rn era 50 In the list view and containers nnne 51 Duplicating records eius irt estet RN CER NEED Ote peret 51 Del amp tng reGords 2 om pota Dr REED B GERE CREER ERE bat 52 Working simultaneously i eel ae e de pes 52 3 5 Relationally linked records sessseeeeenm 52 Td relationally linkedirecords i o teretes 53 Assignment of multiple records to one record containers 53 Assignment in link view N M relation 54 3 6 Sorting records issue ipei rriv 55 Define anew Sort Orde pesats ea tte te d te ted ve tee ta ts 55 Sad SISUORY eae tae rte tese A Coe Li s cped Dons ead as a atietats 56 3 8 Favorites sien o RE e ela elders bb sedo a Ee ERR EN EE eR ET TA 57 3 9 Categorizations with codes sssssesssssee nemen 57 3 10 Supporting automatisms cssssssseeenm me
451. ve gt If you also activate Prompt you have the option of deciding from situation to situation whether an entry is made After completing the corresponding activity you will be asked whether it should be logged If you have activated the auto log for the sending of e mails you should deactivate the Prompt option before sending multiple e mails Otherwise you will have to confirm every single e mail 197 Con 198 iguration of views a View Settings Companies Ea Name Companies Database table view Companies ve v Fields Relations Codes Dupes Function Definitions Auto No AutoLog Document Management Docur Auto logs B x Action Target view Active Prompt Phone call Activities Iv Fields 8 X wa Field Formula Append Direction 2 rH Duration Val Action Duration n Priority 4 r DateTime LocDateS now LocTimeS now r C 2A etinn Aatas m M gt o OK Cancel In the Fields area you set which log entry should be made in which field The fields of the target view are available to choose from Tip if you select the target view Contacts in the included reference project the log fields Direction and Type are available These fields are relationally linke d with the views Directionlypes and Contactlypes The meanings of the field contents should therefore be taken from the corresponding views e g Type 2 e mail In the Fo
452. ve as Send per Close i Output Instant Esporte ax NI 4p Contacts x Xl Appointments Tasks x X E Companies Busnes sear sat S fad Companies ABC analysis chart isi Companies Contact persons iai Contacts Addresses iai Contacts Address list with activities isi Contacts Various contact reports isi SalesOpportunities Opportunity list isi SelesOpportunities Sales pipeline isi SalesOpportunities Stages gll views xp Favorites ric gt oa Y fitter qe ic Watch Results AO OOOOL Ao lt v i Seiten Ver QR Active Users Ma 49 49 Administrator SRVDB In this way you can check the layout of a print without having to waste paper The output on the screen is exactly as it would appear in real print WYSIWYG After the layout check you can start the print directly from the preview window without having to run the print command again gt After selecting the print template select Preview under Direct to in the print dialog gt Inthe preview window the single print pages are displayed with the real data The unprintable edges of a page are hatched On the left side of the preview window the various print pages are shown as thumbnails This enables you to quickly navigate between the pages of the document by clicking them gt The Copies set in the print options is not respected in the preview This only become
453. view and assign them to a record e g in the Contacts view You can also allow the associated record to be displayed D David fx S S file Personal Edit Actions View Options Tools Network Window combit Relationship Manager Help ES New g Bl Forms y A Gl el 3 Repi iie Reply to an Al Archive message s amp e lt al Show addresse s EJ amp v From Sul irl settings Date Status B G Ata Glance P amp v ungeheuerGrelationship man In 11 51 Mo 20 04 2009 Received El amp Undistributed v sand relationship manager Information cRM 11 26 Mo 20 04 2009 Received The Archive and Display functions can be accessed via buttons and via the menu combit Relationship Manager Multiple messages can also be processed at the same time Archive message and Show address Record search in cRM is started via Show address and Archive message using the e mail address or fax SMS number of the recipient sender It looks for a match in all of the available e mail fields or telephone and cell phone fields in the Search view If one or more matches have been found the message is archived in the Archive view and the appropriate records are displayed in the Search view In Outlook the email is marked with the date and time after being stored If no match has been found a corresponding message is displayed You can also have a log file displaye
454. w n the first case you can overwrite or amend the record that you are currently in If you choose the second option a completely new record is created With the CDs from Switzerland you can even transfer several records Transfer manually Here you can start a search for firms names or telephone numbers as desired corresponding to the options offered by the CD The application will lead you through the search which of course will always be a little different With some telephone CDs a wizard is available to you that explain what to do step by step The search results are displayed in a list and the Transfer from CD window opens in some cases after double clicking a result here too You can again select between transferring or creating new as described above Note With some telephone CDs for which multiple transfers are possible the manual creation of new records from the telephone CD interface is not possible In this case you would have to export the data from the application yourself Please note the so called Robinson entries in the Swiss telephone CDs which are marked with a star These Robinson addresses do not wish to receive adverts You as user are responsible for correctly following the terms of the individual telephone CDs 83 Searching for records Note Since structures and addresses of websites can change very quickly it is possible that websites and services will become inaccessible without warning 4
455. which will be described below Description Enter a short description This description is available as the variable Action TemplateDescription in auto logs Further information can be found in chapter Configuration of views Sender Here you can write an individual sender address You have three options Multiple recipients in separate mails personalized You can enter up to three To fields that contain e mail addresses If the first field contains no address the other two fields are checked for their contents and the e mail is sent to the addresses in them Records that do not contain an e mail address are listed after the mailing has taken place Multiple recipients in a single mail not personalized In the selection box above you can also set that the multiple e mail is to be sent to a distribution list by BCC One single recipient You can enter the email address in the To field CC Additional recipients can be manually entered here Note Email addresses may include and gt as well e g Peter Ross lt ross combit net gt e mail text In the text field enter the text and variables such as the title and name of the recipient Select Start gt Fields to insert field variables or functions such as date time calculations and conditions By inserting fields in an e mail template you can make your e mails more personal and therefore more appealing Example Rtrim SalutationLetter Name
456. work Functionality Settings gt Dial Device Settings gt Dial Device Properties Settings gt Incoming Call Detection 333 Appendix File gt Options gt General gt List of Calls Print Template File gt Options gt General Messages File gt Options gt General gt Simulate Incoming Call File gt Options gt General gt Telephony System File gt Options gt Sounds ar ar ar ar ar ar ar ar S S S S S Star S S S Star S ar gt Dia gt gt gt Dia Dia Dia Dia Edi Edi Edi Edi Edi Ou eMail gt Dial gt Manual gt Next gt Pause gt Powerdialing gt Add Log to Record gt Delete Item gt Delete Item gt Delete All Items gt Move Item gt Switch to Application put gt List of Calls Command in Ribbon ar ar ar ar ar ar ar o co o o o o o o ar 334 rie gt rie gt I o V gt gt File gt Exit Help Import New Open Options Save Save As Format gt Tex Paste gt Fields Format gt HTML essage gt Send Paste gt Attachment gt File Paste gt Attachment gt Formular Paste gt Hyperlink Paste gt Picture gt Sending of SMS Settings gt List of Calls Print Template Settings gt Sending of SMS Messages Tools gt Simulate Incoming Call Settings gt Telephony System Settings gt Sounds Dial gt
457. xample the function AskString to allow a user input As long as the formula uses variables of a record this user input will be offered for every record otherwise only once If the result of a formula is empty the field is ignored completely so that any default values of the database server can take over Append Relationally Ea Relational view Activities Activities oa Fields Field Formula Responsible Direction 2 ActivityType 1 Priority 4 e A record will relationally be appended to all currently filtered records New records will be created in the selected view corresponding to the specified fields The relation will be created automatically 2 Load Save Execute Cancel gt To begin the process click on Execute A new record is automatically created and linked in the relationally linked view e g documents contacts for every record in the active view according to the defined field list Templates for relational appending All settings for relational appending can be saved as a template so that they can be used again or made available to other users This is done in a similar way to saving filter expressions Click the Save button In the dialog that opens you can set whether the saved filter is to be available to all users or just yourself In the Description column enter some descriptive text You can then set a name that can be used for access by scr
458. xtras Add ons Now all available expansions are displayed Select the entry combit Relationship Manager Thunderbird Add on and select the button Deactivate or Uninstall If the add on with the name combit Relationship Manager Thunderbird Add on does not appear in the list add it by clicking on the button Install You will find the add on file cRMTBAddOn combit net xpi in the cRM installation directory Note Restart Thunderbird after this process To display the buttons in Thunderbird select View gt Toolbars gt Customize You can then position the buttons via drag amp drop De Activating the David Add On If you want to de activate the David add on re install the application again e g via System Control gt Software gt Change applications and de Jactivate the David add on option in the installation dialog To display the buttons and menu items unzip the file cmbtTICAdadln zip from the cRM installation directory into the David directory David Code scripts on the David server In 118 Archiving messages from eMail Client the scripts directory there are then a subdirectory combit with the file cmbtAddIn vbs and a subfolder cRM In the David user settings in the David Administrator activate the option Individual Scripts and enter the path for the script file combit embtAddIn vbs Additional information on the use of scripts in David can also be found in the script documentation in the
459. y gt gt Execute Mange Ribbon and toolbars Start gt Actions gt Route Planning gt Route Planning Start gt Actions gt Route Planning gt Get Directions to Current Record Start gt Find gt Replace Start gt Filter gt Create Filter or Filter gt Compose gt General Filter Filter gt Compose gt Full Text Query Filter gt Compose gt Query By Example Filter gt Compose gt Free SOL Query Filter gt Manually gt Compose Filter Manually gt Apply Filter gt Manually gt Include Record Filter gt Manually gt Exclude Record Filter Manually gt Include All Filter Manually gt Exclude All Filter Manually gt Record Selection gt Load Manual Filter Filter Manually gt Record Selection gt Save Manual Filter Filter gt Manually gt Cancel Selection Filter gt Compose gt Dupe Check Filter gt Compose gt Execute Filter Expression Settings gt Manage gt Filter Expressions Start gt Filter gt Active Last Filter or Filter gt Compose gt Last Filter Filter gt Compose gt Undo Filter Filter gt Compose gt Invert Filter Data gt Transfer gt Transfer Filter to phone manager Filter gt Manually gt Record Selection gt Save Current Filter as Manual Filter Settings gt Manage gt Sort Orders Data gt External Data gt Import Data gt External Data gt Export Data gt External Data gt Import With Synchronization Da
460. you then specify the condition i e you select is equal to as the operator and e mail as the value gt Drag the activity SendEmail into this branch gt For the activity SendEmail select a mail template with the file extension mtpx that is suitable for the view as an E mail template property By clicking on the button a file selection dialog is provided by clicking on another button in the connection dialog gt Inthe properties of the left IfThenGeneral branch you then specify the condition i e you select is equal to as the operator and Letter as the value gt Drag the activity PrintRecord into this branch Forthe activity PrintRecord selecta printtemplate e g with the file extension crd that is suitable for the view as a Print template property By clicking on the button a file selection dialog is provided by clicking on another button in the connection dialog 17 3 System activities The System activities System FaultHandler System lfElse System Policy System Sequence System Suspend System Terminate System Throw uad System While are specific activities in the workflow foundation of the Microsoft NET framework They are necessary for special workflow functions Workflow with the universal rule editor With the activity System Policy universal rule editor extremely complex workflows can be created because they can be defined directly in the rule editor An i
461. you wish to change gt Inthe line Search for enter the text that you want to replace In the example this is the firm name gt Inthe field Replace with enter the text that you want to have instead If the current text is to be deleted and is not to be replaced with anything simply leave the field empty The text will just be removed gt Under Options you can set whether the search is to be case sensitive and whether the replacement process is to be confirmed for every record as a precaution Note To use this option case sensitive searching must be set up in the database server configuration Depending on the database system being used it can be turned on up to field level After starting the process with Execute the entered text is searched and is replaced with the new text Note The replacement takes place on the server and on the client depending on the input In the server replacement the database server performs the entire process 81 Searching for records 4 5 Search in Social Media and Online Directories You can conduct a search in multiple online directories based on the current record A variety of social media directories are supported for this e g XING Facebook gt Select Start gt In Directories gt Find Record in Online Directories and Social Media gt Inthe Online Directories Search dialog you determine or confirm the search fields and directories The given search fields
462. za ttg 115 Thunderbird Mozilla 212 Nilserzre fic 248 tiD WIZAEQ t ato red mH 47 Tobit Appointments and tasks 109 David add on ssssssss 115 David message archive 115 TOOLS iret tte d recon 287 Transfer record 136 Transfer template 136 Bookmatk 2 enean 222 CIIpBOard ttt 219 COnFIguratlOri i uad cire 217 Document fields 224 Document Template 219 OPtlONS ciet E E 221 FRUIT SA eet M e 136 Syntax rules ede 216 U Unicode eee s 48 183 Uninstall eoe 28 Update installation 26 U Ser sien See User management User interface 37 Adjustitid iare aep etas 41 Customizing ribbon 45 Global customizations 41 INDULTORMS ieee oet t ete Sce 275 s amp rlOglt arc e en 309 User management sss 306 Automatic login 309 Create views 178 Duplicate user 306 Fieldzngliisca ss e eee 315 General rights 312 ndividual rights 311 LOGIN came ees 309 aster dataz is 309 emberships sss 310 PaSsWOFQ sin pte 309 Project rights dies 313 Record hGhtSitece eso nos 314 LO DES nde ees 311 User Settlngsusi settore 312 MIGW TIGhES desert teretes 314 User Variables aee 230 V Validation su eae da ren 289 Validity Ghie 6k ois ote 33 VBSGIIDUS n de nete ns 272 View Gonfigqurationia i cce 184 Define relations
463. zu Produkt Z 15 User2 23082012 15 36 10 8j amp 2 Nachgehakt wegen Angebot zu Produkt Z 20 User2 14 07 2012 11 45 43 8j A 3 Nicht erreicht 3 User2 19 092012 14 30 00 3j c3 Jubi umsangebot Aschenbahn User2 7 1 Working with activities and documents By double clicking an item in the document container except double clicking in a document field or by right clicking an item and selecting Edit the associated record of the Documents view is displayed and can be edited You can open a document in the container directly by double clicking it When right clicking the document field in the record of the documents view or directly in the document container various functions are available to you in the context menu Edit Document with Associated Application Opens the linked embedded document in the linked application e g Word Excel for direct editing Directly access the functions of the linked application e g Microsoft Word Document gt Print M Delete Deletes the linked record including the embedded document If you delete a record with a linked document of the File link or DMS document type the linked document is not automatically deleted This must be done manually The assignment occurs automatically or through drag amp drop i e you drag the relevant document into the document field with the mouse When right clicking in this container new records and documents can be created and li

combit Relationship Manager - Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents